You are on page 1of 888
STUDY GUIDE AND SOLUTIONS MANUAL PAULA YURKANIS BRUICE University of California Santa Barbara With Contributions by Jess Jones Saint Leo University ORGANIC CHEMISTRY Seventh Edition Boston Columbus Indianapolis New York San Francisco Upper Saddle River Amsterdam Cape Town Dubai London Madrid Milan) Munich Paris Montréal Toronto Delhi Mexico City So Paulo Sydney Hong Kong Seoul Singapore Taipei Tokyo Editor in Chief: Adam Jaworski ‘cutive Editor: Jeanne Zalesky Senior Marketing Manager: Jonathan Cottrell Assistant Editor: Erin Knever Managing Ei Project Manas Compositor: PreMediaGlobal Cover Designer: Cover Image Credi F, Chemistry and Geosciences: Gina M. Cheselka Pat Brown Integra Soltware Services Pvt, Ltd iase/Getty Imi Credits and acknowledgments borrowed from other sourees and reproduce ‘on the appropriat I, with permission. inthis textbook appear within the text. Copyright © 2014, 2011. 2007. 2004, 2001 by Pearson Education, Ine, All rights reserved. Manufactured in the Unit ‘States of Ameria, This publication is provected by Copyright, and permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in are recording eval system, or transmission in any Form of by any mean electronic, mechanical, photocopyin of likewise To obtain permission(s) to use material from this work please submit a written request to Pearson Education, Inc., Permissions Department, | Lake Street. Department 1G Upper Saddle River. NJ 07458, Many of the designations used by manufacturers and sellers 1o distinguish their products are claimed as tralemarks, ‘Where those designations appear in this book, and the publisher was aware of a trademark claim, the designations have ‘been printed in initial eaps of al caps. PEARSON 7.89 10-EBM—I7 16 35 14 \wwwpearsonhighered.com ISBN-10: 0-321-82659-0 ISBN-13: 978-0-321-8265 CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 2 SPECIAL TOPI CHAPTER 3 CHAPTER 4 CONTENT Spectroscopy Problems Answers to Spectroscopy Problems Remembering General Chemistry: Electronic Structure and Bonding Important Terms Solutions to Problems Practice Test Acids and Bases: Central to Understanding Organic Chemistry Important ‘Terms, Solutions to Problems Practice Test pH, px, and Butlers Problems on pH, p&,, and Buffers, Solutions to Problems on pH, pX,. and Buffers An Introduction to Organic Compounds: Nomenclature. Physical Properties, and Representation of Structure Important Terms Solutions to Problems Practice Test Isomers: The Arrangement of Atoms in Space Important Terms Solutions to Problems Practice Test Alkenes: jure, Nomenclature, and an Introduction to Reactivity * Thermodynamics and Kinetics Important Terms Solutions to Problems Practice Test Copgtight © 2014 Pearson Education, ln 4 74 75 89 91 102 104 mW ui 5 135 137 137 140 160 163 163 166 180 CHAPTER 6 CHAPTER 7 CHAPTER 8 SPECIAL TOPIC I CHAPTER 9 CHAPTER 10 CHAPTER IL CHAPTER 12 ‘The Reactions of Alkenes: The Stereochemistry of Addition Reactions Important Terms Solutions to Problems Practice Test The Reactions of Alkynes + An Introduction to Multistep Synthesis Important Terms Solutions to Problems Practice Test Delocalized Electrons and Their Effect on Stability, p&,. and the Products of a Reaction Important Terms Solutions to Problems, Practice Test Molecular Orbital Theory Substitution Reactions of Alky! Halides Important Terms Solutions to Problems Practice Test Elimination Reactions of Alkyl Halides + Competition Between Substitution and Elimination Important Terms, Solutions to Problems: Practice Test Reactions of Alcohols, Ethers, Epoxides. Amines, and Thiols, Important Terms Solutions to Problems Practice Test Organometallic Compounds Important Terms, Solutions to Problems Practice Test 219 219 221 24 236 236 240 27 281 288 288 290 306 CHAPTER 13 CHAPTER 14 CHAPTER 15, CHAPTER 16 CHAPTER 17 CHAPTER 18 CHAPTER 19 CHAPTER 20 's of Alkanes Important Terms Solutions to Problems Practice Test ‘Mass Spectrometry, Infrared Spectroscopy, and Ultraviolet/Visible Spectroscopy Important Terms Solutions to Problems Practice Test NMR Spectroscopy Important Terms Solutions to Problems Practice Test Reactions of Carboxylic Acids and Carboxylic Acid Derivatives Important Terms Solutions to Problems Practice Test Reactions of Aldehydes and Ketones * More Reactions of Carboxylic Acid Derivatives + Reactions of ax -Unsaturated Carbonyl Compounds Important Terms. Solutions to Problems Practice Test ctions at the e-Carbon of Carbonyl Compounds Important Terms Solutions to Problems Practice Test Reactions of Benzene and Substituted Benzenes, Important Terms Solutions to Problems Practice Test More About Amines + Reactions of Heterocyclic Compounds Important Terms, Solutions to Problems Practice Test Copyright © 2014 Peanon Education, tn 387 387 389 405 407 407 409 432 434 434 437 457 459 459 462 492 495 495 497 534 536 536 538 575 377 377 579 630 632 632 633 651 CHAPTER 21 CHAPTER 22 CHAPTER 23 CHAPTER 25, CHAPTER 26 CHAPT CHAPTER 28 Answers to Practice Tests The Organic Chemistry of Carbohydrates Important Terms Solutions to Problems Practice Test ‘The Organic Chemistry of Amino Acids, Peptides, and Proteins Important Terms Solutions to Problems, Practice Test Catalysis in Organie Reactions and in Enzymatic Reactions Important Terms, Solutions to Problems; Practice Test ‘The Organic Chemistry of the Coenzymes, Compounds Derived from Vitamins Important Terms Solutions to Problems, Practice Test ‘The Organic Chemistry of the Metabolic Pathways + Terpene Biosynthesis, Important Terms Solutions to Problems, Practice Test The Chemistry of the Nucl Important Terms Solutions to Problems Practice Test ie Acids Synthetic Polymers Important Terms Solutions to Problems: Pericyclic Reactions Important Terms Solutions to Problems CCopssght © 2015 Peanon Elution Ine 680 680 683 07 709 709 mW 730 7 21 733 749 751 75! 753 769 786 786 799 307 307 809 823 Spectroscopy Problems 1, Determine the structure of the straight-chain pentanol that produces the mass spectrum shown here 100 a 80 on 40 a 35 | B 0 t Ww 2% DDH mt: 2 The mass spectrum of an ether iy shown heve, Determine the molecular formula of the ether that would produce this spectrum and then draw possible structures for it. = a 100 Y 80 59 a) 2 45 "4 3 40 Z 20 O-jrvetfesttper 1s 0 38 SO 4S 50 SS A) es OS ms Copyeigh © 2114 Pearson Education, Ine Spectroscopy Problems The mass spectra of pentane and isopentane are shown here. Determine which spectrum belongs to which compound, es 1oo4 20 Otne 0 15 2 28 30 35 40 45 50 55 OY OS TH lo} 5 80+ oo} fe 40 204 GO ral rll | 30 nt 2030 40 cop Gummer o 7 80 9 100 10 120 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Eaton to my students ight 2014 Person Bact, I Jam enormously grateful to Jordan Fantini of Denison University. who reworked all the problems to make this book as error free as possible and who gave me many important suggestions along the way. Tam solely responsible for any errors that may remain. If you find any, please email me so they can be fixed in a future printing, Try to work as many problems as possible. so you can truly enjoy the wonderful world of org chemistry, nic Paula Yurkanis Bruice pybruice@ chem.uesb.edu Copy ight ©2014 Pearson Econ, fe 4 Spectroscopy Problems Which of the following compounds gives the mass spectrum shown here’? AL +o AL NN 100 a x0 “o 40 20. o fl W 15 2% 25 30 35 40 45-5055 OSD TS mk: An unknown acid underwent a reaction with [-butanol, The product of the reaction gave the mass speetrum shown here. What is the product of the reaction, and what acid was used’? fo 37 w-| 4) 20-1 13613 0 seyret 25 30 15 wo mlz Copyeiht © 204 Peuron Education, I 6, 7 Spectroscopy Problems Identify the compound with molecular formula CyH,,Qs that gives the following IR and 'H NMR spectra. Identify the compound with molecular formula C,H, Br that gives the following 'H NMR spectrum. Copy sigh © 2011 Pearson duction, I Spectroscopy Problems 5 Wdentify the compound with molecular formula C,H, 0 that gives the following IR and 'H NMR spectra, ‘A methyl-substituted benzene is treated with Cl, in the presence of AICI;, and a 'H NMR spectrum i faken of one of the monochlorinated products that is isolated from the reaction mixture. Identify this compound. Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, tne 6 Spectroscopy Problems 10, Identify the compound with molecular formula CcH),O that gives the following IR and 'H NMR spectra 9 all LL, Identify the compound with molecular formula C,HyBr that gives the following 'H NMR spectrum. _——— epee A 7 6 7 1 0 CConyright © 2014 Peurvon Eduation Spectroscopy Problems 12. Identify the compound with molecular formul CoH,» that gives the following IR and 'H NMR spectra 13 Identity the compound with molecular formula CyH),0 that gives the following, 'H NMR spectrum. Copyright © 2018 Pearson Education, te 8 Spectroscopy Problems 14. Identify the compound with molecular formula C,H,CIO that ives the following IR and 'H NMR spectra. 15, Identify the compound with mole ur formula CsH,3r, that gives the following 'H NMR spectrum, Copysigtt ©2014 Pearson Education, Spectroscopy Problems 9 16. Identify the compound with molecular formula C,H,O that gives the following IR and 'H NMR spectra 17, Identify the compound with molecular formula C;HsBeN that gives the following 'H NMR spectrum. 8 7 6 S 4 3 ‘Conyeih © 2014 Pearson cation, I 10 Spectroscopy Problems 18. ‘The 'H NMR spectra of I-chloro-3-iodopropane and J-bromo-3-chloropropane are shown here, Which ‘compound gives which compound spectrum? 7 6 5 7 3 2 i 0 19, Identify the compound with molecular formula C,HyO that gives the following 'H NMR spectrum. 6 a7 Oo 0 Copysight © 2014 Pearson fet Ie Spectroscopy Problems mn 20. Idemiily the compound with molecular formula CyHiO» that gives the following 'H NMR speetrum, i OT | | s 4 3 2 0 21. Identify the compound with molecular formula CsH;OsBr that gives the followi CConyight © 2014 Pearson Baveation, le 2 Spectroscopy Problems 22. Identify the compound with molecular formula C;H,0 that gives the following 'H NMR spectrum, — 10 2 0 The two 'H NMR spectra shown here are given by constitutional isomers with molecular formula CsHyBr entity each isomer a Copyright ©2014 Pesron fale Ine Spectroscopy Problems B 24. Anunknown alkene with molecular formula CyHj, undergoes ozonolysis (Section 6.11 in the text), Only ‘one product is formed. The IR and 'H NMR spectra of the product are shown here, What is the product? What alkene produced this product? 0 Copyright 218 Pearson duction, Ie u Spectroscopy Problems JR and 'H_ NMR spectra, 28, Identify the compound with molecular formula C,H;BrO) that gives the follow foffst: 0.2ppm. 26. Identify the compound with molecular formula CyH,Cls that gives the following 'H NMR spectrum, Copyright 012014 Pearson Eaton. bn Spectroscopy Problems 15 27. A compound with the following IR spectrum was formed by a reaction with |-propyne. If the number of carbons in the reactant and product is the same, what compound is formed and what reaction conditions produced this compound? 28. Identity the compound with molecular formuka CyH,O> that gives the following 'H and “C NMR spectra, coc, QE-300 240 220200180 160401201098 A Copyright © 2014 Person Buca. Ie 16 Spectroscopy Problems 29. Identify the compound with molecular formula CHyO> that gives the following 'H NMR spectrum. se i LAL 8 4 6 5 0 30, Identify the compound with molecular formula CH, NO that gives the fallow et ee ft 31. Identify the compound with molecular formula CH Qs that gives the following 'H NMR spectrum, —___f 3 4 3 2 0 Spectroscopy Problems " ‘The "C NMR and 'H NMR spectra of | 2 1, 3-,and 1, 4-ethylmethylbenzene are shown here. Determine which spectrum belongs to which compound, a 160 140 120 100 80 6 40 o | Solvent 7 3| 3] 3 1 —— == 8 7 6 5 : 3 2 1 0 160 140 0080 4020 o Solvent i L 6 +| Le Copyright ©2014 Pearson aveaton. la 18 Spectroscopy Problems 160 140. Loo 30 oo 40 v | Solvent uh we 1 1 TO Wdentify the compound with molecular formula CH), that gives the following 'H NMR spectrum. ppm 2014 Pearson Eaton ts. Spectroscopy Problems 9 Identify the compound with molecular formula CsHo that gives the following 'H NMR spectrum, 35. Identify the compound with molecular formula CsH,O that gives the following IR and 'H NMR spectra, Gopyrigh © 2014 Pearson Esato, Ine 20 Speetroscopy Problems 36, Identify the compound with molecular formula C,H,CI that gives the following 'H NMR spectrum, rc 37. Identify the aleohol that gives the follow "HNMR spectrum, Copia Spectroscopy Problems 2 38, An unknown alcohol gives the Following 'H NMR spectrum. Identify the alcohol, (HINT: Because this is a spectrum of a pure alcohol, the OH proton is split by adjacent protons.) _— 6 7 0 39, Identify the compound with molecular formula CH) 0 that gives the following 'H NMR spectrum, 2014 Pear Els 2 Spectroscopy Problems 40, Identify the compound with motecular formula CsH-NO that gives the Following 1R und 'H NMR spectra : | Copyright © 2014 Peano Eaton. tne Spectroscopy Problems 23 41. ‘The 'H NMR spectra shown here are given by constitutional isomers of propylamine (CjH,N). Identify the isomer that gives each spectrum, Copyright © 2014 Pearson scan I 24 Spectroscopy Problems 42. Identify the compound with molecular formula CJH:N that gives the following IR and 'H NMR spcetea. ol al 43. Identify the compound with molecular formula C,H,BrO that gives the following 'H NMR spectrum, Copyright © 2081 Peano Euston Ie Spectroscopy Problems 25 44. Identify the compound with molecular formula C;H\O) that gives the following IR and NMR spectra. Copyright © 2018 Pearson Eduction. le %6 45. 4. WB. 9. Spectroscopy Problems Identify the alcohol that gives the following 'H NMR spectrum. 3 + 3 z i v Identify the compound with molecular formula CH) 305 that gives the following 'H NMR data, The num ber of hydrozens responsible for each signal is given in parentheses, 1.1 ppm (6H) doublet 2.2 ppm (2H) quartet 1.7 ppm (3H) triplet 3.8 ppm (1H) sepret lar formula ClHgO that gives the following 'H NMR data, The num- Jn signal is given in parentheses Identify the compound with molec ber of hydrogens responsible for 14 ppm (2H) multiplet 3.8 ppm (2H) triptet 2.5 ppin (2H) triptet 6.9-7.8 ppm (4H) multiplet entity the compound with molecular formula C,\H3,0 that wives the following 'H NMR data. 1.1 ppm (18H) singlet 2.2 ppm (4H) singlet Wentify the compound with molecular formula C/H.O that gives the following 'HINMR data 1.6 ppm (4H) multiplet 3.8 ppm (4H) triplet [dentify the compound with molecular formula C)sH),05 that gives the following 'H NMR data, 3.8 ppm (6H) singlet 7.7 ppm (4H) doublet 7.3 ppm (4H) doublet Copseight © 2014 Par Edt. Spectroscopy Problems 29 Only four fragmentation patterns are shown for isopentane. Fragmentations that would result in only a pri mary fragment and a methyl fragment have been excluded because these would be less abundant than those shown here + cy + cHCHCH.CH, mvs =57 fe 1 I H,CHCH,CH, MsCH—CHCHy on “ 2 . H,CHCH,CH, ——+ cHCHCH.CH, + *CH, oH CH 3 W\CH—CH,CH,| = ———+ -CH,CH, + CH,CH mie =43 cn, cHy 4 I CHCH + +CH,CH, m= 29 The four major fragments occur at the same n/z values (57, 43, 29, and 15) as those found for pentane, but their relative intensities are different. Fragmentation patterns | and 3 are expected to produce the most abundant fragments because they both form a secondary cation, and the stability of the cation is more important than the stability of the radical in determining the most abundant fragments. Therefore, we expect a base peak with m/z = 43 (because the secondary cation is accompanied by a primary radical) and a less intense peak with m/z = 57 (because the secondary cation is accompanied by a methyl radical). Both spectra show a base peak at m/z = 43. The major difference in the two spectra is the intensity of the peak with m/z = 57. The spectrum of isopentane should show a more intense peak because it is due to a secondary cation, whereas the peak with m/z = 57 in the spectrum of pentane is due to a primary cation, ‘Thus, pentane gives the first mass spectrum and isopentane gives the second. Copyrigh © 2014 Pearson Econ, Ine 30 Spectroscopy Problems The molecular ion for this compound fas an mi/> = 73. The nitrogen rule states that if « mol an odd value. then the structure must have an odd rumber of nitrogens. Therefore, we alkane, the ketone, and the ether. Now we can determine the molecular formula of the compound using the rule of 13. When we subtract 14 (ile mass of nitrogen) from 73. we get 59. 39 Ty 7 carbon with 7 lett over Therefore. the molecular formula is C,H, N. Both amines given as possible structures have this Formula To determine which of the amines is the source of the spectrum, we can take cies from how ethers and alcohols cleave and apply them to amines. Oxygen-containing species undergo a-cleavage. If nitrogen be- haves similarly. then we would expect fragment (0 form by cleaving a C—C bond alpha to the nitrogen in each compound. Given the relative stability of this fragment. we can anticipate that it will be the base peak of the mass spectrum. He cH, a cu, ese a chy ot - HN CHACH CH, SSNS CH) + CHLCHSCHy mis= 30 e-Cleavage of N.N-dimethylethylamine gives a cabon with m/z = ion with m/z = 30. The spectrum shows a base peak with m/< e-Cleavage of butylamine gives 58, indicating that the compound fe the spectrum is N,V-dimethylethylamine Ny ‘The mass spectrum has two peaks of identical height with nv/< values. = 136 and 138. indicating the pres tence of bromine in the product. (Recall that bromine has two isotopes of equal abundance with weights of 79 and 81 amu.) Now we need to think about the type of reaction that occurred. Under acidic conditions, the starting material (1-butsnol) will be protonated, a Be 4 1A ee Copyright © 2014 Pearson Eston ts Spectroscopy Problems 27 Answers to Spectroscopy Problemy 1. There are three straight-chain pentanols: [-pentanol, 2-pentanol, and 3-pentanol. Because the most stable fragment for an alcohol is the one formed by a-cleavage, we can see which of the alcohols will form the base peak shown in the spectrum (that is, a bise peak with m1/= = 45) as a result of a-cleavage. For I-pentanol, only one a-cleavage is possible. It will form a cationic fragment with an/> = 31 estenete . OHLCH CH CH, + HO=CH, (CH\CH.CH.CH, CH, OH For 2-pentanol, two a-cleavages are possible, One will form a cationic fragment with m/z = 73 and a methyl radical. The second will form a cationic fragment with m/> = 45 and a propyl radical. Because a propyl radical is more stable than a methyl radical, the base peak is expected to have m/z = 45 7 CHCH.CHCH, cH CHCH,CHSCH, B OH I + CH,CH—CH.CH;CH, ly + HO CHCH, For 3-pentanol, only one a-cleavagy possible because of the symmetry of the molecule, a-Cleavage will forma cationie fragment with m/z = 58. OH CHC, CH CHC, ENE CHEE, + HOSCHCHLCHY m/:=59 ‘The base peak of the given mays spectrum hay i/z = 45. Thus, the mass spectrum is that of 2-pentanol. We also see a significant fragment at t/z = 73, the m/s value of the other a-cleavage product. Copyright ©.20 4 Pear Fauci, I 28 Spectroscopy Problems y the molecular ion, The molecular ion, the peak that represents the intact start- 74, Now we can use the rule of 13 to determine the molecular formula, 4 B S carbons with 9 lett over From the rule of 13, we end up with a molecular formult of CsHy,. Because the compound is an ether. we know that it has one oxygen, so we must add one © and subtract one C and four Hy trom the formula. The resulting molecular formula CyH yO ‘There are three ethers thas have this molecular formula: methy! propyl ether. diethyl ether and isopropyl methyl ether. PLN Ayr One First, we need to determine what the most abundant cationic fragments would be for each compound ‘The possible fragments for pentane sre: 1 fem—encncn.cn]” ——- -cn, + sencncucn, mes? 2 fewen—encncny” —— -cncn, = -cncn.cn, mess 3 + -CHCH.CH, + *CHLCH, nfs = 29 4 + -CHSCHCH.CH, + *CH, 5 me The most abundant fragments are going to be the result of bond cleavages that produce the most stuble cations and radicals. Fragments from patterns 2 and 3 should be the most common because both the cations and the radicals formed ste primary Fragmentation pattern 2 is expected to give the hase peak (the most stable fragment), The cation formed in pattern 2 (ur/= = 43) will be more stable than the cation formed in pattern 3 (nr: = 29), because the lon- ger fragment will result in greater inductive stabilization (the longer chitin will doa better job of stabilizing the carbocation), Fragments from fr nentation patterns I and 4 are expected to be less common, They each form a pri- mary species, like fragmentation patterns 2 and 3, but the second species they form is a methyl fi (either a radical or a carbocation), whi patterns 2 and 3, mien nis less sable than the second species formed in fragmentation Copsrght © 2014 Peano Flaton Ins Spectroscopy Problems 31 ‘The protonated alcohol now has a leaving, that bromine iy present in the product, we group that can be replaced by nucleophile. Because we know: im assume that bromide ion is the incoming nucleophile, H =| + HO SAN, _ 3 We now know that the product of the reae the nucleophile, is HBr, on is I-bromobutane. The acid, which must be the source of Thi als near 7 and 8 ppm are due to the hydrogens of a benzene ring. Because these signals inte- grate to 4 protons, the benzene ring must be disubstituted. Since both signals are doublets, the protons that give each signal must each be coupled t0 ore proton (V+ I= 1+ 1 = 2), Thus, the substituents must be at the |- and 4-positions. The proton or set of protons that gives the signal at the lowest frequency is labeled a. the next lowest b, and so on, He \ vt \-x \= Hy, By subtracting the six Cs and four Hs of the benzene ring from the molecular formula, we know that the {wo substituents contain three Cs, six Hs, and three Os (CyHyjOy — Cay = CH,O9). A triplet (1.4 ppm) that integrates to 3 protons and a quartet (4.2 ppm) that integrates to 2 protons characteristic of an ethyl group. Because the signal for the CH, group of the ethyl substituent appears at a relatively high frequency, we know that iti ise. an O). ached to an electronegative atom (in this, The presence of the CHCH,O group consumes more of the remaining molecular formula (CiH,Oy ~ CHO = CHO.) There is one remaining NMR signal, a singlet (9.8 ppm) that integrates to 1 proton. To help with the idemtitication, we turn to the IR spectrum, The broad absorption ner 3200 em~! indicates the OH stretch of an alcohol: the proton of the OH group would give the broad NMR signal at 9.8 ppm. ‘The strong absorption at 1680 em | indicates the presence of a carbonyl C=O group. Now that all the fragments of the compound have been identified, we ean put them together. The com- pound is ethyl 4shydroxyhencoate p Vd Ho < aoa \ ‘ocH.c! Copyright 912014 Pen don, ke 2 Spectroscopy Problems ‘The signaly at 1.1 and 1.8 ppm have been magnified und are shown as insets on the spectrum (the 2 and 1 represent the ppm scale) so you can better see the splitting. The triplet (1.1 ppm) that integrates to 3 pro- tons and the quartet (1.8 ppm) that integrates to 2 protons are characteristic of an ethy! group. (The peak to the right of the quartet is actually the b of the adjacent signal that integrates to 6 protons.) The singlet (1.7 ppm) that integrates to 6 protons indicates that there are two methyl groups in the same environment, Because the signal isa singlet, the carbon to w attached cannot be bonded to any hydrogens, The only atom not accounted for in the mole cHy cy ‘Therefore. the ethyl group and the bromine mus! be the {Wo substituents that are uttached to the carbon. Thus. the compound is 2-bromo-2-methylbutane. chy A major clue comes from the IR spectrum. The strong absorption at ~ 1710 em" indieates the presence of a carbonyl (C=O) group. Because the compound bas only one oxygen. we know thiat it must be an aldehyde o: a Ketone. The absence of absorptions at 2820 and 2720 em! tells us that the compound is not san aldehyde. The absorptions at 2880 and 2970 em”! are due to CH stretches of hydrogens attached (0 sp* carbons. ‘The 'HINMR spectrum has two unsplit signals, One integrates to 9 protons. the other to 3 protons. A signal that integrates to 9 protons suggests x revt-buty] group. and a signal that integrates to 3 protons sugzests on either side of the carbonyl a methyl group. The fact that they are both singlets indicates that they group. Thus. the compound is 3.3-dimethy ‘That the methyl group shows a signal at ~2.1 ppm reinforces this conelusion because that is where a ‘methyl group attached to a carbonyl group is expected 10 occu Copyright ©2014 Peas Lato % 10. Spectroscopy Problems 33 From the reaction conditions provided, we know that the product is a monochlorinated toluene cH, cH, a ‘The singlet (2.3 ppm) that integrates to 3 protons is due to the methyl group. ‘The signals in the 7-8 ppm region that integrate to 4 protons are due to the protons of a disubstituted ben- zene ring. Because both signals are doublets, we know that each proton is coupled to one adjacent proton. ‘Thus, the compound has a 1-4-substituted benzene ring. Therefore. the compound is 4-chloromethylbenzene. ‘The strong and broad absorption in the IR spectrum at 3400 em”! group. The absorption bands between 2800 and 3000 cm_ indicate hydrogens bonded to sp! c: indicates a hydrogen-bonded O—H bons. There is only one signal in the 'HNMR spectrum that integrates to | proton, so it must be due to the hydrogen of the OH group. The singlet that integrates to 3 protons can be attributed to a methyl group that is attached to a carbon that is not attached to any hydrogens. Since the other two signals show splitting, they represent coupled protons (that is, protons on adjacent car- bons). The quartet and triplet combination indicates an ethyl group. Since the quartet and triplet integrate to 6 and 4 protons, respectively, the compound must have two ethyl groups. ‘The identified fragments of the molecule are: iy “ 4, Hy EH, 2 as 0-H, Hy Hy When these fragments are subtracted from the molecular formula, only one carbon remains. Therefore, this carbon must connect the four identified fragments, The compound is 3-methyl-3-pentanol. oS on ‘The 'H NMR spectrum contains only one signal, so only one type of hydrogen is present in the mol- ecule. Because the compound has 4 carbons and 9 identical hydrogens, the compound must be tert-butyl bromide. cH eee CH, Copyeigh © 2014 Pearson Education, Ine uM 13. Spectroscopy Problems The molecular formula indicates that the compound is a hydrocarbon with one degree of unsaturation, The IR spectrum can tell us whether the degree of unsaturation iy due to x eyelie system or a double bond. The absorption of moderate intensity near 1660 cm indicates 3 C=C stretch. The absorption at ~3100 em due t0 CH stretches of hydrogens attached to sp? carbons. reinforces the presence of the double bond. ‘The two relatively high-frequency singlets (4.7 ppm) is given by vinylic protons. Because the sigma inte- {grates to 2 protons, we know that the compound has two vinylie protons. Because the signals are not split the vinyl protons must not be on adjacent carbons. Thus. they must be on the same carbon. ‘The singlet (1.8 ppm) that integrates to 3 protons must be a methyl group. Because it is a singlet. the methyl group must be bonded to a carbon that is not attached to any protons. ‘The doublet (1.1 ppm) that integrates to 6 protons and the septet (2.2 ppm) that integrates 10 F proton is characteristic of an isopropyl group, H isopropyl group Now that we know that the compound has a methyl gro attached to the sume carbon, the compound must be 2,3-dimethyl-I-butene. AL The signals in the 'H NMR spectrum between 6.7 and 6.9 ppm indicate the presence of a benzene ring. Because the signals integrate to 3 protons, it must be a trisubstituted benzene ring an isopropyl group, and two vinylic hydro; The triplet (6.7 ppm) that integrates to [ proton and the doublet (6.9 ppm) that integrates to 2 protons tell Us that the three substituents are adjacent to one another. (The Hy protons are split into a doublet by the H. proton, and the H, proton is split into a triplet by the wo Hy protons.) a Hj My K, Subtracting the trisubstituted benzene (C,H,) from tke molecular formula leaves C3H;O unaccounted for ‘The singlet (2.2 ppm) that integrates to 6 protons indicates that there are two methyl groups in identical environments. Now only OH is left from the molecuksr formula. The singlet at 4.6 ppm iy due to the proton of the OH group. The compound is 2,6-dimethy Iphenol. Copyright 912014 Pearwn ducaton ne 18, Spectroscopy Problems 35 A major clue to the compound's structure comes from the IR spectrum. The strong absorption at 1740 em" indicates the presence of a carbonyl (C=O) group. Since the compound has only one oxygen, the compound must be an aldehyde or a ketone, The absence of absorptions at 2820 and 2720.em- "tells us, that the compound is not an aldehyde ‘The NMR spectrum shows a singlet (2.3 ppm) that integrates to 3 protons, indi ting that itis due to a methyl group. The chemical shift of the signal (hydrogens attached to carbons adjacent to carbonyl car- bons typically have shifts between 2.1 and 2.3 ppm) methy' ind the Fact that the ‘bonyl group. al iy singlet suggest tha the oup is directly attached to the e: sare split. indica ese signals are altached to ad jacent carbons, Because the signal at 4.3 ppm is a quartet, we know that the proton that gives this signal is bonded to a carbon that wed to a methyl group. The other signal (1.6 ppm) is a doublet, so the proton that gives thiy signal is bonded to a carbon that is attached 10 one hydrogen. When these two fragments are subtracted trom the molecular formula, oniy a Cl remains, The only possible arrangement has the alkyl group directly bonded to the other side of the carbonyl group and the chlorine on the last available hond. ‘The relatively high-frequency chemical shift of the quartet (4.3, ppm reinforces this assignment because it must be attached to an electronegative atom. Thus, the eom- pound is 3-ehloro-2-butanon Given the simplicity of the 'H NMR spectrum, the product must be highly symmetrical The singlet (7.4 ppm) that integrates to 4 protons is due to benzene-ring protons. Because there are four aromatic profons, we know that the benzene ring is disubstituted. Because the signal is a singlet, we know that the four protons are chemically equivalent, Therefore, the two substituents must be the same and they must be on the 1- and 4-positions of the benzene

to be accounted for. ‘The two oxygens in the molecular formula tells us that the compound is an ester because a broad singlet between 10 and 12 ppm that would indicate a carboxylic acid is not present, The remainder of the molecule contains two cutbons and five hydrogens. The two remaining signals, a triplet (1.4 ppm) that integrates to 3 protons and a quartet (4.4 ppm) that in- tegrates to 2 protons, are characteristic of an ethyl group. The three known segments can now be joined in ‘one of wo ways: ° | tL aun poe ( T OCHCH, CIACHY 0 SS ‘ethyl benzoate Ee ‘The choice hetween the two compounds can be made by looking at the chemical shift of the methylene protons. In the ethyl ester, the signal will be highly deshielded by the adjacent oxygen. In the phenyl es ter, the signal will be at ~2.1 ppm because the methylene protons would be next to the carbonyl group. Because the chemical shift of the methylene protons is 4.4 ppm benzoate. we know that the compound is ethyl CCopyrigt © 2014 Peason Edoction, Ine Spectroscopy Problems Because all three specira are given by ethylmethybenzenes. the low-frequency signals in both the 'H NMR, and "C NMR spectra can be ignored because they belong to the methyl and ethyl substituents, The key t0 determining which spectrum belongs to which ethylmethylbenzene can be found in the aromatic rexion of the 'H_ NMR and SC NMR spect c iw Jone l 7 a CHACHy, 4 The aromatic region of the "'C NMR spectrum of 4-ethylmethylbenzene will show Four signals because it has four different ring carbons, cH, = #1 le 8 oe CHSCHy The aromatic region of the '"C NMR spectrum of 3-ethylnethylbenzene will show six signals beeause it has six different ring carbons cH Hl 16 GQ #2 as #3 {cH.CH, a ighals because ‘The aromatic region of the '""C NMR spectrum of 2-cthylmethylbenzene will also show six it has six different ring carbons, We now know that spectrum (b) is the spectrum of 4-ethylmethylbenzene because its SC NMR spectrum hhas four signals and the other two compounds will show six signals To distinguish between 2-ethylmethylbenzene and 3-ethylmethylbenzene. we need to look at the spit patterns in the aromatic regions of the 'H NMR spectra, Analysis of the aromatic region fr spectrum (e) difficult because the signals are superimposed. Analysis of the aromatic region for spectrum (a) provides the needed information. A wiplet (7.2 ppm) that integrates to 1 proton is clearly present. This means that Copsright 2014 Beason Eaton, M. Spectroscopy Problems 45 spectrum (a) is 3-ethylmethylbenzene bec spectrum (¢) is 2-ethylmethylbenzene, ie 2-ethylmethylbenzene would not show a triplet. Therefore, R R oF + singket THD a NR S doublet 2H) } wiplet (Ui) f doublet 2H) spliting pattera for S-methylethyl benzene splitting patern for 2-merhylethyl benzene doublet 2H) ‘The final assignments ane: (a) $ethylmethylbenzene (b) 4-ethylmethylbenzene _(¢) 2-ethylmethylbenzene The simplicity of the NMR spectrum of a compound with 7 carbons and [4 hydrogens indicates that the compound must be symmetrical, From the molecular formula, we see that it has one degree of unsatura- tion. The absence of signals near 5 ppm rules out an alkene, Because the compound has an oxygen. the degree of unsaturation may be due to a carbonyl group. The doublet (1,1 ppm) that integrates to 12 protons and the septet (2.8 ppm) that integrates to 2 protons suggest the presence of 10 isopropyl groups If two isopropyl groups are subtracted from the molecular formula, we find that the remainder of the mol- ecule is composed of one earbon and one oxygen. Thus, the compound is the one shown here. voy ‘The molecular formula tells us that compound has one degree of unsaturation, The multiplet (5.2 ppm) that integrates to 1 proton is due to t vinylic proton (that is, itis attached to an sp” carbon). Thus, the degree of ‘unsaturation is duc to a carbon-carbon double bond. Because there is only one vinylie proton, we ean as- sume that the alkene is trisubstituted. ‘Three additional signals are present that each integrate to 3 protons, suggest ‘due to methyl groups. The alkene. therefore, iy 2-methyl-2-butene. all three signals are cH, N\ c / cH Notice that two of the three signals given by the methyl groups are singlets and one is a doublet. The methyl group that gives the doublet is bonded tothe carbon that is attached to the vinylic proton. The other two methyl groups are bonded to the other yp" eatbon. ©: Peaon Futon, he 36. Spectroscopy Problems at ~2120 em." indicates the presence of a carbon-carbon triple bond. The yydrogen bonded to an yp carbon. Thus. the A mediun-intensity absorp Shap absonption at 3300 em”! is due to the C—H steteh 01 compound is terminal alkyne. The intense and broad peak centered at 3300 em. ' isevidence of an OH group. ‘The NMR spectrum can be used to determine the co that integrates to 1 proton is due to the proton of the t jectivity between the groups, The sig minal alkyne, nal (2.5 ppm) The singlet (3.2 ppm) that integrates to 1 proton must be due to the proton of the OH group. The singlet (4.2 ppm} that integrates to 2 protons must be duc t0 an bonded carbon to the OH group. The compound is 2-propyn-I-ol ethylene group that connects the triply Ho CHO ‘This arrangement explains the absence of any splitting and the highly desbielded nature of the signal for the methylene group, The two singlets (4.9 and 5.1 ppm that each inte that the compound is an alkene. fate 10 | proton are viny ic protons, Therefore, we know ‘The singlet (2.8 ppm) that integrates to 3 protons is methyl ssoup. The deshieldi attached to an 9p" carbon, esulls from its being If we subtract the wo vinylic protons. the Wo 9p" carbons of the alkene, and the methyl group from the molecular formula, we are left with CHsCI. Thus, a catorometiy! group is the fourth substituent of the al ene and gives the singlet (4.9 ppm) that integrates te 2 protons. Its deshiclding is due 10 the proximity to the electronegative chlorine, Now we need to determine the substitution pattern of the alkene. The absence of splitting indicates that the {wo vinylic protons must be attached to the same carbon. If these protons were cis oF trans to one other they would give doublets with significant J values. Geminal protons attached to sp" carbons have very small J values. so splitting is typically not observed (sce Table 15.2 on page 676 of the text) ‘Thus. the compound is 3-choro-2-methyl-I-propene. 9 2084 Psa asain, 3. 3B Spectroscopy Problems 47 nal that intes The only the alcohol ates to | proton is the singlet at 2.2 ppm. This must be due to the OH group of ‘The signals centered around 7.3 ppm are those given by benzene-ring protons, Because they integrate to 5 protons, the benzene ring must be monosubstituted. “The two triplets (2.8 and 3.8 ppm) that cach integrate to 2 protons suggest two adjacent methylen Both signals are fairly deshielded, indicating an electronegative atom nearby. oups. ‘The fragments identified at this point are a monosubstituted benzene ring, an OH group, and two adjacent methylene groups, HO —CH,CI > Q Phere are no other signals in the NMR spect’um, so the compound must be the one shown here. on Se “The doublet (0.9 ppm) that integrates to 6 protons and the multiplet (1.8 ppm) that integrates to I proton suggest the presence of an isopropyl group. Because we are told thut the compound isan aleohol, the other signal that integrates te | proton (the triplet at 2.4 ppm) mast be due to the OH proton, The fact that the signal a triplet indicates that the OH group is probably attached to a methylene group. The signal for the methylene group must be the remaining signal at 3-4 ppm because it integrates (0 2 protons. The relatively high-frequency chemical shift confirms that the methylene group is attached to the oxygen. Putting together the isopropyl group and the methylene group that is attached to an OH group identifies the ‘compound as 2-methyl-I-propanol. ae ‘The protons that are responsible for the doublet (1.2 ppm) that integrates to 6 protons must be adjacent 10 ‘a carbon that is attached to only one proton. Because the spectrum does not have a signal that integrates to one proton, the compound must have two methyl groups in the same environment, and each must be adjacent to a carbon that is attached to one proton and those two single protons must also be in identical environments CConyrigi © 2014 Pearson Bdocatin, te: 48 40. 4. Spectroscopy Problems Because the compound must be symmetrical. the (wo oxygens in the compound must be due to two OH groups in identical environments. The hydrogens of the OH groups give a singlet (3.8 ppm) that integrates to 2 protons 4 on | en wu ‘The protons that give the triplet (2.6 ppm) must be bonded 10 a carbon that is adjacent t0 a total of two pro- tons, Because the triplet integrates to 2 protons, it mest be due to a methylene group that connects the two pieces H OHH OHH Seesessseeese cmc Pid d HORA —H a This structure is confirmed by the relatively high-trequency multiplet (4.2 ppm) that is given by the protons altached to the carbons that are attached to the OH groups. The signall for these protons is split by both the adjacent methyl group and the adjacent methylene group. ‘The absorption in the IR spectrum at ~1650 em! could he due to either a carbonyl group or an alkene. ity strength and breadth tells us that itis probably due to & carbonyl (C=O) group. The strong and broad absorption at 3300 cm! that contains wo broad peaks suggests Wo NH bonds: thus. an NH group ts present. When these two groups ate subtracted from the molecular formula, all that is left is CsHs ‘The triplet (~1.1 ppm) that integrates to 3 protons and the quartet (2.2 ppm) that integrates 10 2 protons indicate the presence of an ethyl group: this accounts for the CH fragment. Thus. all the fragments of the compound have been identified: C=O, NH;, and CH,CH>. The compound, therefore, is propanamide. ° A The presence of an amide explains the lower-than-normal frequency of the C=O stretch in the IR spec trum, The breadth of the NH stretches contirms that these are amide N—H stretches and not amine N—H stretches. The broad singlets (6.2 und 6.6 ppm) in the NMR spectrum are given by the protons. attached 10 the nitrogen, The protons resonate at different frequencies because the C-N bond has partial double bond character. which causes the protons to be in diferent environments NH, The singlet (2.3 ppm) in the first spectrum that integrates to 3 hydrogens must be due to an isolated methyl group. The triplet (1.1 ppm) that integrates to 3 protons and the quartet ( characteristic of an ethyl group. ppm) that integrates to 2 protons are CCopyeight © 218 Pearw Fito. In 2. Spectroscopy Problems 49 ‘The singlet (4.8 ppm) that integrates to 1 proton must be due to a single hydrogen attached to nitrogen. i it Hea eo 4 wn i Now that the three fragments have been identified, we know that the compound is ethylmethylamine. AWN \ H The second spectrum shows that a broad singlet (2.8 ppm) must be due to hydrogens that are attached t0 nitrogens, Because the signal integrates to 2 protons, we know that the compound is a primary amine, ‘The triplet (0.8 ppm) that integrates to 3 provons is due to a methyl group that is adjacent 10 a methylene ‘group. The triplet 2.7 ppm) that integrates to 2 protons must also be adjacent to a methylene group. The ‘multiplet (1.5 ppm) that integrates (0 2 protons is the methylene group that splits both the methyl and methylene groups. The two triplets and multiplet are characteristic of a propyl group.) Theretore. the compound is propykamine. ‘The relatively weak absorption in the IR spectrum ut ~1650 cm” "tells us itis probably due to a carbon carbon double bond. This is reinforced by the presence of absorptions at ~ 3080 em ', indicating CH shed to 9p? earbons, bond stretches of hydrogens atta “The shape of the two absorptions at ~3300 em”! suggests the presence of an NH, group of primary amine, (Compare these to the shape of the N—H stretches of an NH, group of an amide in Problem 39.) ‘The three signals in the NMR spectrum between 5.0 and 6.0 ppm that integrate as a group to 3 protons in- dicate that there are three vinylic protons. Therefore, we know that the alkene is monosubstituted, ‘The two remaining signals in the NMR spectrum are a doublet (3.3 ppm) and a singlet (1.3 ppm) that each integrate to 2 protons. Because splitting is 201 typically seen with protons attached to nitrogens, we can identity the singlet at 1.3 ppm as due to the two amine protons. The doublet must be due to a methylene ‘group that is attached to an sp" carbon and split by t vinylic proton that is attached to the same carbon. ‘The ‘compound, therefore, is allylamine. NH Now we can understand why the signal at 5.9 ppm is a multiplet, This vinylic proton is split by the methylene group and two unique vinylic protons, The signals for the other two vinylic protons are dou- blets because each is split by the single proton attached to the adjacent sp? carbon, Notice that the higher frequeney doublet has the larger J value, This is the signal for the proton that is trans to its coupled proton. (Copyright 92004 Peano Education, Ine 4 Spe roscopy Problems ‘The molecular formula tells us that the compound does not have any degrees of unsaturation, Therefore, the oxygen must be the oxygen of either an ether or an alcohol. Because there are no signals that int to one proton, we ean conclude that the compound isan eth The triplet (1.2 ppm) that integrates to 3 protons and the quartet (3.5 ppm) that integrates to 2 protons s gests the presence ofan ethyl group. The high-frequency chemical shift ofthe ethyls methylene group and the fact that it shows splitting only by the three protons of the methy! group indicate that the ethyl group is next 10 the oxygen, The two remaining signals are both triplets (3.4 and 3.5 ppm) and each int signals are due to wo adjacent methylene groups. Beeause both signals occur at high frequenci ‘must be attached to electron-withdrawing atoms. les 0 2 protons, Thus. the - both Because the molecular formula telly us that the compound contains a bromine. we ean conclude that the ‘compound is 2-bromoethyl ethy! ether. The IR spectrum shows a strong and broad absoxption at ~ 3300 em! aleohol. indicating that the compound is an tals in the NMR spectrum between 6 and 7 ppm indicate the presente of a benzene ring, Because these signals integrate to a total of 3 protons, the benzene ring must be Irisubstituted, Because the signal at 6.3 ppm is a doublet. it must be adjacent 10 one proton: and since the signal at 6.7 ppm is a triplet. it must be adjacent to two protons, Thus, the three benzene-ting protons must be adjacent to one other ‘The singlet at 8.7 ppm is the only signal in the spectrum that can be attributed to the proton of the OH. group, Because the signal i es to 2 protons. the compound must have two OH groups in the same environment, The singlet (2.0 ppm) that integrates to 3 protons incicates that the compound has i methyl group that is not adjacent to a carbon that is attached to any hydrogens, Therefore, we know that the three substituents that are attached to adjacent carbons on the benzene ring are {0 OH groups and a methyl group. Because the OH groups are in the same environment, the compound tmust be the one shown here cH Ho a SS Copyright 2014 son Elation In 4s. 47. Spectroscopy Problems SI We are told that the compound is an alcohol, Because the singlet (1.4 ppm) is the only signal tha to I proton, it must be the signal given by the OH group. integrates We know that a triplet that integrates to 3 protons and a quartet that integrates to 2 protons are characteris- tic of an ethyl group. In this ease, the triplet (9.8 ppm) integrates to 6 protons and the quartet integrates to 4 protons. Therefore, the compound must have (wo ethyl groups in identical environments. ‘The only other signal in the spectrum the singlet (1.2 ppm) that integrates to 3 protons. This signal must be due to a methyl group that is bonded to a carbon that is not attached to any hydrogens. an 4 a wa i Because the NMR spectrum does not show any additional Signals, the compound must be -methyl-3-pentanol on ALAN “Phe doublet (1.1 ppm) that integrates to 6 protons and the septet (3.8 ppm) that integrates to T proton sug gests an isopropyl group. The triplet (1.7 ppm) that integrates to 3 protons and the quartet (2.2 ppm) that integrates t0 2 protons suggests an ethyl group. When these two groups are subtracted from the molecu~ Jar formula, all that remains is COs, The observed splitting patterns tell us that the isopropyl and ethy! groups are isolated from one another. We can conclude then that the compound is an ester. There are 1wo possibilities: ° I oN oN cHCH “occ, 4, CHYCH™ ~0CH.CH: CH, cH isopropyl propanoate ethyl 2-methylpropanoate Because the highest-frequeney Signal (the septet) is given by the CH of the isopropyl group, we know the CH is attached to an oxygen. Therefore. we know that the compound that gives the NMR dat is iso propyl propanoate. “The multiplet (6.9-7.8 ppm) that integrates to 4 protons indicates a disubstituted benzene ring, Becuuse the signal isa multiplet, we know that the substituents are on either the I- and 2-positions or the I+ and 3-po- sitions. Uf the substituents swere on the [- and 4-positions, either one singlet (if the two substituents were identical) or two doublets (ifthe substituents were not identical) would be observed. “Three signals (1.4, 2.5. 28 ppm) each integrate to 2 protons. ‘The fact thatthe signals are two triplets and inultiplet suggests that the compound has three adjacent methylene groups. (The methylene groups on the ts would be tipets and the one in the middie woud bea multiplet.) A a CHACHACHy— RS CConytigt © 2014 Pearson Bat. Ie WB. 49, Spectroscopy Problems From the molecular formula, we know that the compound has ant oxygen. The triplet at 3.8 ppm indicates that that particular methylene group is next to the oxygen. The two fragments that we have identilied account for the entire molecular formula. Tha, the compound must have the structure shown here. The molecular formula indicates that the compound has one degree of unsaturation, The NMR spectrum docs not show any signals in the area expected for ¥ nylic protons, so the compound must be either a ke- tone ora cyclic ether. A eyclic ether would be expected to have protons on adjacent carbons. so the signals would show splitting. Because the two signals in the spectrum are both singlets, the compound must be a ketone. ‘The fact that the compound has 11 carbons and 22 hydrogens but g trum indicates that the compound must be symmetrical, only two singlets in the NMR spec We know that a rer/-butyl group givey a singlet that integrates to 9 protons. The symmetry of the molecule feuds us to conclude that the singlet that integrates to 18 protons is due to two sert-butyl groups, We can then assume that the singlet that integrates to 4 protons is due to two nonadjacent methylene groups. These fragments account for all atoms in the molecular formula, Therefore, the compound must be 2,2,4,4-tetramethyl-4-heptanone. 6 cu ck cue cuscen, cu, cn, 2.2.6.6-tetramethy|-+-heptanone The molecular formula has one degree of unsaturation, so it must have a carbon-carbon double bond. a cyclic structure. or a carbonyl group. ‘The signal (3.8 ppm) that integrates to 4 hydrogens suggests the presence of two methylene groups in iden tical environments because, other than the carbon in methane, a single carbon cannot be alached to four hydrogens. The chemical shift suggests that each methylene group must be attached fo un oxygen, Because there is only one oxygen in the compound, the two methylene groups must be attached to the same oxygen, ~CH,—0—CH,— (Copyright 204 Pearson Education, I Spectroscopy Problems 53 The signal (1.6 ppm) that integrates to 4 hydrogens also suggests the presence of two methylene groups in identical environments. The four methylene groups and the oxygen account for all the atoms in the mo- lecular formula, ‘Thus, the compound must be eyelic ether. ) 0" The fuct that the signal at the higher frequency is, structure. riplet and the other signal is a multiplet confirms this. ‘The doublet (7.3 ppm) that integrates to 4 protons and the doublet (7.7 ppm) that also integrates to 4 pro- tons are given by benzene-ring protons, Because a benzene ring does not have 8 protons, there must be two benzene rings in the compound. The doublets indicate that the benzene rings have substituents at the 1- and 4-positions and, because each doublet integrates to 4 protons, the two substituents on each of the benzene _ Rett ea ea tes 10 6 protons suggests the compound has two methyl groups in an es that each is attached to an electronegative The singlet (3.8 ppm) that integ. identical environment. The chemical shift of the singlet ind! atom, The molecular formula indicates that the electronegative atom is an oxygen. 2 — OCH: When the two disubstituted by Formula, all that remains is CO. TI enzene rings and the «wo CHO groups ae subtuicted from the molecular ai earbonyl group must connect the two benzene rings oO Hl cuo-{_)-€-€ oct Copyrigt 2014 Peano tation, Ine CHAPTER 1 Remembei Important Terms antibonding molecular orbital atomic number atomic orbital atomic weight aufbau principle mn energy bonding molecular o bond length carbanion carbocation condensed structure core electrons covalent bond degenerate orbitals dipole di He moment (y0) double bond electronegative electronegativity ing General Chemistry: Electronic Structure and Bonding 4 molecular orbital that results when Wo atomic orbitals with opposit interact. Electrons in an antibonding orbital decrease bond strength, phases al atom has. al number that tells us how many protons (or electrons) « neu aan orbital associated with an atom: the three-dimensional area around a nucleus where electrons are most likely to be found. the average miss of the atoms in the naturally occurring element 4 principle that states that ar electron will always go into the available orbital with the lowest energy, the amount of energy required to break st bond in a way that allows each of the atoms to retain one of the bonding electrons, or the amount of energy released when a bond is formed, a molecular orbital that results when two atomie orbitals with the same phase interact, Electrons in a bonding orbital increase bond stren; the internuclear dist ai species containing a positively charged earbon, aa structure that does not show some (or all) of the covalent bonds. electrons in filled shells, a bond created as result of sharing electrons, Is that have the sume energy tution of positive and negative charges. a measure of the separation of charge in a bond or in a molecule. 3 bond composed of a sigma bond and a pi bond. describes an element that readily aequires an electron, the tendeney of an atoni to pull electrons toward itselt 4 © 2014 Pear Edbcation. electrostatic attraction electrostatic potential map (potential map) equilibrium constant excited-state electronic formal charge free radical (radical) ground-state electronic configuration Heisenberg uncertainty hydride ion hydrogen ion (proton) ionic bond mnie compou ration energy isotopes Kekule structure Lewis structure lone-pair electrons (nonbonding el Chapter 1 55 aan attractive force between opposite ch ‘4 map that allows you to see how electrons are distributed ina molecule. the ratio of products to reactants at equilibrium the electronic configuration that results when an electron in the ground state has been moved to a higher-energy orbital the number of valence electrons ~ (the number of nonbonding number of bonding electrons) setrons + half the aa species with an unpaired electron. a description of which orbitals the electrons of an atom occupy when they are all in able energy orbitals. their lowest a «principle that states that both the precise location and the momentum of an atomic particle cannot be simultaneously determined. atrule that states that when there are degenerate orbitals, an electron will ovcupy an emply orbital before it will pair up with another electron. aun osbital formed by hybridizing (mixing) atomic orbitals. a negatively charged hydrogen (a hydrogen atom with an extra electron). « positively charged hydrogen (a hydrogen atom without its electron). a bond formed as a result of the attraction of opposite charges. 1 compound composed of a positive ion and a negative ion, the energy required to remove an electron from an atom. atoms with the same umber of protons but x different number of neutrons. st model that represents the bonds between atoms as lines. a model that represents the bonds between electrons as dots. oms as lines or dots and the lone-pair valence electrons not used in bonding. Congsight 020-4 Pearson Esco, I 36 Chapter! mass number molecular orbital molecular orbital (MO) theory node nonbonding electrons nonpolar covalent bond octet rule orbital orbital hybridization organic compound Pauli exclusion principle pi (a7) bond polar covalent bond potential map (electrostatic potential proton (hydrogen ion) quantum mechanies radical (free rad sigma (7) bond single bond tetrahedral bond angle the number of protons plus the number of neutrons in an atom. aan orbital associated with a molecule that results from the combination of atomic orbitals aa theory that describes a mocel in which the clectrons occupy orbitals as they do in ‘atoms but the orbitals extend over the entire molecule. jon within an orbital where there is zero probability of finding an electron, valence e eetrons not used in bonding. a bond formed between two atoms that share the bonding electrons equally. a rule that states that an atom will give up. accept, or share electrons in order to achieve a filled outer shell (or an outer shell that contains eight electrons) and no electrons of higher energy. Because a filled second shell contains this is known as the octet rule the volume of space around the nucleus where an electron is most likely to be found. mixing of atomic orbitals, 4 compound that contains carbon 4 principle that states that no more than two electrons can occupy an orbital and that the two electrons must have opposite spin. a bond formed as a result of side-to-side overlap of p orbitals, a bond formed between two atoms that do not share the bonding electrons equally a map that allows you to see how electrons are distributed in a molecule. a positively charged hydrogen ion. the use of mathematical equations to describe the behavior of electrons in atoms or molecules. 4a species with an unpaired electron. i bond with a symmetrical distribution of electrons about the internuclear axis «single pair of electrons shared between two atoms the bond angle (109.5%) formed by an sp" hybridized central atom, tetrahedral carbon trigonal planar carbon triple bond valence electron valence-shell electron-pai repulsion (VSEPR) model wave equation wave functions Chapter | 37 an sp° hybridized carbon; a carbon that forms covalent bonds using four sp* hybrid orbitals, aan sp? hybridized carbon. ‘composed of a sigma bond and two pi bonds, an electron in an outermost shell a model for the prediction of molecular geometry based on the minimization of electron repulsion between regions of electron density (that is, between bonds and nonbonding electrons) around an atom, «an equation that describes the behavior of each electron in an atom or a molecule. a series of solutions to a wave equation, Copyright © 201 Pearson Education, tn 58. i Chapter 1 Solutions to Problems ‘The atomic number = the number of protons The mass number = the number of protons + the number of neutrons. All isotopes have the same atomic number: in the case of oxygen it is 8, Therefore: ‘The isotope of oxygen with a mass number of 16 hay 8 protons and 8 neutrons ‘The isotope of oxygen with amass number of 17 has 8 protons and 9 neutrons, The isotope of oxygen with a mass number of 18 has 8 protons and 10 neutrons. (percentage of naturally occurring SCI x atomie mass of Cl) + (percentage of naturally occurring YEUX atomie mass of "CD (1577 x 34.969) + (.2823 x 36.966) (26496 + 8.957) = 35.453 All four atoms have (Wo core electrons (in their filled shell); the valence electrons are in the outer shell Notice that because the four atoms in the question are in the Sime row of the periodic table. they have the ‘same number of core electrons. a3 bo © 6 ded Use the authau principle (electrons go into available orbitals with the lowest energy) and the Paul exclusion principle (no more than two electrons are in each atomic orbital). The order in which the orbitals are filled is: ly <2y < 2p < 39 < p< M< dy < 4p < dd < 58 < Sp nerate The question can be answered if you remember that there are one » atomic orbital and three des atomic orbitals in each shell. To write the electronic configurations for Br and I. you need to remem ber that there are five degenerate d atomic orbitals in the third and fourth shell CLs 262 2ph 392 3p* Br 1s? 2s? 2p 30° 3p aall ay 11s 2s? 2p 3s ph Bala b, They each have seven electrons in their outer shell (two are in an s orbital and five are in p orbitals) ‘Thus. they each have seven valence electrons. Notice that because they all are in the same column of the periodic table. they all have the same number of valence electrons, ‘The atomic numbers can be found in the periodic table on the last page of the text, Notice that elements in the same column of the periodic table have the same number of valence electrons and their valence elec~ irons are in similar orbitals a, carbon (atomic number = 6; 2 silicon (atomic number = 14: 10 core, 4 valent ore, 4 valence): 1 Is 2° sn (atomic number = 8: 2 core, 6 valence): Ly? 2s? 2p’ sulfur (atomic number = 16: 10 core. 6 valencey: Ly? 2s? 2p" 39° 3p" Copyright 612014 Posen Eaeton o: 0. 12. Chapter! 59 c. nitrogen (atomic number = 7; 2 core, 5 valence): Is? 2s? 2p! phosphorus (atomic number = 15: 10 core, 5 valence): 1s? 2s? 2p" 39? 3p 28 Oph 397 s° Oph 3s? 3p 4s? ‘a, Potassium is in the first coh the b. tho nn of the periodic table; therefore, like lithium and sodium that are also in c electron, iL column, potassium has one valers cupies a 4s orbital ‘The polarity of « bond can be determined by the difference in the electronegativities (given in Table 1.3 on page 11 of the text) of the atoms sharing the bonding electrons. The greater the difference in electronega- tivity the more polar the bond. . CI—CH, b. HOH H-P a. ClCH, KCI has the most polar bond because negativity. The electronegativity differe two bonded atoms have the greatest differences in electro- ces in the four listed compounds are as follows: KCL 3.0 08 = 22 LiBr 28 = 1.0 = 18 Nal 25-09 = 1.6 Ch 30-30=0 Cl, has the teust polar bond because the two chlorine atoms share the bonding electrons equally. Solved in the text. ‘To answer this question, compare the electrone, using Table 1.3 on page 11 of the text ities of the two atoms sharing the bonding electrons = 38 & 8 & 8 HOH bP Br HC Nip a nc—c1 a ab be 8 3 3- HOT EXCL ge Ic bh. 1LN—O1 (Notice that if the atoms being compared are in the same row of the periodic table, the atom farther to the right is the more electronegative; if the atoms being compared ate in the same column, the one closer to the top of the column is the more electronegative } Solved in the text The dipole moment is the magnitude of the charge times the distance between the charges. Because fluorine is more electronegative than Cl, the charge or H and F in HPF is larger than the charge on H and Clin HCI The larger charge on F compared to the charge on Cl is more than enough to make up for the fact that H—F isa shorter bond than HCl. a. LiH and HP are polar (they have a red endl and a blue end). b. A potential map marks the edges of the molecule’s electron cloud. The electron cloud is largest around the H in LiH, because that H has more electrons around it than the Hs in the ether molecules. €. Because the hydrogen of HF is blue, we know that this compound has the most positively charged hydrogen and, therefore, it will be most apt to attract a negatively changed species. Copgsight® 2018 Peanon Bustin, In oo M4. 16. Chapter | By answering this question you will see that « formal charge is a book-keeping device. It does nor necessarily tell you which atom has the greatest electron density oF is the most electron deticient. aL oxygen b. oxygen (itis the more red) ec. oxygen d. hydrogen (itis the deepest blue) Notice that in hydroxide ion, the atom with the formal negative charge is the atom with the greater electron density. In the hydronium ion, however, the atom with the formal positive charge is not the most electron- deficient atom. formal charge = number of valence electrons — (number of lone-pair electrons + half the number of bonding electrons) In all four structures. every H is singly bonded and thus has a format charge = 1 ~ (0 + 1) = 0 Similarly. all CH, carbon atoms have four bonds and a formal charge = 4 — (0 + 4) = 0. The formal charges on the remaining atoms follow: ci a. CHy oew b. Wen © Cnn H. iH H ci nn formal chargeon formal chargeon formal charge on N formal charge on 6-243)=4 A-Q43)=-1 S-FA=F | NS-(F4)=+1 B:3- (+4) =-1 The bond between two atoms can be shown by a pair of dots or by a fine. so there are two ways each of the answers can be written © & Net or or or or Copyright © 2014 Pearson Bd, he 18. 1, 20. ih Chapter 61 Because the compounds are neutral, « halogen will have three lone pairs, an oxygen will have two, a nitrogen will have one, and carbon or a hydrogen will have no lone pairs. cH b. CHANHCH; a CH,CH,CH,CI b. cH,CocHct ‘a, the (green) chlorine atom b. the (red) oxygen atoms CHACHC CHCHCNCH,CH, Hy the (blue) nitrogen atoms the (black) carbon atoms and (gray) hydrogen atoms i wacom HC —C—B: | I ee 4 H i ge H-C——c——C~c CCH | 1 ele ee " Copyright © 2014 Peanon Eduction, Ie 62 22. 24. Chapter 1 oO OO .Com auball larger than the ball larger than the bull that represents all that represents 2s orbital a 3s orbital He; has three electrons, Using Figure 1.4-on page 25 of the text. two electrony would be in a bonding molecular orbital and one electron would be in an antibonding motecular orbital. Because there are mo electrons in the bonding molecular orbital than in the antibonding molecular orbital. Hes exists a, 7 This involves out-of-phase overlap of atomic orbitals (the overlapping orbitals have different col- ors), leading to an antibonding molecular orbital. Because this example involves the side-to-side overlap of p orbitals, this results in a 77* antizonding molecular orbital This involves in-phase overlap of atomic orbitals (the overlapping orbitals have the same color). leading to a bonding molecular orbital. Because this example involves the side-to-side overlap of p orbitals, this results in a 7 bonding molecular orbital ¢. o® This involves out-of-phase overlap of atomic orbitals (the overlapping orbitals have different col- os), leading to an antibonding molecular orbital. Because this example involves the end-on over- Lap of atomic orbitals. this results in a 0° antibonding molecular orbital do This involves in-phase overlap of atomic orbitals (the overlapping orbitals have the same color. Jeading to a bonding molecular orbital, Because this example involves the end-on overlap of atomic orbitals, this results in a or bonding molecular orbital ‘The carbon-carbon bonds form ay a result of sp'—sp" overlap. ‘The carbon-hydrogen bonds form as a result of sp'—» overlap. ‘The electron density of the large lobe of an sp* orbital iy greater than the electron density of a lobe of a p orbital. Therefore, the overlap of an s orbital with an sp° orbital forms a stronger bond than the overlap oF aan y orbital with a p orbital Solved in the text a. One s orbital and three p orbitals form four 9° orbitals b, One s orbital and two p orbitals form three sp" orbitals One s orbital and one p orbital form two sp orbitals a(1), Solved in the text (1). Solved in the text (2). ‘The carbon forms four bonds, and each chlorine forms one bond. “c b2). The earbon uses sp" orbitals 10 form the bonds with the chlorine atoms, so the bond angles are all 109°. Copyright ©2014 Pearson Eaton, Ie Chapter! 63 3). The first attempt at drawing a Lewis structure shown below shows that carbon does not have a complete octet and does not form the needed number of bonds. Using one of oxygen’s lone pairs to pat a double bond between the carbon and oxygen solves both problems. (3). The sp" hybridized CH, carbon has 109.5° bond angles and the yp* hybridized CH=O carbon has 120° bond angle: ‘j no ype HA Pe" on wostel ff 4). In onder to fil their octets and form the required number of bonds, carbon and nitrogen must form «triple bone. Hc (4). Because the carbon is yp hybridized, the bond angle is 180°. 10 a 120 b. 120° ¢. Because the carbon is sp" hybridized and it hay a lone pair, you can predict that the bond angle is similar to that in NH, (107.3°), ‘The nitrogen atom hus the greatest electron density The hydrogens are the bluest atoms. Therefore, they have the least electron density. In other words, they have the most positive (least negative) electrostatic potential. Water is the most polar—it has a deep red area and the most intense blue area. Methane is the least pokar—it is all nearly the same color (green) with no red or blue areas, Solved in the text Electrons in atomic orbitals farther from the nucleus form longer bonds; they also form weaker bonds due to less electron density in the region of orbital overlap, Theretore: a, relative lengths of the bond in the halogens are: Bry > Cls relative strengths of the bonds are: Cl > Bry b, relative lengths: CH, —Br > CH, —Cl > CH, — relative strengths: CH;—F > CH;—Cl > CH,— Br Copyright © 2614 Peano Faction. ne 64 Chapter 1 —t 2 C¢-cl 3 Hcl —cl 2 C=C 3. HOP 35. a longer: 1. b. stronger: 1. carbon in CCl; iy bonded to four atoms. so it uses four yp" orbitals F Each carbon-chlorine bond is formed by the overlap of an sp* orbital of carbon with an sp! orbital of chlorine. Because the four sp" orbitals of carbon orient themselves to get as far away from each other as possible, the bond angles are all 109.5. bond angles = 109.5° b. CO, ‘The carbon in COs is bonded to two atoms. soi uses 140 9p orbitals, Each carbon-oxygen bond isa double bond. One of the bonds of each double bend is formed by the overlap of an sp orbital of carbon with an sp? orbital of oxygen The second bond af he double bond is formed asa result of side-to-side overlap ofa p orbital of carbon with p orbital of oxygen. Because curbon's two sp orbitals orient themselves to get as far away from each other as possible, the bond angle in COs is 180°, 0 ° bond angle = 180 «. HCOOH ‘The double-bonded carbon and the double-bonded oxygen in HCOOH cach uses sp" orbitals: thus. the bonds around the double-bonded carbon are all 120°, The single-bonled oxygen forms bonds using yp" orbitals, whereas each hydrogen uses an s orbital The predicted C—-O—H bond angle is based on an sp* oxygen that has a reduced bond angle due to the two lone pairs. The bond angle is predicted to be similar to that in HO (104.5°) the o bond is formed by sp?—sp? overlap the bond is formed by p—p overlap, ys overlap / C104 alloter bond angles are 120 HOH a, wap? overlap dN, ‘The viple bond consists of one o bond and two = bonds. Bach nitrogen has wo sp orbitals; one is used to form the o bond, and the other contains the lone pair. Each nitrogen has wo p orbitals that are used to form the two 7 bonds. A bond angle iy the angle formed by three atoms. Therefore. there are no bond angles in this two-atom containing compound. the o bond is formed by yp—yp overlap ‘each bond is formed by p—p overlap -_ | Copsrigh #2014 Psaron idan. be 9. 40. Chapter 165 Each sp* orbital of boron overlaps an sp* orbital of fluorine. The three sp” orbitals orient themselves to. get as far away from each other as possible, resulting in bond angles of 120°. Solved in the text We know that the « bond is stronger than the a bond, because the or bond in ethane has a bond dissociation energy of 90.2 keal/mol, whereas the bond dissociation energy of the double bond (a + 7) in ethene is 174.5 kcal/mol, which is less than twice as strong. Because the or bond is stronger, we know that it has more effective orbital-orbital overlap. Because electrons in an y orbital are closer an average to the nucleus than those in a p orbital, the greater the » character in the interacting orbitals, the stronger (and shorter) will be the bond. Therefore, the carbon- carbon @ bond formed by sp?-—sp? overlap is stronger (and shorter), because an sp? orbital has 33.3% » character, whereas an sp" orbital has 25% s character. OOO ¢. the nitrogen and chlorine atoms Copyeigh © 214 Pearson Ed 66 a. 4B. 4 45. 46. 4. 50. Chapter | ‘The bond angle depends on the central atom. a, sp’ nitrogen with no Tone pair: 109.5° —e_sp* carbon with no fone pair: 109.5" b, sp nitrogen with a lone pair: 107.3° sp? carbon with no lone pair 109.5° ‘The one with the greater electronegativity will decrease the electron flow toward the F. giving the com- pound a smaller dipole moment. Since CH,F has a smaller dipole moment than CDsP. we know that hy- drogen is more electronegative than deuterium. ‘The electrostatic potential map of ammonia is not symmetrical in the distribution of the charge—the ni- trogen is more electron rich and therefore more red than the three hydrogens, Therefore, its shape. which indicates charge distribution, is not symmetrical, ‘The electrostatic potential map of the ammonium ions symmetrical in the distribution of the charge, so its shape is symmetrical. Its symmetry results from the fact that nitrogen forms a bond with each of the four hhydrogens and the four bonds point to the comers of a regular tetrahedron, The nitrogen in the ammonium ion has significantly lower electron density than the nitrogen in ammonia since the lone pair has formed bond to hydrogen a, €, gyand have a dipole moment of zero because they are symmetrical molecules, ci—Be—cl B a. CHCHy b. CHP If the central atom is sp" hybridized. the bond angle will depend on the number of lone paity it has none = 109.5%: one = 107.¥':two = 1045° a. sph 107.3 ce. sph 109.5° sp’. 7.3" b. sp, 120° £ sp 120° eeeteseaee esp! 1073 9p. 180" de pF, 120° he sp’, 109.5% a CHCH,CH, ob CHYCH=CH, CHC ‘The hybridization of the central atom determines the bond angle. If the hybridization iy yp’. the number of Jone pairs on the central atom determines the bond angle. a. 109.5° b. 104.5" 107.3" a. 1073 © 104.5° is the correct prediction based on the bond angle in water. However. the bond angle is actually somewhat larger (108.2°) because the bond opens up to minimize the interaction between the electron cloud of the relatively bulky CH) group. Copscght ©2014 Pearson Faeation las Me Wf cet et Chapter | 67 3s He iy 3. 4 19228 2p 32 te el a ae2e ce seacee 2 ap 30 3% b. &. a. b. sreater the electronegativity between the two bonded atoms. the more polar the bond. (See Table 1.3 on page 11.) cr c-cl > H-O > C-N > wt l CHCH=CHs oe it cHCCHS c-o c—Br HoN crH ae H a cng H ap sf CHACH.OH CHCH=NCHy ” sp i f CHOCHCHy Copysigtt 2014 Pearson Education, le 59. Chapter t a 120° a HC Br be HCL formal charge = 109.5" 180° a. 109.5° HONE fe HyC—On a ibe fiCtty NH number of vatlence electrons = (number of lone-puir electrons + half the number of bonding electrons) In all four compounds. H has a single bond and is neutral and each C has four bonds and is neutral. Thus, the indicated formal charge is for O or N. H I a Hoe gon H formal charge 6-4 +2)=0 ‘The open arrow in sph ap? 1 cHncH ow ah 2. cHCCH.OH wi dp ”, eeHe WO? sp’ For 1.2, and 3: For 4 and 5: For 6: H 4 H b. oo H HCO aw é NH ah 4 hon formal charge formal charg formal charge 6-24 a4 6-H D> = 243-0 led bonds in e: ‘h compound, the str ‘ures points to the shorter of the two ind 3. CHNHCHSCHN sp sp sp wp 4 » | 4 Scone Sc* a Wore ee 4 Be—~CH.CHSCHy sp) sp sp (ct yp triple bond is shorter than a double bond, which is shorter than a single bond. ‘The greater the y character inthe hybrid orbital. the shorter is the bond formed using that orbital. because an s orbita. is closer than a p orbital to the nucleus, Therefore, the bond formed by a hydrogen and an sp carbon is shorter than the bond formed by a hydrogen and an sp" carbon, whieh is shorter than the bond formed by a hydrogen and an sp* carbon, (See Table 1.7 on page +4 of the text.) Cl forms a bond using a 3yp* orbital and Br forms a bond using a 4yp" orbital, There- fore, the C—CI bond is shorter Cops © 2004 Paar don Chapter 1 69 Cr 4 . nn # Me ween iN re ee .¢ hon ad “The thre carbons are all sp* hybridized, WAyy All the bond angles are 109.5°. ws" uw 5 wR S e WO Nemc 1" ee W\ woo ” ‘The four carbons are all sp? hybridized All the bond angles are 120°. 2. 63. 4 Towest dipole moment 64. 65. cmh=CH chy Copysiht © 2014 Pessow Elution, Ie 70 66. 67. 0. 70. Chapter 1 In an alkene, six atoms are in the same plane: the two sp? carbons and the two atoms that are bonded to each ofthe to sp? carbons. The other atoms inthe molecule will not be inthe same plane with these six atoms, 28s If you put stars next to the six atoms that lie in a plane in each molecule, you will be able to see more clearly whether the indicated atoms lie in the same plane. cHy orbital of C, whereas the CCl bond in CHy=CHC1 is formed by the overlap of an sp" orbital of C1 with an sp" orbital of C. (The more the s character, the shorter und stronger the bond.) CHC; has the larger dipole moment because the three chlorines are withdrawing electrons in the same gen- eral direction, whereas in CH3C1, two chlorines are withdrawing electrons in the same general direction. ‘The dipole moment is 2.95 D because the two Cls are withdrawing electrons in the same general direction so their electron withdrawing effect is additive Copyright® 2044 Poor doch Chapter 1 a 71, The bond angles at the triple-bonded carbons, when the bonding orbitals overlap maximally, are 180°. A 180° angle cannot fit into the ring structure. Therefore. the overlap between the yp orbital and the adjacent sp" orbital becomes distorted from the ideal end-on overlap. This poor overlap causes the compound 10 be unstable, (Compare the structure shown here with Figure 3.8 on page 125 of the text.) " iy Oe cf : 72. 73. 4 bo HOCoN=N: a NENG: " Ia H-G=N ceonteibutors these are resonance contributors Copysigt 02914 Pear Fat n 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 1 Practice Test Angwer the following: a Which bond has a greater dipole moment, « carbon-oxygen bond or a earbon-fluorine bond? b. If Hed has three electrons in its molecular orbitals, how many electrons are in an antibonding molecu- lar orbital? ¢. Which is the longer bond, « carbon-hydrogen bond in ethene or a curbon-hydrogen bond in ethane? @. Which is le in ammonia? xz the bond angle in water or the bond 2 e. Which is stronger. a sigma bond or a pi bond? What is the hybridization of the carbon atom in each of the following compounds? *CH, CH; -*CHy Draw the Lewis structure for HCO, Circle the compounds below that have a dipole moment = 0. CHCl CHCH, CHCL-HC=0 CCI, ss. HO or *NHy? Which compound has greater bond a Draw the structure For each of the following: a, methyl carbocation b. ahydride ion a bromine radical dan alkane with only prima carbons Draw the structure of compound that contains five carbons, two of which are y which are sp" hybridized. ybridized and three of ‘What is the hybridization of each of the indicated atoms? CC ££ 8 (if CHCSNCH, CHACCH) 0. Hy \ a, What orbitals do carbon’s electrons occupy before promotion? 1b. What orbitals do carbon’s electrons occupy atter promotion and before hybridization? Copyright © 204 Peuron Edt 10, i 2 Chapter! 73 Answer the followin; a, What is the HC —0 bond angle in CH/OH? 1b. What is the H—Be—H bond angle in BeH;? €. What is the H—B—H bond angle in BH,? dd. What is the C O—H bond angle in CHOH? ndicate the hybridization of the atom to which the arrow is poi Foreach of the following compounds. i HCOH HE=N- CiHOCHy CHK KOR KX XR Indicate whether each of the following statements is true oF false. A pi bond is stronger than a sigma bond. T b. A triple bond is shorter than a double bond. T F ‘The oxygen-hydrogen bondy in water a’e formed by the overlap of an spF orbital of oxygen with an y orbital of hydrogen, T F dA double bond iy suomger thar a singke bom i F fe. A tetrahedral carbon has bond angles of 107.5°. T F | ANSWERS TO ALL THE PRACTICE TESTS CAN BE FOUND AT THE END OF | ‘THE SOLUTIONS MANUAL. J 63014 Pear Econ I CHAPTER 2 Acids and Bases: Central to Understanding Org: Important Terms (Bronsted acid) acid-base reaction acid dissociation constant acidity hase (Bransted base) basicity Bronsted acid Bronsted base buffer solution delocalized electrons, equilibrium constant Henderson—Hasselbaleh, equation ductive el withdrawal Lewis acid Lewis base pH PA, proton proton transfer reaction resonance resonance contributors, resonance hybrid aaypecies that donates a proton sion in which an acid donates a proton to a bave. a measure of the degree to which an acid dissociates measure of how easily @ compound gives up a proton at species that aveepts @ proton a measure of the tendency of a compound to share its electrons with a proton, a species that donates a proton 1 species that accepts a protor solution of a weak acid and ils conjugate base the species formed when a base accepts a proton the species formed when an acid loses a proton, electrons that are shared by three or more atoms (that is. do not belong to a single atom nor are they shared in a bond between two atoms). the ratio of products to reactants at equilibrium, pK, = pH + log(HA)/(A the pull of electrons through sigma bonds by an atom or by a group of atom, at species that uccepts an elect-on pair: species that donates an electron pair th 1 scale used to describe the acidity of a solution (pH = log H* a measure of the tendency of a compound to lose a proton (pK, = “log K,. where K, is the acid dissociation constant) 4 positively charged hydrogen ion, reaction in whieh a proton is transferred from an acid to a Base. having delocalized electrons, Structures with localized elections that together approximate the true structure of a compound with delocalized electrons, the actual structure of a compound with delocalized electrons. WW Chapter2— 75 Solutions to Probler 1. COs and CCL, are not aeids because neither has a proton that it can lose, 2 a HCl + NHy SE Ch + TNK, b. HO + °NH; S== HO™ + NHy 3. The conjugate acid is obtained by adding an H’ to the species. a () ‘NH, @) HCL 3) HO) HO ‘The conjugate base is obtained by removing an H trom the species. b. UD) NH) 2) Br (3) NO} (4) HO” 4. a, The lower the p&;, the stronger the acid, so the compound with pX, = 5.2 is the stronger acid, b. The greater the dissociation constant, the stronger the acid, so the compound with a dissociation 3.4 X 10's the stronger avd. cconstan S.—_ Because we know that Ky = Ko, [HO] K, 53 x 10° K, = ABA st6 x 10" (H,0 6 Its K, value is 151 10, I iy a weaker acid than vit 6.8 * 10 ‘in the Problem-Solving Strate: C whose K, value was determined to be 1 oa HO + WT = HO b. HCO + HY == HCO) EHO + CO. = HCO, = HAO + CO 8. If the pH iy <7, the body fluid is acidie: if the pH is >7, the body fluid is basic. 9. Remember tha a proon wil be pike upby an atom tat has one WF or ane pas, Nati that wo Sayers hae Tone pin pate To see which one gts the proton, ee Table 2.1 on page OD of he x ° ‘OH é é a CCHS: CHLCHOH—-«& cTSON a cancH, ec Son 10. In each of the following reactions, the position of equilibrium is established by analyzing the relative strengths of the acids on either side of the reaction—the equilibrium favors reaetion of the stronger acid 10 form the weaker acid (see Section 2.5), (Nove that HCI is a stronger acid than H,O': see Appendis 1 in the text) Iethe lone p: nol shown: a. CHOHasan avid: CHO + NH; == CH,O + NHy CHOH asabase: CHJOH + HCL = ernoH rch H Copyright © 2014 Pears Buti, I M. M4, Chapter 2 Ifthe lone pairs are not shown: a. CH3OHasan acid: CH;OH + NH; == CHO” + NH, CHOHasabae: CHO + HCL = CHRON + Cr i bo NH wana) NH FIMO” EN + COM Nee ee ee Che lone pairs are shown: a. CHOHasunacid: CHQH + NH CHOH asa base: CHGH + HE bh. NH ay an acid: NH, + CHOr Ng as a base: Ny + HBr: a. ~40 b= 15 «<5 a ~10 a CH,COO- is the stronger base, Because CH;COOH is the weaker acid. it has the stronger conjugate base b. “NH is the stronger base. Because NH is the Weaker acid, it has the stronger conjugate base, 10 is the stronger base, Because H,O" is the weaker acid, it has the stronger conjugate base. The conjugate acids of the given bases have the following relative strengths: © t CHO, > CH OH > CHYNHy > CHOH > CHNH: ‘The bases. therefore. have the following relative sirength conjugate base - sinee the weakest acid has the strongest ¢ t CHWNH > CHAO” > CHWNH: > CHyT SO- > CH\OH Methanol is the acid because it has a pA, value of ~ 15, whereas methylamine is a much weaker aeid with a PK, value of about 40, Copyright © 2014 Pearson Eat Chapter? 77 15. Notice that in each cave, the equilibrium favors reaction of the stronger acid to form the weaker acid. a CHOH + HO CHO” + LO pK, = 155 pk, =157 (CH OH HOge | CHOW 10} 7 9 0 ix cny ‘on + HO PR, =48 9 fa Ko te to CHy ‘OH cHy Son 6 CHNH, + HO cH + pk, =40 CURNH) + HOT SS CNH; + 0 pK, =10.7 bo HCL + HO HOt + oc DK, =-17 NH, + = TNH, + HO pK, = 15.7 pk, = 94 16, Because a strong acid is more likely to lose a proton than a weak acid, the equilibrium will fuvor loss of a proton from the strong acid and formation of the weak acid ec Che st HOS pk,=25 b. HOSCH + “NH, WeSC pky=25 ok, © Np would be a better base because when it removes a proton, the equilibrium favors the produets When HO” removes a proton, the equilibrium favors the re 17, Each of the following bases will remove a proton from acetic because each of these bases will form an acid that is a weaker id in a reaction that favors products, id than acetic acid. HO" CHWNH, = HC=C The other three choices will Form an acid that isa stronger acid than acetic acid, Copy 204 Pearson cation. Ine 78 19. 20, mM Chapter? pK = p&, (reactant acid) ~ p&, (product acid) Fora the reactant acid is HCI and the product acid is HO" For b the reactant avid is CH;COOH and the produet acid iy HO™ For € the reactant acid is HO and the produet acid is CHNHs For d the reactant acid is CHyNHs und the product acid is Hs0° a pKy = -7 - (-17) = -53 G PKy = 15.7 - (10.7) = 5.0 Ky = 20 10° Kg, = 1.0% 105 be pKa = 48 ~ (-1.7) = 68 pKa = 00.7 = (=1.7} = 124 Ky = 32x10 Ky = xo Recall that the weakest avid has the strongest conjugate base. CHy > NH) > HO” > Aeuin, recall that the weukest acid ha the strongest conjugate base, CCH: = C= CH > HOS The protonated Ketone is the stronger acid becuuse its hydrogen is attached to an 97" 0x we than the sp’ oxygen to Which the hydrogen in the protonated alcohol is attached. more electrones’ ak CH 6 CHCH: = HI + CHCHs BOH.C=CH, + HCSC =e CH=CH + HOCH C CHCH. + HYC=CH T= CH CH: + HC =CH; be Only A. because only A hay a reactant that isa stranger acid than the acid that is formed in the product The smaller the ion, the stronger itis as at hase eee ce Be b. HS . CH,SH tivity in determin stability. Therefore. even SH isa stron- The size of an ont is more important than its electron tive than sulfur, HLS is a stronger acid than HyO and C nis more electron ger acid than CHOH. Because the sulfur atom is larger. the electrons in its cong Which stabilizes it, The more stable the base, the stronger its conjugate acid, we buse are spread out over a greater volume. “The stronger avid will have its proton attached to the more el swative atom (if the atoms are about the same size) ar to the larger atom (if the atoms are not the same size). a. HBr be CIACHCHOH, eG. CHACHICHLOH— d.CHACHSCH,SII Remember that the stronger the acid. the weaker (or more stable) ity conjugate base. ‘a. Because Hl is the strongest acid. 1” is the most suble (weakest) base bb. Because HF is the weakest acid, Fis the Teast table (strongest) base Copyright 2 2014 Pear Education tn 2. 28. 30. 2 3B. Chapter? 79 pate acids, recall Compare the acid strengths of the conju a, HO because H,O isa weaker acid than H,0" b. NH; because "NH, is a weaker acid than H,O! €. CHO" because CH,OH is a weaker acid than CHyCOOH. 4. CHO™ because CH,OH is a weaker acid than CH,SH. ial a weuker acid has a stronger conjugate base, a. CHOCHCHOH because its conjugate base hay its negative charge stabilized by electron withdrawal by the CH,O group. b. CHCHACHZOHy because oxygen is more electronegative than nitrogen, © CHCHLOCHCHLOH because the electron-withdrawing oxygen is closer to the OH group. f dd. CHACHACOH because the electron-withdrawing C=O is closer to the OH group. CH:CHCH.OH > CHCHCHLON > CHLCHLCHLOH > CH/CHCH.OM cc cl a ‘The first listed compound is the most acidic because it has two electron-withdrawing substituent that will stabilize its conjugate base The second listed compound is a stronger acid than the third listed compound because the chlorine in the second compound is closer to the O— H bond. The compound on the far right does not have a substituent that withdraws electrons inductively, so itis the least acidic of the four compounds, ‘The weaker acid has a stron ° ° wer conjugate base. oO I ii I & cHeHCO” b, caneHCHACOe ad. CHCCHCH;O Br a Solved in the text ‘a, Because the atom (P) to which each of the OH groups is attached is also atached to two eleetrone tive oxygens, Is) b. The middle OH group is the weakest of the remaining acidic groups. It is an alcohol (pK, and the atom (C) to which it is attached is not attached to any strongly electronegative atoms. (The protonated amino group has a pX, value of ~ 10.) When a sulfonic acid loses a proton, the electrons left behind are shared by three oxygens. In contrast, when a carboxylic acid loses a proton, the electrons left behind are shared by only «wo oxygens. The sulfo- nate ion, therefore, is more stable than the carboxylate ion cc carboxylate ion Copyright 9 14 Peaon dasa, In 80. 35. Chapter 2 ‘The more stable the base. the stronger is its conjugate acid. Thu. the sulfonic acid is a stronger acid than the carboxylic acid. Os I Remember, the smaller the pX,. the stronger the acid, a CHC=NH b. CHyCHy f . FXCCOH d.an sp’ oxygen “on ©. H CH CH, CHOCH; pa=-7.3 PRE 30 fe CH;C=NH > NHCH, > CH3CHyNHy cH pK. =10.1 p= pk,= 110 If the solution is more acidic than the compound’s pK, value, the compound will be in ity seidie form (with, ity proton) If the solution is more basic than the compound's pX, value, the compound will be in its basic form (with- ‘out its proton) a. CH,COO™ c HO e NHy g ON b. CH.CHNH, Br HOS pH 104 (As long as the pH is greater than the pX, value of the compound. at least 50% of the compound will be in ity basic form.) as 1 neutral b. 1. charged 1 neutral 2. neutral 2. charged 2 neutral 3. charged 3. charged 3. neutral 4. charged 4, charged 4, neuteal 5. charged 5. neutral 5. neutral 6. charged 6. neutral 6. neutral Copyright 9) 2014 Pear Educa, bs 39. 40. al. a © Chapter2 81 ‘The “NH, group withdraws electrons, which inereases the acidity of the COOH group. Both the COOH group and the “NH, group will be in their acidic forms, because the solution is more acidie than both of their pK, values. The COOH group will be in its basic form because the solution is more basic than its pK, value. ‘The “NH; group will be in its acidic Form because the solution is more acidic than its pK, value ° i c cucu 0) ONE, Both the COOH group and the “NH; group will be in their basic forms because the solution is more basic than both of their pX;, values, ° I ow cuca ~o- NHy No, alanine can never be without a charge. To be without a charge would require a group with a pK, Value of 9.69 10 lose a proton before a group with a pK, value of 2.34, This clearly cannot happen. A weak acid cannot have a stronger tendercy to love a proton than a stronger acid has, AN the pH becomes more basic than 2.34, the COOH group will become more negatively charged As the pH becomes more acidic than 9.69, the “NHj group will become more positively charge: ‘Therefore, the amount of negative change will be the same as the amount of positive charge at the pH that is equidistant from the two pk, vals. 2.34 + 9.69 5 = 6.002 10.4 (to log units more basic than the pk) 2.7 (one log unit more acidic than the pk) 64 (two log units more acidic than the P&,) 7.3 (when the plH is equal to the pk) 5.6 (one log unit more basic than the pk.) 1. pH = 4.9 When the pH = pX, half the compound will be in its acidic form (with its proton) and half will be in its basic form (without its proton), 2 pH = 10.7 1. pH > 6.9 Because the basic form is the form in which the compound is charged, the pH needs to be more than two units more basic than the pA, value pH < 8.7 Because the avidie form is the form in which the compound is charged. the pH needs to be more than two units more acidic than the px, value. Copyright © 2014 Peon Paci, bs 46. 47. 48. Chapter 2 a. Solved in the text b. For the carboxylic acid to dissolve in water, it must be charged (in ity basie form), so the pH will have to be greater than 6.8, For the amine to dissolve in ether, it will have to be neutral (in its basic form). so the pH will have to be greater than 12.7 to have essentially all of iin the neutral form, Therefore, the pH of the water layer must be greater than 12.7, ¢. To dissolve in ether, the carboxylic acid will have to be neutral, so the pH will have to be less than 2.8 to have essentially all the carboxylic acid in the acidic (neutral) form. To dissolve in water, the amine will have to be charged. so the pH will have to be less than 8.7 to have essentially all the amine in the acidic form, Therefore, the pH of the water kayer must be less than 2.8, a, The hasie form of the buffer removes a proton from the solution. cH,CoO- + HY CH,COOH b. ‘The acidic form of the buffer donates a proton in order to remove an hydroxide from the solution, CH.COOH + HO. CH.COD- + HO Solved in the text a ZC + CHOH === Zac; oe we Br—FeBry CI AICh, ab, ¢, and hare Bronsied aeids (provon-donating acids). Therefore they rect with HO” by givi dye. fyand g are Lewis acids, They react with HO” by accepting a pair of electrons from it aiprotun tit a CHOH + HOT === CHO™ + H,0 b. NH, + HOT — Mm, + HO CHS, + HOO === CHAN, + 10 BR + HOM HO-BF, CH + HO cH oH Feb, + HO” HOW Febry AIC + HOT HO—AIcl, . CH,COOH + HOT === — CH,COO™ + HO a. CCICH;OH > CHCICH;OH > CH,CICH.OH b. The greater the number of electron-withdrawing chlorine atoms equidistant from the OH group. the Stronger the acid. (Notice that the larger the K,, the stronger the avid) The stro hase has the weuker conjugate weil 1 HO” b. CHSNH « CHO a Cl fe CHYCOO™ —f CH,CHBrCOO™ Copyright 02014 Pear btn. Ine 49. Si. 4. Chapter2 83 “oN co é a NH, 4 ow oo b. HO! + Febry 1,0 Feber; aN “an é é HH” SOH Ho SOH + WY a, CHsCHsCHCOOH > CH;CHCH3COOH > CICHsCHyCH{COOH > CHyCH;CH;COOH & & b, An electron-withdrawing substituent makes the carboxylic acid more acidic, because it stabilizes its conjugate base by decreasing the electron density around the oxygen atom, (Remember that the larger the K,, the stronger the acid.) ‘The closer the electron-withdrawing chloro substituent is to the acidic proton, the more it can decrease the electron density around the oxygen atom, so the more it stabilizes the conjugate base and increases the avidity ofits conjugate ac it St a co au, an, A HOCH.CHLNHy —-b. “OCHSCHLNH, ive than N. which is more electronegative than C. Theretore, the alcohol is more dic than the amine, which is more acidic than the alkane. Sis larger than O. so CH\CH,SH is more acidic than CH\CH,OH. CHCH:SH > CH\CHJOH > CHC! > CHC Hy If the solution iy more acidic than the p&, of the compound, the compound will be in its acidic Form (with the proton), If the solution is more ba the proton). je than the pX, of the compound, the compound will be in its basic form (without CHCOOH —b, atpH=3 CH\CH,NH, =e. atpH=3 CRC a tpl alpH=6 — CH;COO™ atpH=6 CHACHSNHy atpH=6 — CRCHOH atpH= 10, CH;COO™ atpH=10. CH,CH,NH, alpH=10) CE.CHOH alpH= 14 CHy “00 atpH=14 CH,CHNHy atpH=l4 CECH LO" Copyright 2004 Pearson Eakin, Ie 56. 58. 60, 61. 2. Chapter 2 In all four reactions, the products are favored at equilibrium, (Recall that the equilibrium favors formation of the weaker acid.) a, CH\COOH + CH,O™ CH,COO” + CH,OH b, CHCHJOH +°N CH\CHJO- + NHy ¢ CH\COOH + CH\NHy CH,COO” + CHANHy {1 q 4 a. CHCHLON + HEL cHcHoH, + cI &. HCSCCH.OH > CHY=CHCHOH > CHCHCHOH b. These three compounds differ only inthe group that is attached to CH:OH. The more electronegative the group attached to CHJOH, the stronger the because inductive electron withdrawal stabilizes the conjugate base. and the more stable the base, the stronger its conjugate acid. An sp carbon is more clecttonegative than an sp? carbon, which is more eletronegative than an sp" carbon, In each compound. the nitrogen atom is the most apt to be protonated because itis the stronger base. cH cts a cen —cHsy & cyt —oH > c—CHOH on oN NH ‘The log of 10-* = —4. the log of 10°* = —5, the log of 10° = —6, and so on. Because the pK, = log K,.the pK, of an acid with a K, of 10-4is =(=4) = 4 An acid with a K, of 4.0 X 10 isa stronger acid than one with a K, of 0 x 104 Therefore. the px, can be estimated as being between 3 and 4 a. 1. between Sand 4) beoL pk = 34 2. between ~2 and ~1 2 3. between 10 and I 3 4. between 9 and 10 4. 5. between 3 and 4 5 © ‘The direction of the dipole will be toward the more electronegative of the two atoms that are sharing the bonding electrons. a CH —C=CH ob. CH CH The hy ywen bonded to the oxygen is the most acidic hydrogen in Tenormin, A and C because, in each case, the acid is stronger than the acid (H;O) that will be formed as a product ‘The reaction with the more Favorable equilibrium constant will be the one with the smallest difterence between the pK, value of the reactant acid and the pX, value of the product acid, because pK, = pK, (reactant acid) ~ pK, (product acid) and the smaller the pA the larger the Ky a. 1. CH,CH,OH has a pk, value = 15.9 CHOW has a pX, value NH, has a pX, value = 9.4 35 Copyright © 2014 Peano Eaton. Ine Chapter? 85 PK, (reactant acid) ~ pi, (product acid) 15.9 ~ 94 = 65: Ky = 3.2 107 = 155-98 79x 107 Thus. the reaction of CH;OH with NH; has the more favorable equilibrium constant. 2. CHCH.OH haya pX, value = 15.9 *NH, has a pK, value = 9.4 CHNH, has a pX, value = 10.7 PKoy = pK, (reactant acid) — pk, (product acid) 5.9 — 9.4 = 65: Ky = 3.2 x 107 ISS ~ 10,7 = 5.2: Ky = 6.3 x 10% ‘Thus. the reaction of CH,CH,OH with CHNH; has the more favorable equil um constant, Because the reaction of CH\CH,OH with CH,NH) has the smallest difference between the pA, values of the reactant and product acid it hay most favorable equilibrium constant. 63. IV the reaction is producing protons. the basic form of the bu‘fer will pick up the protons. At the pH at which the reaction is carried out (pH = 10,5), a protonated methylamine/methylamine bulfer with a PK, = 10.7 will have a larger percentage of the butfer in the needed basic form than will a protonated cthylamine/ethylamine buffer with a p&, of 11.0. 64a. CHCOOH because an sp? carbon iy more electronegative than an sp" carbon because an oxygen can withdraw electrons inductively because an sp carbon is more electronegative than an sp” carbon because an sp" nitrogen is more electronegative than an sp* nitrogen a. 65. a, The first pX, is lower than the pK, of acetic acid because citrie acid has additional oxygen-containing groups that withdraw electrons inductively and thereby stabilize the conjugate base. The third pA; is greater than the pX, of acetic acid because loss of the third proton puts a third negative Charge on the molecule. Increasing the number of charges on a species destablizes it (H"] [HO] ~ THO] Since [H"] = [H”), both must be 1x 10-7 M (Lx 107) x 107) 66. 555 K,= 180 x 10% pk, = ~log 180 10-1 pK, = 15.7 Copyright © 204 Pearson Facation. be 86 Chapter The answer can also be obtained in the following way [Ho HO] Ka (Ho! 17] (HO take the log of both sides log K, + log[H.0 } multiply both sides by 1 Jog K, — log[ HO] = [H0] = pH + poH [HO] = 14 14 + log] H,0! = log(H'] + log! HO] -} ~ log( HO ater, and uncharged compounds will dissolve in ether. The acide 67. Charged compounds will dissolve in w und the busie Forms are charged. The acidie forms of forms of carboxylic acids und aleohols are neutr amines are charged. and the basie forms are neutral coon “NH on Bia 1 CJ we NU 9.95 pK, = 10.66 Feiner WaterapH=20 ther layer wld ether ‘add HOt pH ist pH of HO to besween 7 and 8 fates eter layer wae yar ether ayer NH coo | OH cl A a oh aad HO with pl water yer ether hiper o a A = 1) CCopyigbt 2004 Peano Elston Chapter? 87 68. Foradiscussion of how to do problems such ay Problems 68-70, see Special Topic [(pH, pk, and Butters). [HA] pk = pH Tog The above equation, called the Henderson-Hasselbalch equation, shows that 1. When the value of the pH is equal to the value of the pX,, the concentration of buffer in the acidic form [HA] equals the concentration of butfer in the basie form [A 2. When the solution is more acide than the value of the p&, more butler species are in the acidic form than in the basic form, 3. When the solution is more basic than the value ofthe PX, more bur species are in the basi form than in the acidic form, Because the pH of the blood (~7.3) iy greater than the pk, value of the butfer (6.1), more buffer species are in the basic form than in the acidic form. Therefore, the buffer is better at neutralizing excess acid fei amount in the acidic form fraction present in the acidic form = = amount in the acidic form ++ amount in the basic form (Hal [HAT + [A] 69. Because there are two unknowns, we must define one in terms of the other By using the definition of the acid dissociation constant, we can define [A] in terms of [HA]. [H" ] and K,, So we have only one unknown, (HLA) [HA] pc] = MAHA 161 = a Substituting the definition of [A] into the equation for the fraction present in the acidic form gives: __ [HA] (HA) 1 [a] [HA] + [A] , KLHA) K "] + K, (Wal + ep ae ‘Therefore, the pereentage that is present in the acidic form is given by [Ho] cat,

7. 4. 8, A solution with a pH = 2 is more acidic than a solution with a pH A solution with a pH = 12 is more basic than a solution with a pH Determining the pH of a Solution To determine the pH of a solution, the concentration of hydrogen ion [H” ) in the solution must be determined. a1 Copyeigh ©2014 Peason Eduction. te 92 Special Topie 1 Strong Acids A strong acid is one that dissociates completely in solution. Strong acids have pk, values <1 Becauye a strong acid dissociates completely the concentration of hydrogen ions is the same as the concentration of the acid: 1,0 M HC! solution contains [.0 M [H*]:a 13 M HCI solution contains 1.5 MH, Therefore, to determine the pH of a strong acid, the [H*) value does not have to be calculated: it is the same as the molarity of the strong acid Solution Tal pH LOMHCI 10M 0 1.0.x 107 MHCI 10x107M 20 64 x 104 MHCI 64x10%M 32 Strong Bases Siro wases are compounds such as NaOH or KOH that dissociate completely in water. Because they dissociate completely. the [ HO” ] is the same as the molarity of the strong base pOH describes the basicity of a solution. The smaller the pOH. the more basic the solution: just like the smaller the pH the more acidic the solution pOH = —log [HO] [HOT | and [ H” | are related by the ionization consiant for water (K.) Ky = [H*}[HO-] pH + pOH = 14 Solution [HO™| poH pH 10M NaOH Lom 0 140-0 = 140 10x10“ MNaOH 10x 104M 40 140-40 = 100 78107 MNaOH 78x 107M Ld 0-11 = 129 Weak Acids A weak avid does not dissociate completely in solution. Therefore, [H” ] must be calculated before the pH ean be determined, Acetic acid (CH\COOH) is an example of a weak acid. It hay an avid dissociation constant of 1.74 < 10 * (pK, = 4.76). The pH of a 1.00 M solution of acetic acid can be calculated as follows: CH,COOH == HY + CH,COO™ (LH JICH,COO"| ICH,COOH} Copyright 2014 Pearson Bdation, Ine Special Topic 93. Each molecule of acetic acid that dissociates forms one proton and one acetate ion, Therefore, the concentration of protons in solution equals the concentration of acetate ions. Fach has a concentration that can be represented by x ‘The concentration of acetic avd, therefore, isthe concentration we started with minus x. (oa) 1.00= x 174 x 10% ‘The denominator (1,00 — x) can be simplified to 1.00 because 1.00 is much greater than x. (When we actually calculate the value of x, we see that itis 0.004. And 1,00 ~ 0.004 = 1.00.) 1.74 x 10 = 3 1.00 x= 417 x 10% pH = log 4.17 x 10 pH = 238 Formic acid (HCOOH) has a pK, value of 3.75. The pH of a 1.50 M solution of formic acid can be calculated as follows: HCOOH === H' + HCOO™ [H"}IHCOO} {HCOOH | A compound with a pk, = 3.75 has an acid dissociation constant of 1.78% 10 178 x 10% oe = in x7 = 150(1,78 x 10) v= 267 x 10% 1.63 x 107 log (1.63 x 10) pH = 1.79 Weak Bases When a weak base is dissolved in water, it accepts a proton from water, ereating hydroxide ion. Determining the concentration of hydroxide allows the pOH to be determined, and this in turn allows the pH t0 be determined. Copycigh 2014 Peason Euaton. 94 Special Topic 1 ‘The pH of a 1.20 M solution of sodium acetate can be calcu ated as follows CH\COO” +H,0 === CH,COOH + HO” Ky _ [HO [CH,COOH) Ky ICH,COO"| Loo x 10" _ wou 17x10 120—% 5.75 x 10°" 120 6.86 x 10" 62 * 10" 1HO-] log 2.62 x 105 pH = 14.00-4.58, pH = 9.42 Notice that by setting up the equation equal to K,,/K,, we can avoid the introduction of a new term (Kj). because K./K, = Ky Buffer Solutions A butter solution is a solution that maintains nearly constant pH in spite of the addition of small amounts of H” ot HO. That is because a bufter solution contains both a weak acid and its conjugate base, The weak acid ean donate 4 proton to any HO” added to the solution, and the conjugate base can accept any H~ that is added to the solution, so the adulition of small amounts of HO or H” does not signiticantly change the pH of the solution. A buffer can maintain nearly constant pH in a range of one pH unit on either side of the pK, of the conjugate acid For example. an acetic acid/sodium acetate mixture can be used as a buffer in the pH range 3.76-5.76 because acetic acid has a pX, = 4.76: methylammonium ion/methylamine can be used as a buffer in the pH range 9.7-11.7 because the methylimmonium ion has a px, = 10.7. ‘The pH of a buffer solution can be determined from the Henderson-Hasselblch equation. This equation comes directly from the expression defining the acid dissociation constant. Its derivation is found on page 74 of the text. Henderson-Hasselbalch equation [Ha] ay pk, = pH + log Copyright 92014 Peano blwation Ine Special Topic! 95 The pH of an acetic acid/sodium acetate buffer solution (pK, of acetic acid = 4.76) that is 1.00 M in a and 0,50 M in sodium acetate is calculated as follows: etic acid [ua] = pH + log ‘a = ol om 1.00 4.16 = pH + tog 050 4.76 = pH + log2 4.76 = pH + 0.30 pH = 4.46 Remember from Section 2.10 that compounds exist primarily in their acidic forms in solutions that are more acidic than their pX, values and primarily in their basic forms in solutions that are more basic than theit pK, values. Therefore. it could have been predicted that the above solution will have a pH less than the pX, of ae because there is more conjugate acid than conjugate base in the solution, ie acid, ‘There are three way ys a buffer solution can be prepared: 1. Weak Acid and Weak Base A buffer solution can be prepared by mixing a solution of a weak acid with a solution oF its conjugate base. ‘The pH of a formic acid/sodium formate buffer (pK, of formic acid = 3.75) solution prepared by mixing 25 ml. of 0.10 M formic acid and 15 mi. of 0.20 M sodium formate is calculated as tollows ‘The equation below shows that the number of millimoles (mmol) of each of the buffer components can be determined by multiplying the number of milliliters (mL) by the molarity (MD. noles __millimoles M = molarity = milliliters Theretiore 25mL x 010M = 15imL x 0.20M = 3.0 mmol sodium formate 5 mmol formic acid Notice that in the following equation we use mmol for (HA ] and [A] rather than molarity (mmol/mL) because both the acid and the conjugate base are in the same solution so they have the same volume. Therefore, volumes will cancel in the equation. IAI Di . ia] pH + log 25 415 = pH + loss 2.75 = pH + log 083 3.15 = pH - 0.08 pH = 3.83 i could hive been predicted that the above solution would have a pH greater than the pX, of Formic acid, because there is more conjugate baye than conjuigate acid in the solution: CCongrght © 2914 Pearson Faation Ine 96 Special Topie t Weak Acid and Strong Bast A buffer solution can be prepared by mixing a solution of a weak acid with a strong base such ay NaOH. The NaOH reacts completely with the weak acid, thereby creating the conjugate base needed for the buffer solution. For example, if 20 mmol of a weak acid and $ mmol of a strong base are added to a solution. the 5 mmol of strong base will react with 5 mmol of weak acid. 1 ‘mmol of weuk base and leaving behind 15 mmol of weak acid “The pH of « solution prepared by mixing 10 mL. of a 2.0 M solution of a weak acid with a pX, of 5.86 with 5.0 mL of a 1.0 M solution of sodium hydroxide can be calculated as follows When the 20 mmol of HA and the 5.0 mmol of HO” are mixed. the 5.0 mmol of strong base will react with 5.0 mmol of HA. with the result that 5.0 mmol of AV will be formed and 15 mmol (20 mmol ~ 5.0 mmol) of HA. will be left unreacted. 1OmL x 20M = 20mmol HA |= ——> 15mmol HA 5.0mL x 10M = 5.0 mmol HO” ——+ 5.0 mmol A [Ha pk, = pH + log : 5.6 = Hh + gS pH + log3 pH + 0.48 5.38 3, Weak Base and Strong Acid ‘A butfer solution can be prepared by mixing a solution of a weak base with a strong acid such as HCI. The strong acid will react completely with the weak base. thereby forming the conjugate acid needed for the buffer solution. ‘The pH of an ethylammonium ion/ethylamine bulfer (pK, of CH\CHsNH; = 11.0) prepared by mixing 30 mL. of 0.20 Methylamine with 40 mL of 0.10 M HC! can be calculated as follows: 30m x 0.20M = 6.0mmol RNH, ———= 2.0 mmol RNH» dom x 0.10M = A0mmnal #” ——= Lommel RS, Notice that 4.0 mmol H> reacts with 4.0 mmol RNH), forming 4.0 mmol RNH;, leaving behind 2.0 mmol RN} . [HAL pk, = pil + top 110 = pH + tog 22 20 11.0 = pH + loz 2.0 11.0 = pH + 030 pH = 10.7 Copysight © 2014 Pearson Eaton. Ie Special Topic 97 Fraction Present in the Acidic or the Basie Form A common question asked is what fraction of a butler will be in a particular form at a given pH: either what fra tion will be in the acidic form or what fraction will be in the basic form. This is an easy question to answer if you remember the following formulas that are derived at the end of this section: fraction present in the acidic form = —!41__ K+") K, fraction present in the basie form = 2 K+ 1H") What traction of an acetic acid/sodium acetate buffer (pK, of acetic acid = 4.76; K, — 1.74 % 10°) is present in the acide form at pH = 5.20: [H"} = 6.31 x 10°"? url 631 x 10° KO +H") (78x 10) + (631 x 10%) 631 x 10° CTA x 10) + (6.31 x 10) 631 x 10° 631 aa oe BT 0.26 ‘What fraction of a formic acid/sodium formate buffer (pK, of formic aci 3.75; K, = 1.78 X 10) is present | = 1.26 x 1047 1.78 x 104 8 x 104) + (1.26 x 10) 118x104 _ 178 3.04 x 10 3.04 0.586 = 059 The Formulas describing the fraction present in the acidic or basic form are obtained from the definition of the acid dissociation constant _ LH" IA] [Ha] To derive the equation for the fraction present in the acidic form, we need to define [A] in terms of [HA], so we will have only one unknown in the equation K, [ua] 1H") Ay (Copycat © 2014 Peanon Education, I 98 Special Topic I tract in the acidic form = [HA] [Ha] 1 raction present in the acidic form = —l#A]__ __ [HA] _ = ALOT aay, SEAT 1 & {H*] iH") K+ In) “To derive the equation for the fraction present in the basic Form, we need to define [HA in terms of [A]. s0 we «can get rid of the [HA] term. LAT {Ha] [aay = HAT fraction present im the basic form = A |__ = THA} IAT ayy UAT + (A) Preparing Buffer Solutions The type of calculations just shown can be used to determine how to make a buifer solution. For example, how can 100 mL of a 1,00 M buffer solution with a pH = 4.24 be prepared if you have available to you 1.50 M solutions of acetic acid (pK, = 4.76: K, = 1.74 < 10), sodium acetate, HCI, and NaOH? First. we need to determine what fraction of the buffer will be present in each form at pH = 4.24: [H’] = 5.75 X 10 5, We will start by calculating the fraction of the buifer present in the acide form, iH’) 5.15 x 1 K+ (HT | (74 x 10%) + 5.15 x10) 7.49 x 10 = 077 Ita 1.00 M buffer solution is desired, the buffer must be 0.77 M in acetic acid and 0.23 M in sodium acetate 014 Peron Edi, te Special Topic 99 ‘There are three ways to make sueh a buffer solution: 1. By mixing the appropriate amounts of acetic acid and sodium acetate in water, and adding water to obtain a final volume of 100 mL. The amount of a ic acid needed: [CH,COOH] = 0.77 M mmol _ x mmol mL 100mL x = 77mmol M= = 077M Therefore, we need to have 77 mmol of scetic acid in the final solution, To obtain 77 mmol of acetic acid from a 1.50 M solution of acetic acid: TIimmel _ sp ym y = 51.3mL Notice that the formula M = mmol/mL was used twice. The first time it was used to determine the number of mmol of acetic acid that is needed in the final solution. The second time it was used to determine how that number of mmel can be obtained from an acetic acid solution of a known concentration, The amount of sodium acetate needed: [CH;COO™| = 0.23M xmmol _ 100mL x = 23mmol 0.23 To obtain 23 mmol of Sodium acetate from a 1.50 M solution of sodium acetate 2m! _ 5p ng ym y = 15.3 ml The desired butler solution ean be prepared using: 51.3 mL 1.50 M acetie acid 15.3 mL 1.50 M sodium acetate 33.4 mL H,0 100.0 mL Copyright © 2014 Pearson Flt ne 100 . By mixing the appropriate amounts of acetic acid and so . By mixing the appropr Special Topic | ium hydroxide, and adding water to obtain a final volume of 100 mL. Soxtiuim hydroxide is used to convert some of the acetic acid into sodium acetate, This meuns that acetic aeid will be the source of both acetic acid and sodium acetate ‘The coneentrations needed are: [CH;COOH] = 1.00 M NaOH ] = 023M The amount of acetic acid needed: [CH\COOH) = 1.00M x mmol TOO mL x = 100 mmol = 100M To obtain 100 mmol of acetic acid front 1.50 M solution of acetic acia: 100 mmol yb y= 66.7 mL =1,50M The amount of sodium hydroxide needed: [NaOH] = 0.23M xnmol 100mL, 023M x=23mmol ‘To obtain 23 mmol of sodium hydroxide from a 1.50 M solution of NaOH: 23mmol ym = 150M 3m ‘The desired bulter solution can be prepared using: 66.7 mL. 1.50 M avetie acid 15.3 mL 150M NaOH 18.0 mL H,0 100.0 ml ite amounts of sodium acetate and hydrochloric acid, and adding water to obt 1 volume of 100 mL a Hydrochloric acid is used to convert some of the sodium a te into acetic acid, This means that sodium acetate will be the source of both acetic acid and sodium ac The concentrations needed are: (CH\COONa] = 1.00 M. HCI] = 077M Copyright © 2014 Pearn Futon Ie Special Topic 101 “The amount of sodium acetate needed: [CHyCOONa} = 1.00 M x mmol = 100M 100 mL. x =100 mmol To obtain 100 mmol of sodium acetate from a 1.50 M solution of sodium acetate: 100 mmol 100 mmol _ 150M yk y= 06.7 mL. ‘The amount of hydrochloric acid needed: [HCI] = 0.77 M immo ees 100 mL. x = 77 mmol To obtain 77 mmol of hydrochloric acid from a 1.50 M solution of HCL TI mmol ym y 150M S13mL 100 mL. of a 1.00 M acetic acid/acetate buffer cannot be made from these reagents, because the volumes. needed (66.7 mL + 51.3 mL) add up to more than 100 mL. To make this buffer using sodium acetate and hydrochloric acid, you would need to use a more concentrated solution (> 1.50 M) of sodium acetate or a ‘more concentrated solution (> 1.50 M) of HCI. Copyeight © 2914 Pearson Education, Ine 102 Special Topic 1 Problems on pH, pX.. and Buffers 1. Calculate the pH of each of the following solutions: 1x 10° M HCI b. 0.60 M HCI e140 x 102M HCI d. 1 10M KOH 3.70 x 10M NaOH 311.20 M solution of an acid with a pk, = 4.23 g. 1.60 x 107 M sodium acetate (pK; of acetic acid = 4.76) 2. Calculate the pH of each of the following buffer solutions: ‘A buffer prepared by mixing 20 mL of 0.10 M formic acid and [5 mL. of 0.50 M sodium formate (pK, of formic acid = 3.75), A buffer prepared by mixing 10 mL of 0.50 M aniline and 15 mL of 0.10 M HCI (pK, of the anitinium ion = 4.60). ©. A butfer prepared by mixing 15 mL of 1.00 M acetic acid and 10 mL of 0.50 M NaOH (pK, of acetic acid = 4.76). 3. What fraction of a carboxylic acid with pk, = 5.23 would be ionized at pH = 4.987 4. What would be the concentration of formic acid and sedium formate in a 1.00 M butler solution with a pH = 3.12 (pK, of formic acid = 3.75)? You have found a bottle labeled 1,00 M RCOOH. You want to determine what carboxylic acid it is, so you decide to determine its pK, value, How would you do this? 6. a, How would you prepare 100 mL ofa buffer solution that is 0.30 M in acetic acid and 0.20 M in sodium acetate using a 1.00 M acetic acid solution and a 2.00 M sodium acetate solution? ter or less than 4,76? b. The pK, of acetic acid is 4.76. Would the pH of the above solution be 7. You have 100 ml. of a 1.50 M acetic acid/sodium acetate buffer solution that has a pH = 4.90, How could ‘you change the pH of the solution to 4.50? 8. You have 100 mL of a 1,00 M solution of an acid with a px, = 5.62 to which you add 10 mL of 1.00 M sodium hydroxide. What fraction of the acid will be in the acidic form’? How much more sodium hydroxide will you need to add in order to have 40% of the acid in its acidic form (that is, with its proton)? Copyright © 2014 Pearon Education, be Special Topic 1 103 Describe three ways to prepare a 1.00 M acetie acid/sodium acetate bulfer solution with a pH = 4.00, You have available to you 1.50 M solutions of acetic acid, sodium acetate, sodium hydroxide, and hydro: chloric acid, How would you make 50 mL of each of the buffers described in the preceding problem? How would you make a 1.0 M butter solution with a pH = 3.302 You are planning to carry out a reaction that will produce protons. In order for the reaction to take place at constant pH, it will be carried in a solution bullered at pH = 4.2, Would it be better to use a formic acid formate buffer or an acetic acid/acetate butler? 2014 Peano Faeaton ne 10 Special Topic 1 Solutions to Problems on pH, pX,, and Buffers Secret caeecttremceaee erate = = =log 0.60 = 0.22 = -log (140 x 10) = 185 4d. pOH = og (1 x 10) pOH = 3 pH= 14 -3=11 fe. pOH = —log (3.70 x 10) POH = 3.43 pH = 10.57 pK, = 4.23. K, = 5.89 x 105 HWA) [ual 589 x 105 = * 1.20 x= 7.07 x 10% y= 841 x 10% pH = 208 Ky THOMA) ig = 1 = 174 x 0) K [Ad ho x 10" 174 x 107 PAREN Ue = 9.20 x 10°? v= 303x 10° Bas Copyright © 2014 Pearson Feat, In Special Topic 105 a. formie avid: 20 mL. * 0.10M sodium formate: 15 mL 0.50 M 2.0 mmol 7.5 mmol _ Ag pH + top 22 75 3.15 = pH + log 0.27 pl + (0.57) pH = 4.32 b. aniline: 10 mL x 050M = 5.0 mmol —> 3.5 mmol aniline (RNH,) . HCE 15 mL. X 010M = 1.5 mmol —* 1.5 mmol anilinium hydrochloride (RNH) [na] pK, 4.60 4.60 4.60 pH = pH + log 0.43 pH + (037) 497 ce. acetic acid: [S mL 100M = 15 mmol —> 10 mmol acetic acid NuOH: 10 mL x 0.50M = 5.0mmol —> 5.0: mmol sodium acetate + tog HA] IAT 4.76 10 PL + los 4.76 4.76 pH pH + log 2 pH + 0.30 46 3. ‘The ionized form is the basic form. Therefore, we need to use the equation that allows us to calculate the Fraction present in the basie form, K, 5.89 x 10° 5.89 x 10° K+ THT] G89 x 10) + (1047 x 10%) 16.36 x 10 fraction of buffer in the basic form: = = 0.36 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Edin, be 106 Special Topic 1 x10t 14 (759% 10 4. fraction of buffer in the basic form = IH") 1178 x 10 L78 x 107 9.37 10% = 019 sodium formate, = 0.19 M. [tormie acid) = 0.81 M From the Henderson-Hasselbaleh equation, we see that the pH of the solution is the sume as the px, of the species in the acidic form when the concentration of the species in the acidic form is the same as the concentration of the species in the basie form, pk when [HA] pK ‘Thus. in order to have a solution in which the pH will be the same as the p&;, the number of mmol of acid rust equal the number of mmol of conjugate base Preparing a sohution of» mmol of RCOOH and 1/2. mmol NaOH will give a solution in which FRCOOH? = [RCOO For example: 20 mL. of 1.00 M RCOOH = 20 mmol 10 mL of 1.00 M NaOH = 10 mmol This will give a solution that contains 10 mmol RCOOH and 10 mmol RCOO ‘The pH of this solution is the pX, of RCOOH. 6 mmol _ 9 39 y4 mmol _ 999 \4 100 mi 100 mL. 4 = 30 mmolofaceticaeid x = mmol of sodiumavetate 30 mmol 20 mmol Smet 00M Ammo! 300M yml. yk. y = 30mL of 1,00 M acetic acid J = 10 mL. of 2.00 M acetic acid ‘The butter solution could be prepared by mixing: 30 mL. of 1,00 M acetic aeiel 10 mL of 2.00 M sodium acetate 60) mL of water 100 mi. 1b, Because the concentration of butler in the acidic form (0.30 M) is greater than the concentration of butfer in the basic form (0.20 M). the pH of the solution will be less than 4.76. © 2014 Pearson Fain, In Special Topic L107 Original solution K fraction of buffer in the basic form = ———*—— = ——— pany K, +1] (74x 10) + (1.26 x 10) 174 x 10% © 3.00 x 10% = 058 0.58 x 1.50 M = 087M IA] = 087M [HA] = 063M Desired solution K 174 x 10% fraction of buffer in the basic form AFF” Gdex 0) + Ibe 174 x 10% 4.90 x 107 0.35 x 150M= = [Ha] = 097M “The original solution contains 87 mmol of A (100 mL. x 0.87 M). ‘The desired solution with a pH = 4.50 must contain 53 mmol of A”, ‘Therefore, 34 mmol of A’ (87 ~ 53 = 34) must be converted to HA. ‘This can be done by adding 34 mmol of HCI +0 the original solution. If you have a 1.00 M HCI solution, you will need to add 34 mL. to the original solution in order to change its pH from 4.90 10 4.50. 34 mmol xm x= Mol 00 M. + it will be more dilute Note that after adding HCI to the original solution, it will no Jonger be a 1.50 M butle (150 mmol/134 mL. = 1.12 M). ‘The change in the concentration of the buffer solution will be less if'a more concentrated solution of HCL is used 1o change the pH. For example, if you have a 2,00 M HCI solution: 34mmol _ 599M xml x= 1TmL Copycih ©2014 Pearson Education, In 108 Special Topic 1 You will need to add 17 mL. to the original solution, and the concentration of the butler will be 1.28 M (150 mmol/117 mL = 1.28 M). 8. acid: 100 mL. x 1.00M NaOH: 10 mL. 1.00 M ‘Therefore, 90% is in the acidic form, 100 mmol HA. —> 90 mmol HA. 10mmol HO") —> 10. mmol For 40% to be in the acidie form, you need 40 mmol HA 60 mmol A” You need to have 60 mmol rather than 10 mmol in the basie form. To get the additional SO mmol in the basic orm, you would need to add 50 mL. of 1.0 M NaOH. 9. fraction of butler ws 174 x10 inthe basic form 4 [HT] (74 x 10) + (1.00 x 10 (LTH x 10°) + (10.00 x 10° _ La x 10% 174x107 = 015 [A] = 015M [Ha] = 085M a. [acetic acid] = 0.85 M b. [acetic acid] = 1.00M_ —e. [xodium acetate) = 1.00 M [ sodium acetate] = 0.15 M [NaOH] = 0.15 M [HCI] = 0.85 M mmol Wa = 085M & So mL. X = 42.5 mmol of acetic acid 425 mmol _ 59 Mt ym. y = 283mLof 150M acetic ucid 0.15M 7.5 mmol of sodium acetate 150M y= 5.0 mL of 1.50 M sodium acetate 28.3 mL of 1.50 M acetic acid O mL of 1.50 M sodium acetate 16.7 mL. of HO 50.0 mL. Copyright 2014 Pearson Education, be Special Topic | be Emme! 9 Mt 50 mL. x = SO mmol of avetie seid SOmmol _ | 59 y4 ymk. 33.3 mL of 1.50M aceticacid xmmol 50 mL 015M 7.5 mmol of NaQH = 150M = 5.0 mL of 1.50 M NaOH 33.3 mL of 1.50 M acetic acid 5.0 mL of 1.50 M NaOH of HO 50.0 mL, 100M 50 mmol of sodium acetate 50 ym 150M 33.3 mL of 1.50 M sodium acetate xmmol 50.ml. 0.85 M = 42.5 mmol of HCL LSM 28.3 mL of 1.5 MHCI We cannot make the required butter with these solutions, because 33.3 mL + 28.3 mL > 50 mL, (Copysight © 2014 Pearson Eduction, In 109 Ho ML. Special Topic 1 Because formic acid has a pk, — 3.75. a formic acid/formate butfer ean be a buffer at pH = 3.30, sinee this, pH is within one pH unit of the pk, value. 78 x 104 (178 10-41) + 5.01 x 104) fraction of butler in the basie form Ky |] Las x 10+ 679x107 = 0.6 The solution must have [ formic acid } = 0.74 M and / sodium formate” = 0.26 M. The reaction to be carried out will Ke protons that will react with the basic form of the buffer in order tw Keep the pH constant ne Therefore. the better bulfer would be the one that has the larger percentage of the butler in the basie form, The pX, of formic acid is 3.74. Because the pH of the solution (4.2) is more basic than the p&, value of the compound. formic acid will exist primarily in its basic form, The pk, of acetic acid is 4.76, Because the pH of the solutions is more aidie than the p&, value of the ‘compound. acetic acid will exist primarily in its avidie form, ‘Therefore. the formate bulfer iy preferred, because it bus u greater perentage of the butler in the basic form, Copseigh © 2014 Paso Elation, I An Introduction to Organic Compound: Nomenclature, Physical Properties, and Representation of Structure mportant Terms alcohol alkane alkyl halide alkyl substituent amine angle strain anti conf bond boat conformer boiling point chair conformer cis fused cis isomer (for a eyelie compound) n name conformation conformational analysis a compound with an OH group in place of one of the hydro (ROH) wens of an alkane a hydrocarbon that contains only single bonds. a compound with halogen in place of one of the hydrogens of an alkane. ‘a substituent formed by removing a hydrogen from an alkane, a compound in which one or more of the hydrogens of NHy are replaced by an alkyl substituent (RNHs, RSNH, RsN) the strain introduced into a molecule as & result of its bond angles being distorted rom their ideal values, the staggered conformer in which the largest substituents bonded to the two carbons are opposite each other, It is the most stable of the st ered contormers, a bond of the chair conformer of eyelohexane that points directly up or directly down, a conformer of cyclohexane that roughly resembles a boat the temperature at which the vapor pressure of a liquid equals the atmospheric pressure. air, I is the most stable a conformer of cyclohexane that roughly res conformer of cyclohexane. two rings fused together in such a way thet if the second ring were considered to be two substituents of the first ring, the two substituents would be on the same side of the first ring the isomer with two substituents on the same side of the ring, see the definition of “cis isomer” and “trans isomer. non-systematie nomenclature: the three-dimensional shape of a molecule at a given instant the investigation of various conformers of a molecule and their relative stabilities. ut Copyright © 2014 Pearson Baveaton. 112 Chapter 3 conformers constitutional isomers (structural isomers) cyeloalkane 1,3-diaxial interaction dipole-dipole interaction eclipsed conformer equatorial bond ether flagpole hydrogens functional geoup gauche conformer half-chair conformer homologue homologous series hydrocarbon hydrogen bond different conformations of a molecule, molecules that have the same molecular formula but differ in the way the atoms wre connected, aan alkat e with its carbon chain arranged in a closed ring. the interaction between an axial substituent and one of the other two axial substitu- cents on the same side of a eyclohexane ring. an interaction between the dipole of one molecule and the dipole of another. a conformer in which the bonds on adjacent carbons are parallel to each other when viewed looking down the carbon-carbon bond a bond of the chair conformer of eyctohexane that juts out from the ring but does ‘not point directly up or directly down, «at compound in which an oxyzen is bonded to two alkyl substituents (ROR). the two hydrogens in the beat conformer of cyclohexane that are at the 1- and 4-positions of the ring, the center of reactivity of a molecule. a staggered conformer in which the largest substituents bonded to the two carbons are gatiche to each other: that is, their bonds have a dihedral angle of approxi- mately 60°. key TAY The substituents are gauche to each other. oy the interaction between two atoms or groups that ure luche to each other, cis-trans (or £.Z) isomers. the least stable conformer of cyclohexane. ‘a member of a homologous series. satan lene group, ‘of compounds in which each member differs from the next by’ one methy a compound that contains only carbon and hydrogen. an unusually strong dipole-cipole attraction (5 keal/mol) between a hydrogen bonded to O. N, or F and the lone pair of a different O. N. or F. Copyright © 2014 Pearson Eaton tne hyperconjugation nduced dipole-induced dipole interaction IUPAC nomenclature n melting poi methylene group ‘Newman projection packing parent hydrocarbon perspective formula polarizability primary alcohol primary alky! halide primary amine primary carbon primary hydrogen quaternary ammonium salt ring-flip (chair-chair interconversion) sawhorse projection secondary alcohol secondary alkyl h secondary amine secondary carbon ndary hydrogen Chapter} 113 delocalization of electrons by the overlap of a or orbital with an empty orbital, an interaction between a temporary dipole in one molecule and the dipole that the temporary dipole induces in another molecule. systematic nomenelature. the temperature at which a solid becomes a liquid, a CH, group. ‘a way to represent the three-dimensional spatial relationships of a down the length of a particular carbon-carbon bond. oms by looking a property that determines how well individual! molecules fit into a crystal lattice. the longest continuous earbon chain in a molecule: if the molecule has a functional ‘group. itis the longest continuous carbon chain that contains the functional group. 1 way to represent the three-dimensional spatial relationships of atoms u adjacent solid fines, one solid wedge, and one hatched wedge. the ease with which an electron cloud of an atom can be distorted. aan aleohol in which the OH oup is bonded to a primary carbon, dan alkyl halide im whieh the bl 1s bonded toa primary carbon, 4m amine with one alkyl group bonded to the nitrogen. 4 carbon bonded to enly one other carbon. athydrogen bonded to a primary carbon a nite yen compound with four alkyl groups bonded to the nitrogen, plus an accompanying anion, the conversion of a chair conformer of cyclohexane into the other chair conformer, Bonds that are axiel in one chair conformer are equatorial in the other chair conformer ‘way to represent the three-dimensional spatial relationships of atoms by looking at the carbon-carbon bond from an oblique angle, aan alcohol in which the OH group is bonded to a secondary carbon, aan alkyl halide in which the halogen is bonded to a secondary carbon, aan amine with ovo alkyl groups bonded to the nitrogen. a carbon bonded to two other carbons a hydrogen bonded to a secondary carbon. Copysight ©2014 Peano Eduction, Ie TL Chapter 3 skeletal structure skew-boat conformer solubility solvation staggered conformer steric hindrance steric strain straight-chain alkane Structural isomers ‘constitutional isomers) symmetrical ether systematic nomenclature tertiary alcohol te ary alkyl halide tertiary amine tertiary carbon to iary hydrogen ns-fused trans isomer (for a cyclic compound) twist-boat conformer unsymmetrical ether van der Waals fores 4 structure that shows the carbon-carbon bonds as Tines and does not show the carbon-hydrogen bonds, ‘ong of the conformers af a eyelohesane ring the extent to which a compound dissolves in a solvent, the interaction between a solvent and another molecule (or ion} a conformer in which the bonds on one carbon biseet the bond angles on the adja ‘hy ain hindrance due to groups occupying a volume of space the repulsion between the e eetron cloud of an atom or group of atoms and the electron cloud of another atom or group of atoms, aan alkane in which the carbons form a continuous chain with no branches, molecules that have the same molecular formula but differ in the way the atoms are connected, ian ether with two identical alkyl substituents bonded to the oxygen. a system of nomenclature based on rules such ats TUPAC nomenclature, an alcohol in which the OH group is bonded to « tertiary carbon, aan alkyl halide in whict the Falogen is bonded to a tertiary carbon, aan amine with three alky! groups bonded to the nitrogen. carbon bonded to three other carbons, ahydros sn bonded to a tertiary carbon, wether in such a way that if the second be two substituenty of the first ring, the two substituents would he on opposite Sides of the first ring. Wg Were considered {0 the isomer with two substituents on opposite sides of the ring. one of the conformers of a eyelohexane ri aan ether with two different alkyl substituents bonded 10 the oxyzen. induced dipole-induced dipole interactions Copygbt © 2014 Peano flation In: Chapter} 115. Solutions to Problems 1. a G)Hyy) I'there are 17 carbons, then there are 36 hydrogens. 5 7. Db. CyHy 3 If there are 74 hydrogens, then there are 36 carbons. CHSCHLCHACHE,CHACHCH CH, CHYCHCHLC HCH, octane Cy isooctane a. propyl alcohol by butyl methyl ether ¢.propylamine cHNHCH CH, bs cHy 2-methylbutane 2.2-dimethylpropane Notice that each carbon forms four bonds, and each hydrogen and bromine forms one bond. on CH,CH CHyCHBr CHCHCHCH, conesch CHCCHy | | Br Hy Br n-butyl bromide sec-butyl bromide isobutyl bromide tert-butyl bromide or butyl bromide ‘Dibromomethane does not have constitutional isomers” proves that carbon is tetrahedral if carbon were flat, rather than being tetrahedral, dibromomethane would have constitutional isomers because the two structures shown below would be different since the bromines would be 90° apart in one compound and 180° apart in the other compound. Only because carbon is tetrahedral are the two structures identical m ney u be an a. cucuott e ancien fe cnent ci bu bi cn b cucnencnsr a cHton f CHKCHCH.CHACHCHLCHCHBr an buen Copyright 9 2044 Peanon Eduction, be 116 Chapter 3 8. a. ethyl methylether ——e,sec-butylamine €. isobutyl bromide b, methyl propylether butyl alcohol or n-butylaleohol—f sec-butyl chloride CHy CH, CH 9 a. Solvedindhe tet cu diene—bicncn, dich cn CHy CHy i I CH,CHCHSCHCHCH:CHLCHy, I chy i oo cy HCH f HyCHCHCHsCHSCH, I CHCCH, | chy Hh CH | 10. a #1 CHSCHSCHSCHSCH,CHACH CH, #10. CH\CHCH—CHCH.CHH, octane 3.4-dimethy hexane cu on HsCHsCHSCHy #1 CHC CHCHCHy #2 CHCHCHS CH cH 2-methy heptane -trimethy pentane cus #3 CHACHSCHCH CHSCH-CH, #2 crngensci, al Hs 3-methylhneptane #4 CH,CHSCHCHCHSCHSCH; I ox -bmethyheptane 2.3.3:41imethypemane Cis cH cll, chk #5 cncencn.cu.c, fe center, an 2.2 meth hexane 2.3b4rimethypentne Copyright © 2014 Peuson Easton os #6 CHCHSCCHSCH.CH, I cH 3.3-dimethylhexane #7 CH CHy I I CHACH—CHCHSCHSCHy 2.3-dimethythexane on CH,CHCHSCHCH:CHs 2.4-dimethylhexane cHy I _ gh #9 CH,CHCH.CHSCHCHy 2.5-dimethylhexane b. The syst Chapter3 117 CH CH #15 Hy tetramethylbutane CH CHACHCH.CHLCH #16 CHACHy 3-ethythexane cH #7 cHcH.cHCHEH, éineny 3-ethyl-2-methylpentane #18 °CHSCHy CHACH, 3-ethyl-3-methylpentane natic name is under each structure, c. Only #1 (octane or n-octane) and #2 (isonctane) have com on names. #247, #8, #9, $12. #13, #14, #7 co #38, #10, #1) f AS HII HI #15 a, 2.2.4-trimethylhexane f. S-ethyl-4.4-dimethyloctane b. 2.2-dimethylbutane g 33-diethyIhexane €. methyl-4-propytheptane bh, 4(1-methylethy! octane 4d. 2.2,S-trimethylhexane i, 2.5-dimethylheptane fe. 3.3diethyl-+-methyl-5-propyloctane cH, an os | a. CH,CHSCHSCHCHy—b. CHSCCHs CHCHCHSCHs —d. CHCHCHSCHs | CH pentane .2-dimethytpropane 2-methylbutane 2-methylbutane 1B. CConyight ©2014 Pearson Bd. 1s 14. 16. 17. 18, Chapter 3 a e ‘OH be GH CCH, CH,CHCHCHCH ,CH,CH, b. i CHSCH, L-ethy!-2-methyleyelopentane ethyleyelobutane -ethyl-1.2-dimethylcyclohexane 3.6-dimethyldecane lopropyliiesane sce-butyl chloride 2-chlorobutane secondary yelohexy! bromide bromocyclonexane secondary Copssaht os CHLECHSCHCHICH, CH, CH, xa £Lethy[-3-(2-methylpropyleyelohexane (I-mnethylethy nonane hh. 1-(L-methy ethy1)-4-11-methylproply ieyelohexane i. heptane J. Pbromohesane €. isohexyl chloride {-chloro-+-methytpentane primary 4. isopropyl Muoride 2-fluoropropane secondary 2114 Paro shin. I 19, 20, 2. 2. Note that the name of a CH;CI sustituent is “chloromethyl, because a Clis in place of one of the Hs of a methyl substituent chloromethyleyclohexane ech a An 2 a J-chloro-2-methyleyclohexane | -chloro-3-methyleyclohexane Chapter3 119 b Cl CHy LY |-chloro- I-methyleyclohexane cHy 1. methoxyethane 4, |-isopropoxy-3-methylbutane 2. ethoxyethane 5. I-propoxybutane 4-methoxyoctane 6, 2-isopropoxyhexane b. No fe. 1 ethyl methyl ether 4, isopentyl isopropyl ether 2. diethyl ether 5. butyl propyl ether 3. -nocommon name 6. no common name cHOH CH\CHCH;CHOH common = methyl aleahol common = butyl alcohol or n-butyl alcohol systematic = methanol systematic = I-butanol CH,CH.OH (CH\CH,CHCH,CHLOH common = ethyl alcohol ‘common = pentyl aleohol or n-penty! alcohol systematic = ethanol systematic = [-pentanol CH\CH.CH.OH CH,CH)CHCH,CH,CH,OH common = propyl alcohol or n-propyl alcotol common = hexyl alcohol or n-hexyl aleohol systematic = I-propanol systematic = I-hexanol a, [-pentanol ¢.S-methyl-3-hexanol primary secondary b, S-chloro-2-methy d.T-methyl-3,5-octanediol (Notice that because there tertiary are two OH groups, the suffix is “dio.”) both alcohol groups are secondary Copytigh © 2014 Pearson Education, te mM. 26. 2. 28. Chapter 3 Se a chy cH | I CHCCH:CH:CH, CHCH.CCH.CH, | 1 on on 2-methyl-2-pentanol — 3-methyl-3-pentanol a, 4-chloro-3-ethyleyclohexanol secondary b._ 7.8dimethy!-3-nonanol secondary a, tertiary alkyl halide —b. tertiary alcohol a. hexylamine I-hexanamine primary 1b. see-butylisobutylamine \N-isohutyl-2-butanamine secondary ¢. diethylmethylamine N-ethy|-N-methylethanamine tertiary a CHyCHSCH.NHCH,CHCHs | cH b. CH)CI:NHCHCH, 6. CHACHCH:CH:CH:CHLNI I cH, a, 6-methyl-I-heptanamine isooetylamine primary b. cyclohexanamine ee cyclohexylan primary on Se I CHC—CHCH, I OH CH 2.3-dimethyl-2-butanol . I-bromo-5.5-dimethy! second: heptanol 4d. 4-methyleyctohexanol secondary ¢. primary amine ._butylpropylamine N-propyl--butan secondary fe. diethylpropylamine N,N-diethyl-I-propanamine tertiary £Neethyl-3-methyleyclopentanamine no common name secondary ad. cHACHCHNCHCHCH, Hy fe. CH\CHSCHCHSCHy I N. aN ct “oH S—vew.cns I cH ¢.4-methyl-N-propyl-1-pentanamine isohexylpropylamine secondary d. 2.5-dimethyleyctohexanamine ‘no common name primary Copyright © 2014 Peusontavetion Ine 2». 33. MM Chapter3 121 ‘The bond angle is predicted to be similar to the bond angle in water (104.5°).. The bond angle is predicted to be similar to the bond angle in ammonia (107.3°). ‘The bond angle is predicted to be similarto the bond angle in water (104.5°). The bond angle is predicted to be similar to the bond angle in the ammonium ion (109.5°). Fe To be a liquid at room temperature, the compound must have a boiling point that is greater than room temperature. pentane or 2-methylbutane a 1. 4vand 5 1.2.4, 5, and 6 ich water molecule has two hydrogens that can form hydrogen bonds, whereas each alcohol mole- cule has only one hydrogen that can forma hydrogen bond. Therefore, there are more hydrogen bonds between water molecules than between alcohol molecules. O-H--:G-H O—CHy | | | " u H aaa: H b. Bach water molecule has two hydrogens that an form hydrogen bonds and two lone pairs that can accept hydrogen bonds, so both hydrogens of a water molecule can engage in hydrogen bonding, In contrast. ammonia has three hydrogens that can form hydrogen bonds but only one lone pair that can accept hydrogen bonds, so only one hydrogen of an ammonia molecule can engage in hydrogen bond- ing, so it will have a lower boiling point than water. €. Bach water molecule has two hydrogens that can form hydrogen bonds und two lone pairs that ean accept hydrogen bonds, so both lone pairs of a water molecule can engage in hydrogen bonding. In contrast, HF has three lone pairs that can accept hydrogen bonds but only one hydrogen that can form a hydrogen bond, so only one lone pair of a HF molecule can engage in hydrogen bonding, so it will have 4 lower boiling point than water, 4d, HF and ammonia can each form only one hydrogen bond, but HF has a higher boiling point because the hydrogen bond formed by HF is stronger since fluorine is more electronegative than nitrogen Copyright © 2014 Pearson Boston, Ie Chapter 3 PARA AR LAA i a ae : my NNO AR OA oH 0 ° b. HOCH;CH,CH,OH > CH,CHSCH,OH > CH,CH,CHJCH,OH > CH,CH,CH.CH: Because cyclohexane is a nonpolar compound, it will have the lowest solubility in the most polar solvent, Which, of the solvents given, is ethanol CHjCH2CH3CH3CH{OH CH,CH,06 1-pentanol ‘diethyl eth 2CHy — CHsCHj0H = CHyCHyCH)CHCH CH, ethanol hexane Start with the least stable conformer and then obtain the others by keeping the front carbon constant and rotating the back carbon clockwise. sao vee a. deat, dns "hye wets Sdn Yt We yguscs HW e u W ‘ 6 Hs _ cus HCH aa 4 4 HCH: . cmt H Hq iy H oH cH.cH, cllen, 4 E F Potential nergy 0 0 0 180 240 wo we Degrewsof Rotation 4. ai. 42. 4 Chapter3. 123 ‘The Newman projection shows rotation about the OH 4 a Te ~ ethyl-2-pentanol 1b, The Newmian projection shows rotation about the C-2—C-3 bond. 2-methy!-2-pentanamine ‘To draw the most stable conformer: put the gest group on the front earbon opposite the largest group on the back carbon a CHy be CHSCHy Ge CHyCHy noon H HW " u YIy y u oH Ho CHy CHy ‘CHy CHscHh och, Ga.ci, . 360° 340 = a. iso * ba ty 180° ~ 40° = 140° You can get the total strain ‘of eycloheptane by subtracting the strainless heat of formation from the atctual heat of Formation The The actual heut of formation of trainless” heat of Formation of eycloheptane is 7 (—4.92) = ~34.4 keal/mol. -yeloheptane is ~28,2 keal /mol (trom Table 3.8 on page 127 of the text). 2 keal /mol, Therefore, the total strain energy of eycloheptane is ~28.2 — (~34.4) = Hexethal would be expected to be the more effective sed henethal has a hexyl group in place of the ethyl group of barbital. Being less polar, hexethal will be better able 0 penetrate the nonpolar membrane of the eel ve because it is less polar than barbital since acl a bo a ‘Two 13-diaxial (gauche) interactions cause the chair conformer of fuorocyelohexane to be 0.25 keal/mol less stable when the fluoro substituent is in the axial position than when it is in the equatorial position. The gauche conformer of |-fuoropropane his one gauche interaction (see Figure 3.15 on page 131 of the text), Therefore, the gauche conformer is (0125/2) = 0.13 keal/mol less stable than the anti conformer that has no gauche interactions Copysighh © 2014 Pear uct, I 124 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. Chapter 3 [equatorial conformer] _ 5.4 [axial conformer | 1 [equatorial conta al conformer] + mer] % of equatorial conformer x 100 [equator xia conformer | 4 sa = 5 x 100 = x 100 = 84% Fa ay * 100 = GX 100 = 8 If both substituents point downward or both point upward. it isa cis isomer Ione substituent points upward and the other downward, itis a trans isomer a cis b. cis cis dans. Both srans-1 4-dimethyleyclohexane and cis-L-rert-butyl-3-methyleyclohexune have a conformer with two substituents in the equatorial position and a conformer with two substituents in the axial position civ-|-tert-Buty!-3-methyleyelohexane will | of the diequatorial-substituted conformer because the bulky tert-butyl substituent will have & greater preference for the equatorial posi- tion than will a less bulky methyl substituent, since the larger substituent will have greater destabiliz 1.3-diaxial interactions when itis in an axial positior her percents a HH. b. FHC: La —L-chy Hs trans-1-Eihyl-2-methyleyclohexane ix more stable beeause both substituents can be in equatorial positions. a. one equatorial and one axial in each one equatorial and one axial in each . both equatorial in one and both awial in the other €. ane equatorial and one axial in each ¢. both equatorial in one and both axial in the other f& both equatorial in one and both awial in the other a, and) b, Solved in the text cHy chs H i H HW oe a iC Y cur DN 7 WPAN ea, 4H H H 4 d. There will be equal amounts of the two conformers at equilibrium because they have the same stability—each one has one methyl group on an equatorial bond and one methyl group on an axial bond. a. One chair conformer of rrans-1_4-dimethyleyclohexane has both substituents in equatorial positions, so it does not have any 1.3-diavial interactions, The other chair conformer hats both substituents in axial positions. When a substituent is in an axial position, it experiences two 1.3-diaxial interactions, so this chair conformer hay a total of four 1.3-diaxial interactions. Copyright © 2014 Pearson keaton, ln Chapter 3125 Because the 1.3-diavial interaction between a methyl group and a hydrogen causes a strain energy of 0.9 keal/mol, the chair conformer with both substituents in a less stable than the chair conformer with both substituents in equatorial po oer By ates b, Each of the chair conformers of ef positions is 4 x 0.9 3.6 keal/mol A °CHy a1. 3-diaxial 1 .4-dimethyleyclohexane has one substituent in an equatorial position and one in an axial position. Therefore, the two conformers are equally stable, 52. Both condensed and skeletal structures are shown, oy a. CHCHSCHOCCH TK 1b. CHCHCH;CH;CH;CH.OH I Hy AWA ¢. CHSCHsCHNHy 1 chs oe 4 cHycricnycier CHy cH cueny « cnc, CH,CH.CH.CH.CHCH NN HCH | f CHCHN | CHCHy aa . Congright ©2614 Peann Edoaton, I 126 Chapter 3 J. CH.CH.CHY | CHCH, I ~ ~N oe ee we ~N S ® ou h, eee ees Hs, KK. CHyCF:CHCHCH)CH:CH.CHy, re (CH,CHCH,, i. ie 1 CHyCH)CH;CHCH)CH)CH,CH)CH,, bene Ae a L oe : on De 53, >No > - > NO | a x | NN > hydiogen ands dipole-dipole ker ipoteipole tracts iments than mpage Bose negative thin Copyright ©1204 Pearon Educabon 56. 57. Chapter3 127 2.6-trimethytheptane 7. dethoxyheptane romo-2-methyloctane 8, 1.3-dimethoxypropane S-methyl-3-hexanol 9, NW-dimethyleyelohexanamine dicthylpentane 10, 3-ethyleyclohexanol 5-bromo-N-ethyl-[-pentanamine HL. L-bromo-4-m 6. 2.3.S-trimethythexane b. NN 7 Sg ey A J Hy Gh os . 2 HCHCH:CH, 6. CH,CHCHCHCHCH wf a br cry i on 8 POON snd D are cis isomers, (In C both substituents are downward pointing: in D both substituents are upward pointing.) abs 24 ob LO 2S oe 34 The interactions will not be as Lary between two CH, groups, ist conformer (A) is the most stable because the three substituents are more spread out, so its gauche the Clin A is between a CHy and an H. whereas the Clin B and C is oH cH a be CHYC—CCHy & CHREHCHCHCH, Lt I CH) CH CH CH Copyright ©2014 Pearson Fastin, Ine 128 59. 60. 61. 62. caper b. 2ebyobae -hrom-2 methane Wey tuananine bh. tg penn a. ettospropne L_omoetopenane fe. 2-methylpentane Ge cyclohexanol a. -bromhecane aero aeatersurfce ———g_Praoentne homing ager nd move we potwite pentyl chloride (greater surface area than h._ butyl alcohol (forms hydrogen bonds) the branched compound) K.octane (sce Table 3.1) e. hunol ever cao) J. open el rms stoner hydrogen 4. I-hexanot (forms hydrogen bonds) bonds) tpl ts yaogen bony iyaosen bos nd sects aie) a CHy CHy H Soa aod OP PM oe Pen, Hoon i b. the one on he ight would predominate atc ease it i me sble ing bath met pear neq sions : cH a Sho" 4 CHy Sob io . There would be equal amounts of each one at equilibrium, because they have the same stability since each conformer hats one methyl group in an equatterial position and one methyl group in an axial position, Ansaid is more soluble in water. It has 3 fluoro substituent that ean form a hydrogen bond with water Hydrogen bonding increases its solubility in water, GH CHy CH CHy CHy Hy H—Q)—-H—Q>-H—O: Copyright © 2014 Peary Fadaton, 65. 66. 7. 68. Chapter3 129 ‘The student named only one compound correctly. a, 2-bromo-3-pentanol & correct b. d-ethyl-2,2-dimethythepiane h, 2,5-dimethytheptane ¢. 3-methyleyelohexanol i, S-bromo-2-pentanol dd, 2,2-dimethyleyclohexanol -ethyl-2-methyloctane e methylpropy! jnonane k. 2.3.3-trimethyloctane f.I-bromo-3-methylbutane 1. NNSetrimethyl-3-hexanamine All three compounds are diaxial-substituted cyclohexanes. B has the highest energy. Only B has 1.3-diawial interaction between CH; and Cl. which will be greater than a 1,3-diaxial interaction between CH and H or between Cl and H The only one is 2,2.3-trimethylbutane. CH CHy i CH,C—CHCH, I Hy ioe essseecemecreseserea pees a _ First draw the structure, so you know what groups to put on the bonds in the Newman projections. es CH=CH CH) —CHy CH CH CHy Hs a CHCH, Hi H H " CHACHy most stable least stable Rotation can occur about all the C—C bonds. There are six carbon-carbon bonds in the compound, so there are five other carbon-carbon bonds. in addition to the C\—C; bond, about which rotation can occur, CCopysght ©2914 Pearson ducati, Ie 130 69. 70. db Chapter 3 4d. Three of the carbon-carbon bonds have staggered conformers that are equally stable because each is bonded to a carbon with three identical substituents, (CHyCH,CH3CH,CH2Br cHoHeRCHCH, he cmcr.crcnsct, th om, crncHenscnte ony “HCH oi CCH CHHy Br i CIRCHEHCH ch Hy I HCH Hy e ! CH= CH—CH)—CH)— CH CHy SI cHy a, I-bromopentane b. pentyl bromide a, 2-bromopentane b. no common name a. 3-bromopentane b. no common name a. -bromo-3-methylbutane b. isopenty! bromide a. I-bromo-2-methylbutane b. no common name a, 2-bromo-2-methytbutane b. tert-pentyl bromide a. 2-bromo-3.methylbutane b. no common name a. [-bromo-2.2-dimethylpropane 1b, no common name. but in older literature the common name neopenty| bromide is used. ‘our isomers are primary alkyl halides. 4. Three isomers are secondary alk! halides, One isomer i. tertiary alky! halide, a. butane b. L-propanol . S-propyldecane 4d. 4:propylt-non fe. 2methyls nol a cn Lochs 7 sc more stable I-methylethyl octane ime primary alkyl halide secondary alkyl halide secondary alkyl halide primary alkyl halide primary alkyl halide tertiary alkyl halide secondary alkyl halide primary alky! halide 6-chloro-4-ethy|-3-methyloctane {methoxy 5-methyl-propythexane 1-6-(2-methylpropy! jdecane i. fen 4-decunamine Hs CHLCH) 2014 Pearson Education, Is | -methyl-2-(2-methylpropyl cyclohexane HICH, ~—CHCH ys more stable’ CH:CHy CHACH, cqually stable ® CHC, ae 7 ichy.ct (CHy;CHCH:CHy 7 pic (cH cre ee more stable CH2CHy 72, Alcohols with low molecular weights are mote water soluble than alcohols with high molecular weights because. as a result of having fewer carbons, they have a smaller nonpolar component that has to be dragged into water. 73. a 12 keal/mol ” hae 20" 300" Diihodral Angle b, a © 1245.2 = 64keal/mol — d. 12 + 9.3 = 10.5 kcal/mol a Copyright ©:214 Pearson acai, te 132 16. 7. Chapter 3 ‘The most stable isomer is the one that has a conformer with both substituents in equatorial positions. Using the Following structu that has both substituents in axial positions, “That will be the isomer that has both groupy in equatorial positions a a Thecis isomer ofa | asubtuted compou isthe most stab isomer, It has a conformer with both b. The trans isomer of a 14-disubstituted compound is the most stable isomer. It has a conformer with both substituents in axial positions, so its other conformer has both groups in equatorial positions, ¢. The trans isomer of a 1.2-disubstituted compound is the most stable isomer. It has a conformer with both substituents in axial positions, so its other conformer has both groups in equatorial positions. Six ethers have the molecular formula ~ CHO. caocnicrscrsct emeucnscty cnerocnen.en, OA a (tae 2-etonybt Leon ms wechuy et cig aye my I cnn eotocts cancncrsocrs devin by on Porn a pa Zthowpranie ———athory-2aneinppane——_Fansthon-2ti poe eit hopropt treet ett Ta et eth ‘The most stable conformer has two CHs groups in equatorial positions and one in an axial position, (The other conformer would have two CH groups in axial positions and one in an equatorial position. chy a, N-methyl-6-methyl-3-heptanamine d. 2.3-dimethylpentane b, 3-cthyl-2.5-dimethytheptane fe. S:butyl-3,4-dimethylnonane .1.2-dichloro-3-methylpentane f S-butyl-3,3.9-trimethylundecane (undecane is an 11 carbon stra wrbon chain hydro Table 3.1 on page 91 of the texd. Congright © 2014 Pearson tauetion tne 78. 1”. 80. 81. 82. Chapter} 133 One chair conformer of trany-1,2-dimethyleyclohexane has both substituents in equatorial positions, so it does not have any 1.3-diaxial interactions. However, the figure on top of page 134 of the text shows that the two methyl substituents are gauche (0 one another (as they would be in gauche butane: see Figure 3.15 on page 131), giving ita strain energy of 0.87 kcal/mol fa gauche The other chair conformer of frans-1,2-dimethyleyclohexane has both substituents in axial positions When a substituent isin an axial position, it experiences two 1,3-diaxial interactions. This chair conformer, therefore. has a total of four 1.3-diaxial interactions. Each diaxial interaction is between a CH, and an HH so each results in a strain energy of 0.87 kcal/mol. Therefore, this chair conformer has a strain energy of 3.48 keal/mol (4 x 0.87 = 3.48), a, S-methyl-3-hexanol fe. .5-hexanediol b. _I-bromo-2-propyleyelopentane f. 6-bromo-2-hexanol c. 2amethyl-3-pentanol g. d-ethy!-3-methyleyclohexanol d,_5-bromo-2-methyloctane bh. 4-bromo-I-ethyl-2-methyleyclohexane a, [-Hexanol has a higher boiling point than 3-hexanol because the alkyl group in I-hexanol can better engage in van der Waals interactions, because the OH group of 3-hexaniol makes it more difficult for its six carbons to lie close to the six carbons of another molecule of 3-hexanol The floppy ethyl groups in diethyl ether make it difficult for the water molecules to approach the oxygen in order to engage in hydrogen bonding. Therefore, itis less soluble in water than is tetrahydrofuran in which the alkyl groups are pinned back ina ring One of the chair conformers of cis-1,3-dimethyleyclohexane has both substituents in equatorial positions, so there are no unfavorable 1,3-diaxial interactions, The other chair conformer has three 1,3-diaxial inter actions, two between a CH, and an H and one between two CH; group: ‘We know that a 1.3-diaxial interaction between a CH) and an H is 0.87 keal /mol, Subtracting 1.7, for the two interactions between a CHy and an H, from 5.4 (the energy difference between the two conformers) results in a value of 3.7 keal/mol for the 1,3-diaxial interaction between the two CH, groups. Hoo CHy Lions Lg QT cy Copyeight ©2014 Pearson Edocation, IM 85. Chapter 3 Because bromine has a larger diameter than chlorine, one would expect bromine to have a greater prefer- tence for the equatorial position as would be indicated by a larger AG°, However. Table 3.9 on page 131 of the text indicates that it has a smaller AG®, indicating that it has less preference for the equatorial position than chlorine has. The C—Br bond is longer than the C—CI bond, which causes bromine to be farther away than chlorine from the other axial substituents, Apparently, the longer bond more than offsets the diameter. a. T-bromo-6-ethyl--decanol b, S-chloro-3-ethyl-2.7-dimethylnonane AG 2.61 kcal/mol AG = -ATIN Ky 2.61 keal/mol = -1.986 x 10'* keal/mol K x 298 K * In Ky 2.61 keal mol = 0.5918 keal/mol In Key 441 equatorial oo e both axial percentage of molecule both 2 oth equatorial 82.3 ‘with both groups in = te x 100 = = x 100 = 98.8%, een both equatorial + both axial B34 equatorial positions The conformer on the left has two 1,3-diaxial interactions between a CHy and an H (2. 0.87 keal/mol) for total strain energy of 1.7 keal mol. Hoot Jat Zz oe ai 1 cH CHe CH ‘The conformer on the right has three 1.3-diaxial interactions, two between a CHy and an H (1.7 keal/mol) and one between two CH groups (3.7 keal /mol: see Problem 82) fora total strain energy of 5.4 keal /mol ‘Therefore. the conformer on the left will predominate at equilibrium. Copsrght © 2014 Pearson taeston Chapter3 135 Name the following compounds, oH a, the most stable of all the conformers the least stable of all the conformers, iche conformer ‘What are the common and systematic names of the following compounds? HCHCH, b. CH,CHCH,CH;CH.OH eat | i EX a cH \A sor Label the three compounds in each set in order from highest boiling to lowest boiling, a. CHYCHCHCHyCHSBr CHACH CH Br CHCHSCHCHBe b. CH,CHSCH.CHCHy CHACH;CHSCHLOH— CHYCHSCH,CH,CI Gy CH I € CHE—CCH, CHYCHCHSCHCH{CHACH:CHy CH{CHCHCH,CH:CH.CH, I Chis CH cH Name each of the following compounds: & CHRCHCHCHREHCH:CH, © CH On I b. CH;CHLCHOCH.CH, @. CHLCHCHCHCHCH.CI a “HSCH.CHy CH.CHy Copysighe 92914 Persin Bain, fe 136 6. ra 10, u. 12, Chapter 3 Draw the other chair conformer for the following compound: ae Which is more stable, cis-t-isopropyl-3-methyleycloexane or trans |-isopropyl-3-methyleyclohesane? Which of the following has: a, the higher boiling point: diethyl ether or butyl alcohol? b. the greater solubility in water: I-butanol or I-pentanol? ¢. the higher boiling point: hexane or iyohexane? 4d. the higher boiling point: pentylamine or ethylmethylamine? €. the greater solubility in water: ethyl alcohol or ethy! chloride? What are the common and systematic names of the following a. CHACHCHCHBr b. CH CHCH.CHOH © CHACHCHSCH.NHs Hy Cy cH sompounds? Draw the more stable conformer of: aL cis-L-see-bulyl-4-isopropyleyelohexane Db. srans-1-see-butyl-+-isopropyleyelohexane syans-t-see-butyl-3-isopropyleyelohexane Draw the structure for each of the Following: aa secondary alkyl bromide that has three carbons b. a secondary amine that has three carbons ‘¢.amalkane with no secondary hydrogens 4. a constitutional isomer of butane €. three compounds with molecular formula C,H,O- Name the following compounds: ee Cx b. cryeuctt CHaCHSCH3CHBr & 1CHCH,OCH,CH. i LL ft ch OH Copyright © 2014 Peano Eaton In Isomers: The Arrang chiral chiral probe chromatography cis isomer cis-trans isomers configuration configurational isomers constitutional isomers (structural isomers) dextrorotatory dias enantiomerically pure enantiomeric excess (optical purity) enantiomers erythro enantiomers nent of Atoms in Space a molecule or objec: that contains an element (a plane oF x point) of symmetry: an achiral molecule is superimposable on its mirror image. results when a compound containing an sp* hybridized nitrog rapidly invents in with a lone pair an atom that is bonded to four different substituents, «chiral molecule has & nonsuperimposable mirror image: something capable of distinguishing between enantiomers. separation technique in which the mixture to be separated is dissolved in a solvent and the solution is pussed through a column packed with an adsorhent stationary phase: the isomer with substituents on the same side of a cyclic structure, or the isomer with the hydrogens on the same side of a double bond. isomers that result fiom not being able to rotate about a carbon-carbon double bond, the three-dimensional structure of a chiral compound. The configuration at a specific atom is designated by R or S, stereoisomers that cannot interconvert unless a covalent bond is broken. Cis-t isomers and isomers with ayymmetric ce are configurational isomers, molecules that have the same molecular formula but differ in the way the atoms are connected the enantiomer that rotates the plane of polarization of pla clockwise dircetion (+). ne-polarized lis hin a stereoisomers that are not enantiomers. ‘only one enantiomer is present in an enantiomerically pure sample, how much of one enantiomer is present in a mixture ofa pa expressed as a percent nonsuperimposable mirror-image molecules, the pair of enantiomers with similar groups on the same side (in the ease of stereo- isomers with adjacent asymmetric centers) when drawn in a Fischer projection. 137 Conysght ©2914 Pearson Boat, 138 Chapter 4 Fischer projection levorotatory ‘meso compound observed rotation optically active optically inactive perspective formula plane-polarized light plane of symmetry polarimeter polarized light racemic mixture (racemic modification, racemate) R configuration resolution of a racemi mixture the spatial arr poups bonded to an ayy ric center, The asymmetric center is the point of intersection of two perpendicular lines: the horizontal lines represent bonds that project out of the plane of the paper toward the viewer, and the vertical lines represent bonds that projeet ack from the plane oF the paper away from the viewer. nonidentical compounds with the same molecular formu the enantiomer that rotates the plane of polarization of pline-polarized fight in a counterclockwise direction (=), a compound that possesses asymmetric centers and a pling of symmetry: itis aehi- ral, because it has «t pkine of symmetry. the amount of rotation observed in at pokarimeter, rotates the plane of polarization of phine- polarized light, does not rotate the plane of polarization of plane-polarized light. how much excess of one enantiomer is present in a misture oF a pair of enantionters, a method of representing the spatial arrangement of groups bonded to an asym- metric center, Two adjacent bonds are drawn in the plane of the paper: a solid wedge depicts a bond that projects out of the plane of the paper toward the viewer. aind a hatched weuge depicts a bond that projects back from the paper away from the viewer that oscillates in a single plane, nary plane that biseetsa molecule into pieces that are a pair of mirror in aan instrument that measures the rotation of the pkine af polarization of plane- polarized light light that oscillates in only one plane. 4a migture of equal amounts of a pair of enantiomers, aifter assigning relative priorities to the four groups bonded to an usymmetrie center, if he lowest-priority group is on a vertical axis in a Fischer projection (or pointing away from the viewer in a perspective Formula). an arrow drawn from the highest- priority group to the next highest-priority group an then (0 the nest highest priority group goes in a clockwise direction. mig mixture into the individual separation of a ra antiomers, CConpsight 9 2014 Peurwn Fae S configuration specific rotation stereocenter (stereogenic center) trans isomer Chapter4 139 after assigning relatve priorities to the four groups bonded to an ayymmetrie ter. if the lowest-priority group is on a vertical axis in a Fischer projection (or pointing away from the viewer in a perspective formula), an arrow drawn from the highest-priority group to the next highest-priority group and then to the next highest priority group goes in a counterclockwise direction, the amount of rotation that will be observed for a compound with a concentration zziven in grams per 100 mL. of solution (or g/mL i iis a pure liquid) in a sample tube 1.0 dm tong, aan atom at which the interchange of two groups produces a sterevisomer isomers that differ in the way the atoms are arranged in space, the pair of enantiomers with similar groups on opposite sides (in the case of Stereo isomers with adjacent asymmetric centers) when drawn in a Fischer projection. the isomer with substituents on the opposite sides of a eyelie structure, or the isomer ‘with the hydrogens on the opposite sides of a double bond, Copyciht ©2014 Pearson Education te 130 Chapter 4 Solutions to Problems 1 CHCH:CHLOH CIneHOH —CHCHAOCH, bu b. ‘There re seven cottons! omer th mole fomula C,H i cHencincHon cHeHcHOH — CHEOK —_CHLCHEALCH, bn, yon CHHCH,OCH,CH CHOCHCHCHy CHLOCHICH, cH - CHy cH, Z CHC, cHCH, 3 a Land ee H 3. \ Vd c cad y oN Hl Wo “cu.ci.cH, cis trans cis trans 4. BS Oy 4 NS os cn §. CHyCH;CHCH=CH, = CH;C=CHCH, ~—CHCH;C=C1 6. Only Chas. dipole moment of zero. because the bond dipoles cancel since they are in opposite directions. HA exe oy OM 7. a,b, ¢, f. and h are chiral. de. and g are each superimposable on its mirror image. These, therefore. are achiral. 8. a.e,and f have asymmetric centers. Copyrigt 2014 Pearson Edocaion ba 10. ML 12. Chapters 14 Solved in the text a, €,and f, because in ofder 0 be able 10 exist as. pair of enantiomers, the compound must have an asym~ mttic center except in the ease of certain compounds with unusual structures; see Problem 86) a It has one asymmetric center b._ Ithas three stereocenters. Draw the first enantiomer with the groups in any order you want. Then draw the second enantiomer by drawing the mirror image of the first enantiomer. Your answer might not look exactly ike the ones shown below because the first enantiomer can be drawn with the four groups on any of the four bonds. The next fone is the mirror image of the first one ak CHy ie 2 ie a CH:CH,Ch I I “ c ., co Bro M"CHOH —- HOCHS"/ > Br crycHy W'CHy cHe7 ~CHCHy u H H H 3 a m 7 co acHycu® W'CH. CHE SCHICHY h i bea cin 2 cnene cucu! we—f—n ne e—fon Giron Gihon cH.cl, Roh cy Ho + " wf on CHecHy CEH: Solved in the text o 6 © SO Qo oO o @ SO 40 So forms 2 bonds to attached to attached only C, so considered TC forms 3bondsio tw Hy ached C. so considered 1020s to be attached was © 3014 Parson Eston, Ine 142 18. Chapter 4 a. Solved in the text bok c. Todetermine the configuration, first aud the fourth bond to the asymmetric center, Remember that it cannot be drawn between the wo solid bonds. (It can be dranvn on either side of the solid wedge.) LNA tui Sow & s bok ce as The easiest way to determine whether (wo compounds are identical or enantiomers is to determine their configurations: If both ase R (or both are $), they are identical. Ione is ® and the other is S, they are enantiomers, idenvical enantiomers. entmfiomens. enantiomers a a b. br c co cnet VN cHer \"H eH, ‘cite 2. Sohed inthe ext b. coo wen cHcH, a. levonotatory——b. dexttorotutory i ‘observed rotation (a speeitic rotation = ——S NSE eoncentration (g/L m 2) < length (dm) +138 +13. lal = —_ +168 4g in 100 mL. x 2am a -24 boo a. OUtisara emie mixture.) b, S06 of the mixture is excess (++-mandelic acid, optical parity = 0.50 = —_Sesetved specitie rotation _ specific rotation of the pure enantiomer observed spe +158 fa rotation observed specific rotation = +79 50% of the mixture is excess (—)-mandelie acid observed specific tation = ~79 (For the calculation, sce part b.) Copyesht 0) 2014 Pear Fon Chapterd 143 24. a. From the data given, you cannot determine the configuration of naproxen. b. 97% of the commercial preparation is (+)-naproxen; 3% is a racemic mixture, Therefore, the commercial preparation forms 98.5% (+ )-naproxen and 1.5% (= )-naproxen. 25, Solved in the text. 26. Asa result of the double bond, the compourd has a cis isomer and a trans isomer. Because the compound also has an asymmetric center, the cis isomer can exist as @ pair of enantiomers and the trans isomer can exist aa pair of enantiomers, HCH, Ec Br VCH Tees J = W chy cH H trans enantiomers 27. a. This statement is correct, Although there are many examples where there would be fewer than 2" stereoisomers (for example, trans-2-butene has two stereocentery but only two stereoisomers, there are zo situations where there will be more than 2" stereoisomers) This statement is not correct. For example, the compound in Problem 26 has one asymmetric center (therefore, 2" = 2). but the compound has four stereoisomers. 28, a. enantiomers identical compounds (Therefore, they are not stereoisomers.) ¢. diastereomers 29. a. Find the sp' carbons that are bonded (o four different substituents: these are the asymmettie centers. Cholesterol has eight asymmetric centers. They are indicated by arrows. Pe ee. ci Y xX — CHy le NS . aa HO’ S b. 2° = 256 Only the stereoisomer shown above is found in nature, Copyrigtn 214 Pes Education. Ie 144 Chapter 4 30. Your perspective formulas may not look exactly like the ones drawn here because you can draw the first one with the groups attached (0 any bonds you want, Just make certain that the second one is a mirror ¢ of the first one. ima Leucine hay one asymmetric center, so it will have two stereoisomers, ce he we fet nen ccHyscuci, ¥ Py SHMCHD: Coen on. b. Isoleucine has two asymmetric centers, so it has four stereoisomers, Again your perspective formu- las may not look exactly like the ones drawn here. To make sure you have all four, determine the configuration of each of the asymmetric centers. You should have R\R. 5.5. R.S, and $.R. Notice that the asymmetric centers in the mirror image have the opposite configurations. “o0c 4 " coo" coo- coo" \ Se od Nene th CSC : wee Zo Ninn or HY NG ns Wf oncn, cna, aa RA ss kok cnet, cnc ~OOC \ H H, coo” coo” Ccoo™ cet, Wetec . . wo a wine awn s HaN* CHICHy, *NHy CHy HOS H CH, R RS CHLCH, CHSCHy 31. Band D have no symmetric centers. Aand C each have one asymmetric center. a CK (Ff A c E has two asymmetric centers (Copyright 204 Pear Education, I Chapterd 145 : CH, Hy avs Yc W CIRCHCH, —CHACIRCH: 1H eee eee Ros kos CHCHACH; —— CHCHCHs ony cH HW 4 0H Wee u-as cin ek > 4 vn eee H——OHR ccc, cHcHCH, er i CHCHCH, —— CHLCHLCH, b. CHy CHy uf—Brs Hk & 4 Bo u 4 H—-4H Awe AL far sk Rs . one Bl Br cl cy AAL ee u Ls Ses ROR n—ton HH a Hos Ho CHACHy cH cHy © HAC, H HL CH) cl HR Hcl S ‘ —e=c 7 Soo } cr < wo Ql ci}—-us Hale Wf cue cach, YY Rs RS CHCHy Hc, cus Nie a Nn cl CHCH, © CH;CH, sos RR da CHACHiBr oo crc SH ‘Br 5 CHACHBr m CH.CH,Br br—}—u HBr cu. cHACH, s R Gopyeigh 2014 Pearson tsa, te Lo BB. Chapter 4 LCL : \ 48 an cu cis-2-methyleyelohesanol fo t a a I-ehloro-L-methyleyelooctane —cis-F-elloro-S-methyleyelonetane —srwns-L-cbloro-S-methyleyelooetane There is more than one diastereomer for ay b, and d: ¢ has only one diastereomer To draw a diastereomer of a, by or d. switch any one pair of substituents bonded to one of the ayymmetric pair can be switched. your diastereomer may not be the one drawn here. unless centers. Because any on you happened to switch the same pair that is switched here. a cH eC H——oH W HOH cH ba u a sel wee cHH, Hs A = identical B= enantiomer C= diastereomer—D = identical B.D. and F because each has two asymmetric centers and the same four groups bonded to each of the asymmetric centers. A-has two asymmetric centers but it does not have a sereoisomer that is meso compound, heeause it does not have the same four groups bonded t0 each of the asymmetric centers, C and Edo not have & stereoisomer that is a meso compound. because they do not have asymmetrie centers Solved in the text a CHCH, CHLCH, chyBe Chiste co or HCH, CH} WL CHyBr cu, CHACHs CHC, kg s R 5 Conse» 24 Porn cain. Is b. CHC, CHLCH.CL | © or u—pecHy oh sere) eee cH cucu, ® g CH Chapter 147 CH,CHCH,OH No stereoisomers. because the compound does not have an asymmetric center cH cron CH.OH | o a HY ~CH,OH i cu.cn, cnc s k s Hy fe. CHjCHZCCH CH, No stereoisomers, because the compound does not have an asymmetric center. | a cn cH, taco ay HOL- RR Hons me abr ts ot . e ee Gon fH Sn a " ‘ CHy Hy ks kos chy cit ro Wonca pee ee S Ho! cH ston s H—p-err sos Be cH, cry cnc, nas cucH: ct ae uae ween or of crc cnc, sR a meso compound a meso compound cic, cH, HW euch, n—t-cis ote e Cl ce S Hg 1k cHcns ca, “Cl Gg eae) 7 an cHichy cH.cn, CCoysright ©2014 Peano dbcain, Ine U8 Chapter 4 h cl a cH cH cH AA was wfas atwe 2 meosompound ot tn a oa a oa H—-ck c——n s u—y—cr RR ss meso compound {ith a plane of symmetry cH cu a 4 a oa Hop=c ss cl—f-n ke ee ee iy HW " sR Ros Hc & Cis CHYCHSCHs or cH cH ao Gl nas c—-He AARK AAN a cs kor clin s Hc CincrecHs —CHLCHLCHS Oo CLL tse af Ya of oor ‘< meesompoun \/ a meso compound. ci or cl Br Br Br I pal cl a ‘Br Bi 1 Br ‘This compound does not have any asymmetric centers, so it has only cis-trans isomers, ar cr Copyrigt © 2014 Pearson Zdoean a: Chapter4 149 40. and 41, How to draw perspective formulas for compounds that have two asymmetric centers is described on page 175 of the ext eae cul n—b-on wo—f-n nea cen caer, cnc (283R-1 3aiehtore2-pentanal —2RAS}-1 ach? penal cnet cnet n—ton won u H+ ch cucu, cicth (2839-1 3chlow2-pemanal ORAM Sichlor-2pentnol b. cL CHC) Hp a NUH cnet, Yon 28.48) 1eticlone- pent!” QR 38}-1chloo2 penal ccs cue coer ae wee 1" Ho cH.cHs ‘ou (25.381 Seichlow2:pemtanol Jihlow-2-pentanl 42. Ro BR wo) ( ection NOs 43. Your answer might be correet yet not look like the answers shown here. If you ean get the answer shown here by interchanging two pairs of groups bonded to an ayymmettic center on the structure you drew, then {Your answer is correct. If you get the answer shown here by interchanging one pair of groups bonded to an symmetric center, then your angwer is not correct a a b. Br Hu ( Nee CH:CHs swe V4 aS HocHscihy Yytcu, r jr Copyeit © 2014 Pearson Fuca, te 130 46. 47. a Chapter + H a. Suse: t cI Bro Cs CHSCH, a. 3-chloro-4-methythexane €. (1R3S)-3-bromocyelopentanol Db. (25.35}-2-bromo-3-chloropentane 4. (2R.3R)-2.3-diehoropentane ‘The carbon of the COO group is C-1. The first structure is 28.35. Therefore, naturally occurring threonine, with a configuration of 25.32. is the mirror image of the first structure, Thus. the second structure is reoni naturally occurr a, Solved in the text b. cH: | HO, a Nee ee WB | Clige crn cn a. Solved inthe text boc on cl oot cM SSX ON WO cn.cn on Start by naming the first stercosiomer, Finding that A iy 2R.32 allows you to answer both questions a Ais erythrose, 1b. p-Threose hay the opposite configuration at C-2 and the same oO 20 configuration at C-3, Therefore, C is p-threose, “c u—*-on u—Lon CHLOH Solved in the text We sce that the (28)-alkyl halide reacty with HO” to form the (R)-alcohol, We are told that the product (the (R)-alcohol is {~). We ean, therefore, conclude that the (+ }-tleohol has the § configuration. (+)-Limonene has the R configuration, soit isthe stereoisomer found in oranges. 53. 4. Chapter4 151 Compound A has (wo stereoisomers, because it hay an asymmetric center (at N), Compound B does not have stereoisomers, because it does not have an asymmetric center Compound C has an asymmetric center at N but, because of the lone pair, the two enantiomers rapidly interconvert, so it exists as a single compound. chy oy CHCH=CHCH:CHy— CHy=CHCHSCH;CH, — CH\C=CHCHy CH,CHCH= CH, 2 sterenisomers no stereoivomers no stereoisomers ho stereoisomers sand tans} ve aa a 1 A LN CHCHC=CH, cll, cHechy HC Sons no stereodsomens osteresisomers ao sereosomens 3 serensomers [Cis is. a meso compound. | cus [rans iva pte of enantio no stereoisomers no seroisomers r laa 2 » \ <) \ { / \ om S Xv my Gt ea Gs vs 7 cH, cus c © 4 + Br we H Choy + weFS or . _ crcnch, WN * 17 Scuncact, Pee eeechs Hc 1 CHACHCH, CHCHCH, on cn | { cng cin, s k s k : lan * <> q 4% 4 é Gace cy eae cl au meso compound da. CHy CHy CH wert utn on n—ton w—few Hao on wtea cy cn ci cn r\ Br Sect Br a <0 tC) cis and trans, aX CHy aX chy YC CH, Copytight © 2014 Pearson Elacation. Ine 182 Chapter 4 chy on, mo le \ a JNA c= omc ‘ar a - A W uc OH : sean h crycaecHcts No isomers are possible for this compound, because it does not have an by asymmetric center i, i | cr Br Br = cr “Br BY ch br bs ci cis and trans only (no asymmetric centers) 55. Only the fourth one (CHFBrC1) has an atom with four different atoms attached to a carbon, so itis the ‘only one that has an asymmetric center. 36. a 2 chloro-2-pentanol .2.5-pentanetriol 58, a, diastereomers (one asymmetric center has the same configuration in both compounds and the other has the opposite configuration in both compounds) enantiomers (they are mirror images) constitutional isomers, diastereomers (the configuration of two asymmetric centers is the same and the con asymmetric center is different) diastereomers identical es = ration of one CCopysght ©2014 Pearson Eaton 39. 61. 62. 63. Chaper4 1 diastereomers (cis-trans isomers are diastereomers because they sre stereoisomers that are not enantiomers) 1h, identical (if you flip one over. you can see that they are superimposable) Only the compound on the far right is optically active, because it is the only one that has one or more asymmetric centers, a. Because there are two ayymmetric centers, there are four possible stereoisomers. b Q 4 © Noe NHCHS \ re Ho 1) Caw ry s (2RAS.68)-4-chloro-6-methyl-2-octanol b. (R)-3-bromo Compounds a. de. fh. i and j have a stereoisomer that is achiral Compounds a. d, fi and j have two asymmetric centers bonded (o identical substituents, Thus, there are three stereoisomers, one of which is an achiral meso compound. Compounds € and h do not have any asymmetric centers: they have eis and trans stereosiomers. so each is achiral and, therefore, each has an achiral stewoisomer Compounds b and g each have two asymmetric centers bonded to different substituents. Thus, there are four stereoisomers, all of which are chiral Compound e does not have any asymmetric centers: itis, therefore, achiral but it does not have any stereoivomers a, One asymmetric center bas the same configuration in both compounds and the other asymmetric center has the opposite configuration in both, so the compounds are diastereomers. 1b, Both asymmetric centers in one compound have the opposite configuration in the other, so the com- pounds are enantiomers. €. They are identical because if one is flipped over, it will superimpose on the other 4d. They are constitutional isomers because the atoms are hooked up differently: one compound is |-chloro-2-methyleyclopentane and the other is [-chloro-3-methyleyelopentane. W 2CH,COOH Ho™ VCOOK " cu.coon (Seite acid b, The reaction is catalyzed by an enzyme. Only one stereoisomer is typically formed in an enzyme-citalyzed reaction because an enzyme has a chiral binding site that allows reagents to be delivered to only one side oF the functional group of the reactant ‘c. The product of the reaction will be achiral because if it does not have a '4C label, the two CH;COOH soups will be identical. so it will not have an asymmetric center Copyeih © 2008 Pearson Esko, In 66. 67. 68. 0. 70. Chapter 4 a, identical e. constitutional isomers b, identical f diastereomers enantiomers constitutional isomers d._ constitutional isomers h, enantiomers sia *87 optical purity 0.16 = 16% excess R enantiomer 100% ~ 16% = 84% is uracen Renantiomer = 1/2 (84%) + 16% mixture 42% + 16% = 58% R bs eA A ON te od a bck “we s CHyCHs HCHs ® 5 Fisher projections show the molecule with eclipsed bonds. Therefore, to anywer parts € and f. first rotate the Newman projection so itis eclipsed. Then turn the Newman projection Butackamol has four asymmetric centers: three of them are carbons and one is a nitrogen. 2) on (Fearn inal L - KHL ~ ‘The only way that R and S are related to (+) and (—) is that if one configuration (s cone is (—) Ry is (+) the other Because some compounds with the & configuration are (+) and some are (—). there iy no way to determine ‘whether a particular & enantiomer is (+) or (—) witrout putting the compound in a polarimeter or finding ‘out whether someone else has previously determined how the compound rotates the plane of polarization of plane-polarized light. Copyright 8 2014 Pearson Eaton. n. 2. Chaprer4d 155 First convert the staggered Newman projection to an eclipsed Newman projection, which ean then be converted (0 a Pischer projection since thal too is eclipsed (see page 188 of the text). Then name the Fischer projection a, Since one is R and the other is S. they are enantiomers ae on u-®—ony Ln H Hy CHCH, 1 on HyC CH; "Ne CH, AS ” i in bb, Since one is R.R and the other is $,S, they are enantiomers: Hy eon CHy hy ‘ n—®—crscny OAK Buy bran WO CCH, dhicns a Br a cuscHy cic, CHCHy " oy ccHy a ~ Be Ste Woon a Gi, be H a a The compound has four stereoisomers. cH.on con cron cuy0n H on H—}-oH fon HO —H n—-on Mo algo oat n—} on H—f-on Ho—j—H H—}—on Cixon cron cron CHL0H 1b. The first nwo stereoisomers are optically inaetive because they are meso compounds. (They each have plane of symmetry.) a. ‘CH.CH2Br Bb. BCHy, OH ce. HAC CH CHy necnert pec er" mm 7 N V"H ) 'Scu=o nO) (be {_ CH2CH2CH) o ) aK n ak k s Copyright © 200 Penn Fastin, Ine 156 Chapter 4 74. acand b. cH, chy jeinen [ eases cthyleyelobutane 1 1-dimathyleyctobutane nc Yen, uch vcr ne Nc, civ 2alimethyleyeluutane tas. 2atimethsleyeloburane ells cy iz | 7A y Hy nyc cis Aalimethyleyelobutane ———tray-1.3-timethyleyelobutane Le ethyteyclobutane 1 L-aimethyleyelobutane 1.2-dimethyleyelobutane | 3-dimethyicyelobutane 2. the three isomers of 1.2-dimethyleyclobutane the two isomers of | 3-dimeihyleyelobucane cis- and rrany-1.2-dimethyleyelobutane cis- and trany-1 3dimethyl sclobutane 4. the bvo trans stereoisomers of 1.2-dimethyleyclobutane all the isomers except the two trans stereoisomers of 1.2-dimethyleyelobutane 6. cis-1.2-dimethyleyetobutane (Note: civ-1.3-dimethyley asymmetrie centers.) obutane is no meso compound because it does not have any 7. the two trany stereoisomers al clobutane 2-aimethyley 8. civ-1.3-dimethyleyclobutane and trans-1.3-dimethyle cis-|.2aimethyleyclobutane and clobutane her of the enantiomers of srany-L.2-dimethyleyelobutane Coppi ©2014 Pour Fl 75. 16. 7. 78. Chapter4 157 observed specific rotation = —PPSF¥Ed Tokton concentration x length 6.52" —_057" ___agy 0.187 g/100 ml. x Tdm observed specific rotation seve specie Tone __5 409) Specific rotation of the pure enantiomer ‘% optical purity eof the (+)-isomer= % of the (~)-isomer =} astercomers (the configur both identical (by rotating one compound. you can see that €. constitutional isomers 4. diastereomers. (the configuration of all the stereoisomers is not the same in both and not opposite in both) aoe br _ or H a ‘ ‘ jon of all the symmetric centers is not the same in both and not opposite is superimposable on the other) Br “Br Br Br CHACH.CHy cHy e CHCHy CHLCH, clin He chy Ha HS 4 Cl CHACHy H chy H © oY / ~f Cis cH In the wansition state for amine inversion, the nitrogen atom is sp" hybridized, which means it has bond angles of 120°, A nitrogen atom in a three-membered ring cannot achieve a 120° bond angle. so the amine inversion that would interconvert the enantiomers cannot occur. Therefore, the enantiomers separated, “The fact that the optical purity is 72% means that there is 72% enantiomeric excess of the S isomer and 28% racemic mixture. Therefore. the actual amount of the $ isomer in the sample is 72% + 1/2(28%) = 86%. ‘The amount of the R isomer in the sample is 1/2(28%) = 14% (or 100% ~ 86% = 14%), A= adiastereomer C= adiastereomer adiastereomer B= adiastereomer = adiastereomer Copycat © 204 Pear Fakcation, fe 158 Chapters soa a cl cf a I f ot Yonel ac cel cr a boca ca ca oa / Coa cl a ca ( aoa aL, I f i aoa This is & pair of enantiomers cr cy because they are nonsuperimposable aa cl LZ oo) PN L mS Oy areas This is the most stable isomer becwuse. since the chloro substituents are all trans to each other. they can all be in the more stable equatorial position, (Recall that there is less sterie strain when a sub- stituent is in the equatorial position.) 83, Yes. as long as the Fischer projection is drawn with the #1 carbon at the top of the chain of earbons.. Re mA ou ‘CH, of oH « ke SS Br Copyright 2014 Posen Education. I Chapter4 159 85. The trans compound exits as a pair of enantiemers, "CICHy)s ich As a result of ring-flip. each enantiomer has two chair is the one with the larger wroup (the sert-butyl group) conformers. In each the equatorial position .e. the more stable conformer 8 HW cy ae chy LET H es CHy _ React, (cine W CecHns (Hyco in noe stable snore stable 86. a. The compounds do not have any asymmetric b. 1. his not chiral 2, Its chiral, Because of its unusual geometry its chiral molecule, even though it does not have any asymmetric centers, because it cannot be superimposed on its mirror image. This will be easier to understand if you build models. ners H o images av sperimposthle 4 a 4 Nc c c ? Hac Neu, HC ot superimposable 87. The compound is not optically active because it has a point of symmetry. A point of symmetry is « point, and if a line is drawn to this point from an atom or group and then extended ‘an equial distance beyond the point, the line would touch an identical atom or grouy point of symmetry ‘cr Copprght © 2014 Pearson Bacon, Ie 160 Chapter + Chapter 4 Practice Tes 1, Ate the following pairs of compounds identieal or a pair of enantiomess? cH: cH CH CH} —CH.OH and Woy be am ew. | We WH oF Scucny Hh cHLOH o W 2 100 mL. of a solution containing 0.80 g of a compound rotates the plane of polarized light —4.8° in a polarimeter with a 2-dm sample tube, What is the specific rotation of the compound? 3. Which are meso compounds? cn, cH, cHy cH, cH, Hcl oH cl Br aon a aH HW cao Ho Br a) co we HCH, HCH cul Hy cHy 4. Draw all the constitutional isomers with molecular formula CHCl Draw all the possible stereoisomers for each of the following compounds that has them, a a d. CHCH,CHCHCH,CI Hom on bh b. CHLCHCHCHCH, © br c. CHACHYCHCH CH, £ Wo )—cH, a 6. Which of the following three perspective formulas arz the same as the Fischer projection shown here? coon ho——H Hon on Ho, tH H Ho, Lon H Con HO: . H 7 pH HooC ‘cH, Hood ci HOOK ony Coppi 2014 Pear Chapters 161 7. (R)-(=)-2-methyl-I-butanol can be oxidized to ( +-)-2-methylbutanoie acid without breaking any of the bonds to the asymmetric center, What is the configuration of (~)-2-methylbutanoie acid? HOH cooH “ “ our Nfl oH “hon (8 ))-2-methyl- -butanol }-2-methylbutanoie acid 8 (~)-Cholesterol has a specific rotation of ~32, What would be the observed specific rotation of a solution that contains 25% (+)-cholesterol and 75% (—)-cholesteral”” 9, Which of the following have the R configuration? 4 ony cHCHBr ow br on br Hl cinbe cH on CHCHICH: uc cy nor ey ca Vn Scmcn, CHO" cHc, Ch cH city bro " u 10, Answer the following: Are the following compounds identical or a pair of enantiomers? H concn} eon CHy cH HOH CHXCHs Put the remaining groups on the structure so it represents (R)-2-butanol. 2 Put the remaining groups on the Fischer projection so it represents the Newman projection shown, chy cHy HO H { u “cl CHSCHy CHICH, Copyright ©2014 Peuson Eduction, te 162 AL Chapter 4 , Draw a diastereomer for each of the Following: CHy H OH Hy Indicate whether each of the following statements is true or false: fa, Diastereomers have the same melting points. b. 3-Chloro-2.3-dimethylpentane has two ayymmetric centers. T ¢. Meso compounds do not rotate the plane of polarization of plane-polarized light 7 d, 2.3-Dichloropentane has a stereoisomer that is a meso compound, 7 €. All chiral compounds with the R configuration are dextrorotatory, T centers can have a maximum fA compound with three asymmet of nine stereoisomers 7 Which of the following have cis-trans isomers? 2-bromo-3-hexene 2-methyl-2-hexene Lepentene s-methy Copyright ©2014 Pearson Edution CHAPTERS Alkenes: Structure, Nomenclature, and an Introduction to Reaeti Important Terms active site acyclic alkene allyl group allylic carbon allylic hydrogen Arrhenius quati talyst degree of unsatui clectrophile electrophilic additi reaction ndergonic ndothermie reaction enthalpy + Thermodynamics and Kinetics I the bond-maki catalyzed reaction occur, the pocket of an enzyme whei and bond-breaking steps of un reaction in which atoms or groups are added to the rea hydrocarbon that contains a double bond. CH)= CHCH)— an sp" carbon adjaceat to a vinyl carbon a hydrogen bonded to an allylic carbon. an equation that relates the rate constant of reaction tothe energy of activation and to the temperature at which the reaction i caried out (& = Ae #1”) ‘species that increases the rate at which a reaction occurs without being consumed in the reaction. the isomer with the Fydrogens on the same side of the double bond. the sum of the number of a bonds and rings in a hydrocarbon, the isomer with the high-priority groups on opposite sides of the double bond, an electron-del ‘ent atom or molecule. aan addition reaction in which the first species that adds to the reactant isan electrophile. a reaction with a positive AG": it consumes more energy than it releases reaction with a positive AH" the heat given off (if AA’ < 0) or the heat absorbed (if AAP > 0) during the course of a reaction. a measure of the freedom of motion in a system, 4 protein that is a biological catalyst avreaction with a negative AG*; it releases more energy than it consumes. 163 Copyright © 214 Pearson Edun, lot Chapters exothermic react experimental et activation (E, = MH + RT) first-order rate € ergy of tant first-order reaction (unimolecular react free energy of a (AG) functional group geometric isomers (cis-trans stereoisomers) Gibbs free energy change (AG°) intermediate Kinetics Kinetic stability Le Chatetier's principle mechanism of the reaction molecular recognition nucleophile pheromone rate constant rate-determining step rate-limiting step sureaction with a negative MIP. measure of the approximate energy bartier to a reaction. (cis approximate because it does not contain an entropy eomponent.) the rate constant ofa firstorder reaction reaction whose rate is dependent on the concer ration of one reactant the true energy barrier to a reaction the center of reac ity of a moleet trany (or E.Z) isomers. the difference between the free energy content of the products and the free energ content of the reactants at equilibrium under standard conditions (1M. 25 °C. 1 atm). species formed during 4 rexetion that is not the final product of the reaction, the field of chemistry that deals with the ratey of chemical reactions Kinetic stability is indicated by AG?. If AG is large. the compound is kinetically stable tis not very reactive), [F AG? iy small, the compound is kinetically unstable (is very reactive), «principle states that if un equilibrium is disturbed. the components of the equilib- rium will adjust in a way that will offyet the disturbanee. aa description of the step-by-step process by which reaetanty are changed into products, the ability of one molecule to recognize another as «result of intermolecular interactions, aan electron-tich atom oF molecule. ‘a chemical Substance used for the purpose of communication, the proportionality constant in the rate equation that quantifies the rate of a reaction, the step in a reaetion that has the transition state with the highest energy, ‘Copy © 24 Peston Fst. reaction coordinate diagram saturated hydrocarbon second-order rate constant second-order reaction solvati substrate thermodynamic stability thermodynamics trans isomer unsaturated hydrocarbon vinyl group vinylic carbon vinylic hydrogen Zisomer ChapterS 165 1 diagram that describes the energy changes that take place during the course of a reaction, a hydrocarbon that is completely saturated with hydrogen (contains no double or Lriple bonds), the rate constant of a second-order reaction a reaction whose r: the square of the concentration of a single reactant is dependent on the concentration of wo reactants. or on the interaction between a solvent and another molecule (or ion), the reactant of an enzyme-catalyzed reaction, thermodynamic stability is indicated by AG. If AG? is negative, the products are more stable than the reactants. If AG? is positive, the reactants are more stable than the products. the field of chemistry that describes the properties of a system at equilibrium. the isomer with the hydrogens on opposite sides of the double bond. the energy maximum in a reaction step on a reaction coordinate diagram. In the transition state, bonds in the reactant that will break are partially broken and bonds in the product that will form are partially formed, au hydrocarbon that contains one or more double or triple bonds, CH=CH carbon that is doubly bonded (0 another carbon. avhydrogen bonded fo a vinylie carbon, the isomer with the high-priority groups on the same side of the double bond. 10, Chapter 5 Problems a Clb Ce Clg as ba etl @3s eB a, degree of unsaturation = 1b, degree of unsaturation = 2. degree of unsaturation = cHCH= cH HOSCCH.CH, cH A CH= CHCH=CH; CHy=C=CHCH, A hydrocarbon with no rings and no double bonds would have molecular Formula ot CyyHy3- CayHsy hats 26 fewer hydrogens. Therefore, B-carotene hay a total of 13 rings and double bonds. Since we know that it has two rings, it has 11 double bonds, a. Ithas two vinylic hydrogens. b. Ithas four allylic hydrogens. c CHy CH,OCH=CHy CHy cH I b. CHC =CCH.CH.CH.Br dd. CH) =CHCHOH | Cis a. 4-methyl-2-pentene b, 2-chloro-3.4-dimethyl-3-herene ¢. [-bromocyclopentene d.[-bromo-4-methyl-3-hexene fimethylcyclohexene F-outoxy-I-propene 1-promo-2-methyl-1.3-pentadiene 8.8-dimethy!- FERS ‘nonene as bo 4 a6 a. -1 > —Br > -OH > -CHy b. -OH > -CH.CI > -CH Hy) > —CH.CH.OH ‘The high-priority groups are on same side of the double bond, so ta thas the Z configuration, Copysight ©2014 Pearson dueton ne Chapters 167 un. z cHy | cH.cl Hy CHCH, a ee \ a ‘CHCH, cH: CHC ‘ I cuy z cH a N ecHiys Roa NA © Ake i eK - OOH a Copyright 02014 Pearson Eduction, ke 168 Chapter 5 13. a. (£)-Xheptene —b. (Z)-3.d-dimethyl2-pentene—@.(Z}-1-chloro-3. 14. oy CHCH, “CHACHCHSCH, \ cHy A-hexadione — (Z)-2-methyl-2.4-hesai b. \ fo" CH.CHy H H 2.4-heptadiene (QE4Z)2.4-heptadiene H \ H HAC / CHACHy H u HZABL2A-heptadiene (22.42)-24-hepradione nH CHy ()-13-pentadione and € have only two stereoisomers beeause. in each case, there are Ovo ide ‘one of the sp? carbons, so only one of the double bonds can have either the £'or the 7 configuration, al substituents bonded to 16, a. AICI; isthe electrophile and NH; is the nucleophile b. The H™ of HBr is the electrophile and HO” is the nucleophile 17. nucleophiles: Hee | CH Og cH, electrophiles: CH CHCH CCopgrght © 2044 Pessoa Fluent Chapter S169 I cue + i cH. Drawing the arrows incorrectly leads to a bromine with an incomplete octet and a positive charge as well ay an oxygen with 10 valence electrons and 2~ charge, CH, CH Drawing the arrows incorrectly leads to an oxygen with an incomplete octet and a 2+ charge. 2. This one cannot be drawn because the arrow is supposed to show where the electrons move to, but there are no electrons on the H to go anywhere. ‘The product cannot be drawn because the destination of the electrons in the breaking bond is not clear 4. This one cannot be drawn because the arrow is supposed to show where the electrons move to, but there are no electrons on the C to go anywhere. ae : ic] + Ho ae + HO a CH on 1 cH SoH ° H nucleophile eleetrophile Br b. we on nucleophile eleetrophite + HO electrophile nucleophile Copyrigin 2 2014 Pearson Ldn, fe 170 20. Chapter 5 ‘The labels are under the structures in Problem 19, ise the equilibrium constants for all the monosubstituted eyelohesanes in Table 3.9 on page 131 reater than 1. all of the equilibria have negative AG* values a Bee of the text (Recall that AG? = —RT In Kay) b.rert-butyleyclohenane ert-butyleyclohexane, because it is the largest substituent RT W Koy Is = 1,986 10 keal/mol KX 298 KX In ES (recall that = °C + 273) 0,59. Tn 18 eal / mol = =0.59 2.89 keal /mol AG = =1.7keal/mol a. Solved in the text b. RT In Key L986 10° X 298 % In Ky 356 k= 38 K Lisopropyleyclohexane |,, a5. ‘~~ Tisopropyleyetohexane |.) 1 6 of equatorial isoproayleyelohewane} gars of equi __[nomeovteseloherinelowsiel _. gy isopropyleyelohexane ~ [isopropyleyelohesane) gua + [isopropyleyeloenane x 10K) S41 = 100 36. ate = 97% c. Ibopropyleyclohexane has a greater pereentage ofthe conformer with the substituent in the equatorial position because the isopropyl substituent is larger than the fluoro substituent, The larger the sub- Situent, the less stable is the conformer in which the substituent is in the axial position because of the 1.3-diasial interactions, iticant in reactions in which the number of reactant molecules and the number of product molecules are not the same, LA+B==C 2 A+B C AS is more si b, None of the four reactions has a positive AS In order to have a positive AS°. the products must have greater freedom of motion than the reactants (In other words. there should be more molecules of products than molecules of reactant.) CCopsright © 2014 Peano falstion tne 25, 26. 27. ChapterS 171 ad AG = AW - TAs AG? = -RTINKy (recall that 7 = °C + 273) AG? = —(1.986 * 10-1)(303) In Ky, AG? = =12 = (273 + 30)(.01) 15 = —0.60 In Ky AG? = =12 = 3 = -15 B) has the greatest free energy of activation, ‘The first-formed intermediate (B) is more apt to revert to reactants, because the free energy of activation for B to form A (the reactants! is less than the free energy of activation for B to form C. c. The second step (B+ C) is the rate-determining step because it has the transition state with the highest energy. Notice that the second step is rate-determining even though the first step has the greater energy of ueti vation (steeper hill to climb), That is because it is easier for the intermediate that is formed in the first step to go back to starting material than to undergo the second step of the reaction, So the second step is the rate-limiting step. 2 B zl . € Progress ofthe reaction a. one (B) b. wo ¢. the second step (42). B to form C (In this particular diagram, ky > Ay: if you had made the transition sate for the second step a lot higher, you could have had a diagram in which k, > ky.) d._ the second step in the reverse direction (A) £ BIC €. the second step in the reverse direction (K.,). Bto form Ag. CtoB A catalyst will change the energy difference between the reactants and the transition state, but it will not change the energy difference between the reactants and the products, AHP, By AS' AGIA Copyeit © 2014 Peso Esacation, Ie 174 Chapter 5 36. a, 3.8dibromo-t-nonene b. (Z)bethyl-3.7-dimethyl-3-octene ¢. 1.5-dimethyleyelopentene cue CHACH;CHy cH I CHCHCHLCHy oa cnt y mcs Br bo CHICHCHLCH, “¢ a ve cH “ “aici wf “cHcH.cHs Boa b. ad. 3.ethyl-2-methyl-2-heptene fe. dbmethyleyelohexene f. ethyl-5-methyleycloherene cH CHCCH, cH @ CHy oN / ‘ CHCH,NHCH {CH=CH Copyright 2014 Pearwnteaton Ine 40. ae CH= CHCHCH,CHSCHy CHSCH.CH, chy 2emethyl-t-pentene CHE = CHCH:CHS Hy 2 methyl-2-pentene cHy =CCHCH; CHyCH=CHCH.CH.CH, Chy=cHEHCH CH, chy cHRCCE=CHy | chy 3.3-dimehyl-I-butene cH CHC CCH, ch 2.3dimeihy!-2-butene Chapters 175 CH.CH:CH=CHCH.CH; Sehexene CHCH:CHCH, | cy 4-methyl-I-pentene Cincl=cHeHCH CHy 4-methyl-2-pentene cucu CHACHy 2ethy!-L-butene b. Of the compounds shown in part a, the following can have E and Z isomers: 41. a. ()-3-methyl-3-hexene b._ sran-S-methyl--nonene or (E)-8-methyl wonene or (E)-9-brome 2. con B. wethyl-2-pentene, a. fe. 2ethyl-I-penten f t0) 2014 Pear Elion Be methyl-2-pentene limethyl-I-pentene ccis-2-pentene or (Z)-2-pentene + HO + Br 176 Er 46. 48. 4. Chapter 5 AG = =RT In Key Inky = -AG/RT InK,, = ~AG°/0.59 keal /mol a Inky 72/059 kcal/mol fe. InKy = 2.72/0.59 keal/mol Inky, = -46 Ink, = 46 Kg = [B]/[A] = 001 Ky, = [B]/{A] = 100 be Ink, = -0.65/0.59 keal/mol In Ky, = 0.65 /0.59 keal mot In ky = = 1.10 Inky = 1.10 Ky = [B]/[A] = 033 Ky, = [B]/[A] = 30 a The C—Cl bond isa stronger bond because Cl uses a 33p" orbital to overlap the 2yp" orbital of carbon, whereas Br uses a 4sp" orbital, A 4yp" has a greater volume than a 3° and therefore has less electron density in the region of orbital-orbital overlap, so it forms a weaker bond, b. The Br— Br bond is a stronger bond because Br uses a 4sp" orbital to overlap the 4yp* orbital of the other bromine, whereas [uses a 5sy* orbital. A Sap" has a greater volume than a 4yp" and therefore has less electron density in the region of orbital-orbital overlap. so it forms a weaker bond, ees RE we a Z ek Le If the number of earbons is 30, C,Hy).2 = CuoFls. A compound with molecular formuls CyHsy is missing 12 hydrogens. Because it has no rings. squstlene has € 7 bonds (12/2 = 6). a —CH Hy > —CHICHs): >) CHCHSCHy >) —CHy b —OH > «© —cl > a / H chy A-hexauliene H \ W / H chy (Ep 1.S-heptadione Copyright 22014 Pearson duction, 51 ChapterS 177 H © / a \ wo cH Hl c= iN HoH It-pemadiene ° oH, Cy a CHCH NH, + Be be cHy-E=CH, es CHACH—CoH, + C1 on Only one name is correct f 2chloro-3-hexene g 3.methyl-2-pentene hh, 2-methyl-I-hexene (it does not have £22 isomers) i, [-methyleyclopentene @ CI, CH, VY LSHSCHCHy 4 Z CHC wf Yemscnen, b. BDF ¢. EtG (the fastest step hay the smiallest energy of activation to overcome) aG eA Ge endergonic h. exergonic ic J. E10 G the largest rate constant corresponds to the lowest energy of activation) k. Go E (the smallest rate constant corresponds to the highest energy of activation) Congr ©2014 Pern tdocation, hs 18 Chapter 5 cor AS° value because, unlike A. the number of reactants is nol the same as the numi- a, B will have the | ber of products b, AS” = (the freedom of motion of the products) ~ (the freedom of motion of the reactants) Because the three products have a greater freedom of motion than the two reactants. AS will be positive, AG = AH’ ~ TAs a. AG? = 20 ~ (298)(0.05) AG = 0-149 = 51 AG = -RT'InK., 5.1 = —1.986 110 4% 298 % In Ky 5.1 = 059 In Ky, “86 = INK, Kya 18x 107 b. AG? = 20 ~ (398)(0.05) AG = 2 - w=0 Ky = 10 b: WL6oH 26H HG ‘OH oH i ay | oo CoRR ROCOR Rae i \ jou HG a. AG = RINK, AG? = -RPIn 10 AG? = —1.986 10 x 298 «2.3 AG? = =1.36heal/ mol b. AG =n -0 136 = Mr 0 AHF = 1.36 heal mol ce AG =0- TAs" 136 = 0 — 2088 AS = 1.36/208 = 4.56 5 10" keal/(mol deg AG? = -RTInk,, Inky = ~AG/RT Inky = —AG"/0.39 keal mol 3.0.59 keal mol -90 B]/_A” = 0.00013 BLA 0.00013 /1 = 0.13/ 1000 Copgrght © 2014 Peano Flatt 59, Chapter 179 ‘The calculation shows that for every 1000 molecules in the chair conformation there is 0.13 molecule in a bwist-boat conformation, This agrees with the statement on page 130 of the text that for every 10,000 chair conformers of cyclohexane. there is no more than one twist-boat conformer A step-by-step description of how 10 solve this problem is given in the box entitled “Calculating Kinetie Parameters” on page 153 of the text E, can be determined from the Arrhenius equation (Ink = ~E,/RT). because a plot of In k versus 1/7 gives a slope = —E,/R. In2.11 x 108 = =10.77 1/7 = 3.29 x 10% Inds x 10-5 = ~10.02 1/7 = 3.19 x 10° In 1.16 «1071 = ~9.06 1/7 = 3.08 x 10% 1/T = 3.00 x 10 1/T = 2.92 x Ww In2.10 x 104 = -8.47 In4.¥4 x 104 = 7.74 slope = ~8290 E, = ~(slope) R E, = ~(-8290) * 1.98 x 10" keal/mol 1, = 164 keal/mol ‘To find AG*: AG? = RT In kh/ Th, From the graph used to determine £,.one (tis 1.84 x 10S sh) Senter ee ee eee eee ee dec net TAG = 1.98 x 107 % 303 In (2.90 x 10) /(1.00 x 10- =AG = 1.98 x 107? x 303 n2.90 x 10” AG = 1,98 x 10 x 303 x (~3.50) AG = 2.10 keal/mol Tofind AH*: AW’ = By = RT AHP = 164 ~ 1.98 x 107 x 303 AW = 16.4 - 06 AM? = 15.8 keal/mol (air ~ AG) AS? = (15.8 — 2.10)/303 AS? = (=13.7)/308 AS® = 0.045 keal /(mol deg) = 45 eal /(mol deg) Copyright © 2014 Pearson Facto 180 1. Chapter 5 ‘Name each of the following compounds: CH,CH:CHCH,CH= CH; CHACHCH=CHCH,CH.CHCH: I cH CHLCH, Label the following substituents in order from highest priorit omenclaure, to lowest priority in the E.Z system of i da, -cn=cn, —c1 Correct the incorrect names, a. kpentene b. 2 thyl-2-butene ny lpentane 4d. 2-methyleyelohexene Indicate whether each of the following statements is true oF false a. Increusi the energy of activation increases the rate oF the reaction, TOF b, Decreasing the entropy of the produets compared to the entropy of the reaetants makes the equilibrium constant more fevorable TOF €. An exergonie reaction is one with a ~ AG", TOF 4d. Analkene is an electrophile TOF The higher the energy of activation, the more slowly the reaction will take place. TOr f Another name for rrany-2-butene is (Z)-2-bu TOF fA reaction with a negative AG” has an equilibrium constant greater than one, TOF he Increasing the I of the reactants increases the rate ofthe rewetion. TOF i. Increasing the I x of the products increases the rate of the reaction. TOF ‘The magnitude of a rate constant is not dependent on the concentration of the reactants, TF Gopgright 2014 Pearson bdveain. ae 1 10, ML. Chaper$ 181 Do the following compounds have the oF the Z configuration? cl 1 a CHSCH;CH.Br b. CHACH f \ \ cH fo fi, cHch CHLOH CHCH 'CH.OH chy cH Draw structures for each of the following: a. allylalcohol —b, 3+methyleyelohexene —€ cis-3-heptene — d, _viny! bromide What is the total number of 77 bonds and rings in a hydrocarbon with a molecular formula of CyHs? Using curved arrows, show the movement of electrons in the following reaction mechanism: f= CHCH— CH, \ ch CHCH=CH, + HCl CH CH=CH, + A favorable (negative) AG? is given by: (a positive or negative AI), (a positive or negative AS”), and (a high or low temperature), Which of the following has « more favorable equilibrium constant (that is, which reaction favors products morey? a. A reaction with a AHP of 4 keal/mol or a reaction with a AAP of 7 keal/mol? (Assume a constant AS° value.) b. A reaction with « poxitive AS° value that takes place at 25 °C or the same reaction that takes place at 35°C? € A reaction in which two reactants form one product or a reaction in which one reactant forms two products? (Assume constant AMP value.) Draw and label the # and Z stereoisomers of, a L-bromo-2,3-dimethyl-2-pentene b, 2,34-trimethy-3-hexene Draw a reaction coordinate diagram for a one-step reaction with a product that is thermodynamically tunstable but kinetically stable Copytighh © 204 Pearson Leto, te acid-catalyzed reaction aldehyde anti addition biochemis catalytic hydrogenation concerted rea constitutional isomers dimer electrophilic addition reaction enzyme epoxide (oxirane) halohydrin Hammond postulate heat of hydrogenation ry of Addition Reactions «reaction catalyzed by an acid. ‘a compound with a earbony! group that is bonded to an alky gen (or bonded t0 two hydrogens}. oup and to a hydro- oO oO i ey o ROH HOH an addition reaction in which the Qvo added substituents add to opposite sides of the molecule. the chemistry associated with li the rearrangement of a carboration to a more stable carbocation, a species that increases the rate at which a reaction occurs without being con sumed in the reuetion, Because if does not change the equilibrium constant of the reaction, it does not change the amount of product that is formed, the addition of hyd catalyst nto a double or a triple bond with the aid of a metal a reaction in which all the bond-making and bond-breakin processes tike place in asingle step. molecules that have the same molecular formula but differ in the way the atoms are connected. a molecule formed by joining together wo identical molecules. jes that adds tw the reactant is an aan addition reaction in which the first spe electrophite, «a protein that catalyzes a biological reaction, aan ether in whieh the oxygen is incorporated into a three-membered ring, aan organie molecule that contains a halogen atom and an OH group. states that the transition state will be more similar in structure to the species (reae= ants or products) that itis closer to energetically. the heat (AMP) released in a hydrogenation reaction 182 Copssight © 2014 Peason Fleation In heterogeneous catalyst hydration 1,2-hydride shift hydroboration-oxidation hydrogenation hyperconjugation ketone Markoynikoy’s rule mechanism of the reaction 1.2-methy! shift oxidation reaction oxidative cleavage ozonolysis receptor reduction reaction Chapter6 183 catalyst that is insoluble in the reaetion mixture, addition of water to: compound the movement of a hydride ion (a hydrogen with its pair of bondi from one carbon to an adjacent carbon. electrons) the addition of borane (or RsBH) to & double or triple bond followed by reaction with hydrogen peroxide and hydroxide io addition of hydrogen. delocalization of electrons by overlap of earbon-hydrogen or bonds with an empty orbital on an adjacent carbon, rbon-carbon ‘a compound with a carbonyl group that is bonded to two alkyl groups ° I c Rw SR the actual rule is, "when a hydrogen halide adds to un ayymmettical alkene, the ad- dition occurs such that the halogen attaches itself to the carbon atom of the alkene bearing the least number of hydrogen atoms.” Chemists use the rule as Follows: the hydrogen adds to the 3° carbon that is bonded to the most hydrogens, ‘A more general rule is, the electrophile adds to the sp" carbon that is bonded to the imost hydrogens. a description of the step-by-step prov products, ss by which reaetants are changed into, the movement of a methyl group with its bonding electrons from one carbon to an adjacent carbon, iction that decreases the number of C—H bonds in the reactant or increases the number of C0, CN, or C—X bonds (X denotes a halogen), aan oxidation re tion that cleaves the reactant into two or more compounds, jon of an alkene with o7one, jon with the positive charge om a primary carbon, CHsCH)CHCH; > CHCHsCH;CH» B.A halogen atom decreases the stability of the carbocation because, since it is un electronegative atom, it withdraws electrons away from the positively charged carbon, This increases the concentration of positive charge on the carbocation which makes it less stable. CHACHCH: I 3 CHCHEE, CHLCHCHCH, (oe cy a F Because fluorine is more electronegative than chlorine and therefore withdraws electrons more strongly, the Tuorine-substituted carbocation is less stable than the chlorine-substituted carbocation, sition state will resemble the one (resctants oF products) that iC is closer 10 01 ram: that is, the one that it iy closer tin energy. jon coordi- products b, reactants ereactans— d. products be cryciyech da. f. CHCHCHCH, Ff i Copyeit © 2014 Peano duction. le: 186 i. Chapter 6 © CH en L \ \ a «> cuca or (crc This would not be a good choice, because it would lead to a mixture of two products. is In both a and b, the compound that is more highly regioselective is the one where cnrent the choive is between forming a tertiary carbocation and a primary carbocation, bch: In both a and b. the less regioselective compound isthe one where the choice is ak beeen forming a tertiary earbocaton and a secondary carbocation, because the . Aiference in the salty of the two possible carbocations, and therefore the di CO ference in the amount of product formed. isnot as great as iis when the cho is between a tertiary and a primary carbocation, As long as the pH is greater than about ~2.5 and less than about 15. more than 50% of 2-propanol would be in its neutral, nonprotonated form. ROH ROW Recall that when the pH =p, half the compound isin its acide form and half isin its busie form. There- fore at a pH less than about ~2.5, more than half of -he compound will be in ity positively charged proton- ated form. Ata pH greater than about ~15, more than half of the compound will exist as the negatively charged anion Therefore, at a pH between —2.5 and ~15, more than half of the compound will exist in the neutral non protonated form. three transition states, b. two intermediates The first step is the slowest step, so it has the smullest rate constant; the second step is fast because no bonds are being broken; the third step is fast because transfer of a proton from or to an O or an N is, always a fast reaction ind CHyCHSCHsCHCHCH, a, CHCHSCH:CHCHs oe. I OH oH on formed in equal amounts oH cy : Nf « on Copyright © 2014 Pear Faaton MW. Chapter6 187 cHy cH cHy CHy I I I [ al 1 CHCCHy cHeeny crutch 4 can EcHh fi i a br on ocHy b. 1. The first step in all the reactions is addition of an electrophilic proton (H*) to the carbon of the oup. butyl carbocation is formed ay an intermediate in each of the reactions, 1. The nucleophile that adds to the rer-butyl carbocation is different in each reaction, 2. In reactions #3 and #4, there is « third step—a proton is lost from the group that aeted as the nucleophile in the second step of the reaction. Bok em + oh cu. ccc ~ cuseecty + HO" CHACCH; ——+ chee, + CHOH: I zon on OCH, oct, 4 q cH OH H wy Solved in the text ony ou \ 1 , a CY + enon Bo cmecen + cmon cmocens a Hy \ « ( ) + no a. cHcH= CHEK, + cueutcn.ci or on CH= CHCHCH, + 1:0 euenrencn, on ROH + HSO, =" oe + HSO, — 7 dt ‘oR CHE CH + ROH = N q | = cca, cH chy R=CH.CHCH,CHOH | i | ony oR I + cusecH, + ROH cH; H (Copyright 62014 Pearson Huet, I 188 Chapter 6 16. Solved in the text. 17. a, cHcHcH=cH, cacnecncny mL cinecu.cey caccrcn | cus cH, cH ony secondary tertiary cincticacuce, EE. CHACHCH.CHCH, 1 Hy CH Br CH Bro CHy ui be 7 cH Bro CHy Ae C ) 8 SZ amet SU CH: Br ci i Le tps +h . be AEs CHCHECH: a CH Hy cH CH secondary carbocation tertiary earbo cHy Cs f. be cHy : he 7 ch Hy ~e be eq amounts because, in each ease, the int 1-Bromo-3-methyleyclohexane and |-bromo-4-methyleyelohexane will be obtained in approximately rediate is a secondary carbocation, so the two compounds will be formed at ubout the same rate, A carbocation rearrangement will not occur because it would just form unother secondary carbocation, 18. The reaction with 9-BBN is more likely than BH, to add t0 the least sterically hindered carbon Copysigin © 2014 Peano Fleiton tne ly regioselec:ive. 9-BBN is sterically hindered. so it will be more 1», 20. 2B. Chapter6 189 chy cHy Lp ti a. CHyC=CHCHs I CHCHCHCHy, 20 #0. HO 1 on Hy cHy sy noma on HO. HO. HO cH Addition of H* would form carbocation that could rearrang. cardcucr, Hat could wamrange f Addition of Br’ forms. eyelie bromonium jon rather than a carbocation, so there is: no rearrangement a, The first step in the reaction of propene with Bry forms a cyclic bromonium ion, whereas the first step in the reaction of propene with HBr forms a carbocation, b, IP the bromide ion were to attack the positively charged bromine, a highly unstable compound (with a negative charge on carbon and a positive charge on bromine) would be formed. +o a Notice that the electrostatic potential map of the cyclic bromonium ion on page 257 of the text shows that the ring carbons are the least electron dense (most blue) atoms in the intermediate and therefore the ones most susceptible to nucleophilic attack + CH; cH Be Sodium and potassium achieve an outer shell of eight electrons by losing the single el the 3y (in the case of Na) or 4 (in the ease of K) orbital, thereby becoming Na* and K”. ‘ron they have in In order to form a covalent bond, they would have to regain electrons in these orbitals. thereby losing the stability associated with having an outer shell of eight electrons and no extra electrons, ‘The nucleophile that iy present in greater concentration is more apt to collide with the intermediate. Therefore, if the solvent is a nucleophile. the major product will come Irom reaction of the solvent with the intermediate because the concentration of the solvent is much greater than the concentration of the other nucleophile. (For example, in part a the concentration of CH,OH is much greater than the concentration of CI. In part b, the nucleophile is most likely to be [because there are two equivalents of Nal and one equivalent of HBr.) cHy cy cicnscer, ant cictiden, e. CHCHCHCH, ant cH.CHCHCH, deus & bn & major major b. CHACHCH, and CHCHCH Br Br | be 4. cu.eicnet, and crencHety iar dct, be major Gopyeight #2014 Peano Lacon, I 190 24. 2. 29. Chapter 6 Because chlorine is more electronegative than iodine, iodine will be the electrophile, Therefore, it will end upattached to the sp" carbon that is bonded to the most hydrogens. cr oN Hci —+ CHACHCHCH | NW ch we cHCH;CH=CH, + Cl — CHC a CH, de CH-CHCI _ HCHCH:CHy —b. CHRCHCHICH, —e. CH:CHCI cat Br Br Br OH Br OCH,CHy Br OCH, Look at the reagent (Cy) and remember what that reagent does when it reacts with an alkene (do not let the rest of the molecule confuse you): when Cly adds to an alkene, it forms a eyelie chloronium jon inter- mediate. You know that the intermediate then reacts with a nucleophile, There are two nucleophiles in the solution that can react with the intermediate, a C1 and the OH group at the end of the molecule, There is a greater probability that the OH group will be the nucleophife that attacks the chloronium ion because, since it is attached to the reactant. it does not have to Wancer through the solution to find the chloronium jon ws the Cl has to, Loss of a proton gives the six-membered ring ether: C 9 ° u hoe Oe a NN te wy, : Copyright © 2014 ensue Eaton, Ie 30. 35. Chapter6 191 cHy, ony / rN cn Hy 2.3.dimethyl-2-butene Db. CH.CH.CH,, CHCHCH, —CHACH me ° \ " u civoctene rany-4-ote {does not tell you whether the double bond has the E or the Z configuration, Solved in the text Solved in the text a. CHS=CHCHCHACH, or CH,\CH=CHCHCH, b wo cn, a, three alkenes: I-utene, eis-2-butene, srans b, four alkenes: 3-methyl-I-pentene. (£2)-3-methyl-2-pentene, (Z)-3-methyl-2. ¢. five alkenes: I-hexene, cis-2-hexene, tras-2-herene, cis-3-hexene, trans pentene, 2-ethylI-butene hexene Because alkene A has the smaller heat of hydrogenation, itis more stable a CHCHy " ‘This alkenc is the most Stable because it has the greatest number of alkyT substituents honded to the sp? carbons, CHLCHy be ett [ ‘This alkene is the least stable because i¢ has the Fewest NA number of alky! substituents bonded to the sp? carbons. Seren yl substituents bonded to the 9p a cHCHy TI This alkene has the smallest heat of hydrogenation bpecause iis the most stable ofthe three alkenes. _ Copyeigh © 2014 Pearson Balaton. 192 a 2 4B. a Chapter 6 ch CH cic c—c Gein cH H pouch, CHLCH cH: CHLCH, —CHACH alkyl substituents 2 trans alhyT substituents 2 cis alkyl substituents 2 cis alkyl substituents that cause greater serie strain than those in e-3-hexene The reactant must have £.Z stereoisomers or R.S sterenisomers, a. No, because only one constitutional isomer ean be formed ay a product since 2-butene is a symmetrical alkene, CHICH CHCA, Br b, No, because it forms a racemic mixture ¢. No. because cis-butene and srans-butene form the same product. auuse two constitutional isomers are possible, but only one is Formed “aise it forms a racemic mixture. f. No, because cis-hutene and srans-butene form the same product Only the sMerevisomers of the major product of each waetion are shown, a CHIC CCH cH chy Sc Roo or Hcl Ss) Cl R Hye Ven teenie He) eH C1 mistae “Ch CHCHICH: CHCHLCH, b. CHCHCH; —— CHACHCHs CHCH, ciel, 5 a 5 ce oe ous Wok OH misture HO: CHCHICHs CHLCHCH, Cy This compound does not have any stereoisomers. because it does not have any asymmetric centers, CHy da CH This compound does not have any stereoisomers. i CHCCHSCH, ie because it does not have an ayymmet center. Br Solved in the text Solved in the text Solved in the text Copyright © 2014 Peon Education, In 46. 41. 48. 49. Chapter6 193 a. 1. srans-3-heptene 2. cis-3-heptene ‘The enantiomer of each of the structures shown will also be formed, because the peroxyacid can approach both the top and the bottom of the plane defined by the double bond. [oo cagenncn 6 Wo Nene a oy b [ ' cach, 0H uo Nanci ony ch, «. I | a. CHCHy, CHSCHs, a * ok cnc Neen Ch—}-oH HOCH * OH HO ae - coun i" | c—f-4 HCH, ci CH2CHs, CH2CHs, cus i n—on cHschhy cunts CHCHs ts | CH=CCH.CHLCH: ic H:-CCHCHACH br cHicty Gas CH= CCHCHCHy Shot CHCHICHSCHSCHy HCH, cH =cencrcH, : +, Hoc 2 HOT HOO (indicates an asymmetric center) Bach of the reactions forms a compound with one asymmetric center from a compound with no asymmet- ric centers. Therefore, each of the products will be a racemic mixture. Solved in the text a CHLCH, cH cms I | + « + or tert rte nc’ SH Br CHACHs, s Copyei 204 Peanon Fda, te Wo4 50. Chapter 6 CH; b. CH CHSCCHCH; This compound does not have an asymimettie center: er Same asb. a. cHcHchs CHCHCH, | é + ot ww Z f\, ea Had Scie R ee Heth ufos 5 wtne “ca BC or We Sec, cacy St ee ele sos RR CHACH, CHACH, f cncHch.cHs cueci.ci.cs CuBr cist aN Hea BCH. ‘py wie “CHB CHICH.CHSCH, CHCH.CH CH, R s k s ‘Two different bromonium ions are formed because Bry can add to the double bond either from the top of the plane or from the bottom of the plane delined by the double bond. and the two bromonium ions are Formed in equal amounts. Attacking the less hindered carbon of one bromonium ion forms one stereoiso- mer, whereas attacking the less hindered carbon of the other bromonium ion forms the other stereoisomer Because Br can attack the least sterically hindered carbon with equal case from pathway at as from path way b, equal amounts of the threo enantiomers will be obtained. Of course, some reaction will occur at the more hindered end of the bromonium ion, but it will occur to the same extent in both pathways. ac, {_CHSCH.CH.CH, patsy» ed ee. 7 acyl a pay 0 HC OO “ WA oH x The addition of Br and OH are anti so in an acyclic compound theve two substituents are trans to one another. HO Br Br OH Copyright © 2014 Pearson Elation In Chapter6 195 b. mechanism of the reaction eA rQ—Q OD > Ow Hob 0° “bea Fony pf on Only anti addition occurs. Because the reactant is trans, the product would be expected to be the erythro pair of enantiomers. However, in this case, each asymmetric carbon is attached to the sume Four groups, so the product is a meso compound. Therefore. only one stereoisomer is obtained. cucu HCH, Br CH) —7— Br S$ \ 7 o oH CH} Br & cu7 Be ects caneny sor b. Only one axymmetrie center is created in the product, so the product is racemic mixture. CHY \CH Ho OCHy T R 8 te ES ¢. Only syn addition ovcurs. Because the reaetant is trans, the product is the threo pair of enantiomers, cHLCHy CH.CH, 7 oe Hci CHC, Cr PS oe chee + ‘cms 4H CHR CH os yon we CHCH: CH cH CHcHy CHCH, CHCH, AA Sos smmetric centers, so it does not have any stereoisomers. 4d. The product of the reactions does not have any a opysigh © 204 Pearson Eton, I 196 53, Chapter 6 e. Only anti addition oceurs. Because the reactant is cis (a cyclopentene ring cannot exist in a trans con- figuration), the product is the pair of enantiomers with the bromines on opposite sides of the ring. £. Only anti addition occurs. Because the reactant is cis. the product is the pair of enantiomers with the bbromines on opposite sides of the ring. “An “~ C7? C7 Br....\ { CHSCHy CHICH) {Br aN 7 oN cn be BY ‘chy & Only syn addition occurs, Because the reactant \s cis. the product would be the pair of enantiomers with the hydrogens on the same side of the ring. but in this case the product is a meso compound, so only one stereoisomer is obtained. cH CHy 1h. Only syn addition occurs. Because the reactant is cis. the product is the pair of enantiomers with the hydrogens on the sime sie ofthe rng “A ~ wy fa ah fn 7 \ oN ch ‘erica, cnc, ‘ows a. CH{CHCHBr —b. ‘The & and S enantiomers will be formed in equal amounts (a racemie mixture), ic citar ibe CHsie CHB HY 7 chs I ci oy cH s k s R Greater than 98% is excess of the S enantiomer: the remainder is a racemic mixture, Therefore, greater than 99% is the S enantiomer. -Arracemie mixture of (R)-malate and (S)-malate would be obtained. (A product with one asymm center would be formed from a reactant with no asymmetric centers.) b. A racemic mixture of (R}-malate and ($)-malate would again be obtained, In the absence of an enzyme. the reactions are neither stereoselective (part a) nor stereospecific (part by. ‘Copyright ©2014 Pearson hatin, I 59. 60. Chapter6 197 Solved in the text Less of the desired produet would be formed from 3-methyleyclohexene than from I-methyleyclohexene. Hydroboration-oxidation of 3-methyleyclohexene would form both 2-methyleyclohexanol (the desired product) and 3-methyleyctohexanol, because borane could add to either the I-position or the 2-position of the alkene, since the two transition states would have approximately the same stability. cus on ci, oO CO) : OQ oa on CH,CH=CH. Bat CHyCHCH: _ . 2 CHOW a ‘ OCH, be | Br cn, oad : one Ste HH so au ae « CO — oct ay ae | Br CU oe > oy HO, Br Br CH; cleeteophite nucleophile a cHgHCH, + GF —= CH.CHCHn, NL Cl Gopyeigh ©2016 Peano Eduction, Ine 198 Chapter 6 b. —acleophile —_eleetropie cucH=cHy + Hb = CHCHCH, + BF ¢.electrophile Ss =o 7 b. cine HCH, + HI =" cHse—cHicth ad ' a. & + i CHy CHy CHy wH e. CH;C=CHCH; aoe | Hy oe cH bh. CIRC=CHCH, > Br aaZy Hy 0. | i, CHYC=CHCH, + Bry Copstight © 2014 Pearson Bvt ns Chapter6 199 cH HOH | Cre CHO Be cH 1 BH I = CH,CH—CHCH, 2h HOO i on lithy 2-dimethyloxirane or isopropyloxirane or 3.4-epoxy-4-ethyl-2-methylhexane 3-epoxy-2-methylpentane First draw the structures so you can see the number of alkyl groups bonded to the sp” carbons: by bis bi a, 2.3-Dimethyl-2-hexene is the most stable of the three alkenes because it has the greatest number of alkyl substituents bonded to the sp? carbons, b, 4.5-Dimethyl-2-hexene has the fewest alkyl substituents bonded to the sp" carbons making it the least stable of the three alkenes. It, therefore, hay the greatest heat of hydrogenation. Because it is the most stable, 2.3-dimethyl-2-hexene has the smallest heat af hydrogenation forms a carbocation intermediate, soa eleetrophile I Ho on santa On ction and Ht isthe oy ino NZ SO” > rearrangement nucleophile cean occur ani is the a. It isan oxidation reaction because two new C—Cl bonds are formed. b. Itisneither an oxidation reaction nor a reduetion reaction because both a C—O and a C—H bond are formed ° ° il i oO oO a. CCHS CH, cucus Nt oxidation oxidation b. CH,CHCH;CHCH, cH reduction Copy 8 304 Pearson Eduction, te 200 Chapter 6 —~ H 12 SOON IN aan iat . 61. cancncnSei: + Wo —> cine—cricn - cH.CcH chy cHy } cH 7 | ve a cwcucnc encom, cH, ci Zhnomo-Smethyboutane ——2-bromo-2-nethybutne ts ae CHC: CHy b. CH)==CHCHSCH:CH SCH, CHy HCH-CHCH; i, on ch This compound is the most stable. I I has four alkyl substituents (CH:==CHCHCH:CHy, CHsCCH=CHz broad tothe p* earns, bn ba These cempounds ate the least stable Fach has only one alkyl substituent bonded to the sp? carbons. 69. 2014 Pearson Sdveaton Ie Chapter6 201 1. _ S fos O48 Cry {no pass oo ul ocH, On on ° moa a © e & cl 0 on och; ~ ch ° b AWA" * ec cl 1 6 AAG tm Row cH.cHcH=cucnen, 2+ cHcH=chy b. CHCHCH:CI - 1180, HO ya f cHCH,cH=CHCH,CH, SS © (ae ee ae 2 oe on on and b. (Note: D stands for deuterium, an isotope of hydrogen: DBr reacts in a manner very similar to HBr.) While HBr forms the sume product when it reacts with the (wo alkenes, DBr would form different products. They are shown here CH,CH,CH= CHCHCH, cn.p chy Br and Br 2014 Peso Baacation, te 202 Chapter 6 chy mW CHACCHs a. as has the more substituted tertiary is more stable ouible bond than seeondary CH cn,cucu. « the electron withdraw has the more substituted chlorine destabilizes the carbocation double bond by inctessing the amount of postive e on the earbon HCHCH, Oe tertiary iy more stable SCH J than secondary ae has the more substituted, double bond Both cis- and rrans-2-butene give these products: in each ease a product with one asymmetric center is formed. so the product is a ruicemie mixture. crc Hc, chy chy i | 7 eC gp Hey fo CHO Vn Wd Scns I IL 1 ct CHCH, cnc, 5 k s k Both cis- and rrany-2-butene give these products: in each case a product with one ayymmettic center is formed, so the product isa racemic wixture, cusci ch cn i A“ or H—t~on cay Vn OH cicn s s R srans-2-Butene forms a pair of enantiomers: the product has two ayymmetrie centers and only syn addition occurs, Copsrit © 2014 Pearson dain, Chapter6 203 cis-2-Butene forms the threo pair of enantiomers; a product with two asymmetric centers is formed and only anti addition of Bry occurs, CH, cHy HC H H chy / " Bers Br——H Re | Hy He pr eon or weer’ Bi cHy Se Hy ciy-2-Butene forms the threo pair ofenantiomers; a product with two asymmetric centers is formed and only anti addition of Br and OH occurs. chy chy mesons Hota e cea = H / H F . Be Senn SE pos eae “8 me con on srans-2-Butene forms the erythro pair of enantiomers: a product with two asymmettie centers is formed and only anti addition of Brand OH occurs. cH cH He, ill AHS HO—}-HR =H} —ons woe Co Cooy oF How ake Br HS oH Br ik RS RS cHy cHy Both cis- and rrans-2-butene form this product; a product with no asymmetric centers is formed CHSCH.CH.CH, Both cis- and srans-2-butene form these products: a product with one ayymmetric center is formed. Gace cHy cHy : c a OH 4 HOW pH Wd cH, HO CHCHy CHCHy s R 5 R Both eis- and rrans- 2-butene form these products: proxluet with one asymmetric center is formed. CHC CHCH: chy a | é ‘ ¢ or HOCH, 4 CHO —H cH Vn W'7 cH, | och CHO Cc, CHLCHs R s R Copyright 8.304 Peano Esto, bo 204 Chapter 6 b, For the cis- and trany-2-butene to form different products, (1) the reaction must form two new ayy’ metric centers in the product and (2) either syn or anti addition must occur (but not both). Therefore the cis and trans alkenes form different products when they react with x peroxyacid, with Brs, and with Bry in HO. 76. a. Todetermine relative rates, the rate constant of each alkene iy divided by the smallest rate constant of the series (3.51 X10 5), relative rates propene (4.95 x 105)/(351 x 10°) = 141 (2)-2-butene (832 x 10°) /(BS1 x 10%) = 2.37 (E)-2-butene (351 x 10°)/(351 x 10) = 1 x x 2methyl-2-hutene = (2.15 x TO) /(RSTX 10) = 6.12 «10 2.3-dimethyl-2-butene = (3.42% 10-4)/(3.51 10-8) = 9.74 x LO b. Both compounds form the same carbocation but. since (Z)-2-butene is less stable than (£)-2-butene. (Z)-2-butene has a smaller free energy of activation, © ‘Methyl-2-butene is more stable than (Z)-2-butene and it also forms a mote stable carbocation termediate (Lertiary) and therefore a more stable transition state than does (Z)-2-butene (secondary Knowing that 2-methyl-2-butene reacts faster Cells us that the energy difference between the transition states is greater than the energy difference between the alkenes. This is what we would expect [rom the Hammond postulate, since the transition states look more like the carbocations than like the alkenes, 4. .3.Dimethyl-2-butene is more stable than 2-methylbutene. and both compounds Torn tertiary es bocation intermediate. On this basis. you would predict that 2.3-dimethyl-2-butene would react more slowly than 2-methylbutane. However, 2,3-dimethyl-2-butene has two sp? carbons that can react with < proton to form the tertiary carbocation, whereas 2-methyl-2-butene has only one sp? carbon that can react with a proton to form the tertiary carbocation. The fact that 2.3- OA B (CHyhCCHYCH, (CH. Se abd | a ee Cc Cc “on = nee We cnr ® s cnc, chen, 7 i neLons cn ten ke oe se aan R CHSCHCH, CHLCHSCH: coe bone cutie et" omnes aeons cocmcH Lo con CH \ Z ve Siesta CHR H ‘CHYCH{CH, CH yCH)CH. H : Ros RS a Hy CH3CH:CHs I , > nyu cnch, Xe1 sok Both |-butene and 2-butene react with HCI to form 2-chlorobutane. b. Both alkenes form the same carbocation, and therefore have transition states that are close in € because 2-butene is more stable than I-butene, 2-hutene has the greater free energy of activation Both compounds form the saine carbocation, and therefore have transition states that are close in energy. but since (Z)-2-butene is less stable, it will react more rapidly with HCl Br Br Nt AN Om Br Copstight ©2014 Peanon auction, te Chapter 6 2 o ~Yy a (em wo wRnnrt, i i & HCHO + we y weno sa ROR TO ee) o 9 fn emcmo sO AAP y alee lee CHy CH, > HCH, v= GAG ¢ b, [-Methyleyclopentene is the most stable. ¢. Because I-methyleyclopentene is the most stable, it has the smallest heat of hydrogenation, cH, cH Ge ea woes el owe eo coh + or * “of Nomen, cacy yas " aa ss RR HCH cncHy Copyright © 2014 Pearson Edo, 210 Chapter 6 be HC ary + WW RS © CHCH, cHCH | xe + 6 cay wd c ci s R a. chy Br e a # Bryo— CS Br or Le 7 CHACH. wae ROS CHACHy ‘a meso compound CHICH, CHCHs f cHCHy mn | 2 Hoses pe tone Br Hs Bee CHCH, CHACHs The initially formed carbocation is secondary. Itundergoes cation that gives the products shown below methy! shitt to form a tertiary carbo cH.eH CHC. br br I i fete ete b mars pc + oo + (CH CH \"CHSCHy CHCHS J ~CHICH yO CHCH, CHCHy cH cny i | : 5 ony ony h. CH:CH; CH: el ony Hof cH br cucHy crcH k s K chs kone on \, ? u chs en e= el or aN H ak Hee chy kos cH a meso compound Copyright 2014 Fearon Education. 4, 95. 9%. Chapter6 211 ; Hy Hy i | was cue c—f-ns ° nce s RR Hy Hy “HCH, ke § n—f—cr, H—}—cHy & CHSCHy a meso compound CHACHs HCH Lo cHCH oH 4 CHSCHy * f H CH, S CH——H OR —CACH, + CI OOe or + Wr oN 4 NH Ch} HS H—cH CHy (CHCHy CHYCHy CHy a sos ROR cHCH, CHCH, “The First product would not be formed, because none of the bonds attached to C-2 were broken during the reaction, Therefore, the configuration at C-2 cannot cl Diazomethane is a very reactive compound decause the triple-bonded nitrogen has a strong propensity to depact from the carbon in order to form a very stable molecule of nitrogen gas. As it departs, the nucle philic alkene attacks the electrophilic carbon, and in the same step. the Jone pair is the nucleophile that adds to the other sp* carbon of the alkene. The C— Zn bond of the Simmons-Smith reegent has the same polat reagent. Theretore, as the C—Mg bond of a Grignard C T—CH,Lzt rwactsasifitwere ICH, Zal aa, The base removes a proton. Then do what is needed to get the known product of the reaction. a ol Copyrigin 2 214 Pearson dustin, Ine 7. 98. Consett © 2014 Pears doco. I Chapter 6 b. Notice that this reaction has the same mechanism as that in part a except that instead of a base remov ing a proton and leaving behind its bonding electrons. heat causes COs to be removed leaving behind ‘ts bonding electrons. clo cr In LG anglers ~ c-c: + oF a Gy acch f _ Ly br br é cH N, CHG, CHCHYs Ly - R CHICK: CHICHS)y br—toe 4 cy te I | cnc Ceci, 5 R cH cH ul cu, | HC Noe 0c CHO, a Mes BH HOH + “ Noni ctioc cHio—f—cns cy —}~o0ns : R CHICH > CHICH 3 on on onc VCH cH. 7 CH.CH; CHACH, CHICHa 2 or - cHecHy HCH) woe an ow Hy cine 5 k Chapter6 213 4 4 ' i 1 Pat Snag FHS Ci CHy Ly chose VCH Candin, CCH: k s cawcnny cwyeny weeny c—f-n cHichy crc ® 5 cay ony CHa LC, tH We ao oe et TOC ge or + HICH). (CHy)CH ne Cee oes ao aD cuucitys CHicitys cH cu He 4 tL won Ney H—}-OH S| HO——H oR 2HO-IKO. WO He N “ oy or | - t—¢ Ho Newey ceunsct Nyy HHS cee aoe Les CH(CHy) CHICH))» cH cy 4 cH oN ee ee Ho” Beye , oye + Be Newcny cinch aR Hotes * cm —}—one sos R CHICHs)> CHICH 100, a. A \. \ secondary tertiary | b._ The initially formed carbocation is tertiary. the rearranged carbocation is secondary; it undergoes another rearrangement to a more stable tertiary 4. The initially formed carbocation rearranges in order to release the strain in the four-membered ting. (A tertiary carbocation with a strained four-membered ring is less stable than a secondary carbocation with an unstrained five-membered ring.) CCopytight ©2014 Pearson Edocaton, be 24 lol. 102. 103, 104, Chapter 6 2-Methy|propene will be hydrated more rapidly. Ics more reactive than the chloro-substituted alkene, because the electron-withdranwing chlorine makes the alkene less nucleophilic 2. The carbocation intermediate that 2-methylpropene forms (and therelore the transition state | its formation) is more stable. because the electro2-withdrawing chlorine increases the amount of posi tive charge on the carbon. wing to Weells us th react with water in a subsequent fast step. which means that the carbocation will Not have time to lose a proton to reform the alkene. so all the deuterium atoms (D) will be retained in the u the first step of the mechanism is the slow step. If the Hirst step is slow, the carbocation will reacted alkene. ‘cucu: cucu = 110 6 \-cn-cuo, on I the first step were not the slow step, an equilibrium would be set up between the alkene and the carboca tion and. because the carbocation could lose either H” or D~ when it reforms the alkene, all the deuterium atoms would not be retained in the unreacted alkene. Because fumarate is the trany isomer and it forms an erythro product, the enzyme must eatalyze the anti audition of DO. (Recall: CIS-SYN-ERYTHRO, which allows TRANS-ANTI-ERYTHRO but does not a: low TRANS-SYN-ERY THRO, since two terms must be changed.) When (5}-3-methyl-L-pentene reaets with Ch, a compound with a new asymmetric center (*) is formed. The relative configuration of the asymmettic center in the reactant does not change because no bonds 0 it are broken during the course of the reaetion, cHy cin c © c ANH - ANH cHy=cH” 5 CHCH, cen cH Vere (5)-S-methy!-I-pemtene a ‘The new asymmetric center can have either the R or the S configuration, Therefore, a pair of diastereoiso- mers is obtained. H H Nee Ne —cmcH, cH ees tae He sets eee of cHCH. ich” “CH.cH: RIS. iehlory-3-methylpentane (28.38)-1.2-dichloro-3-methylpentane Copyright © 2014 Reurontida Chapter6 217 Indicate how each of the following compounds could be synthesized using an alkene as one of the starting material ' a + cHCcH.cHy bn . . — de Indicate the carbocations that you would expect to rearrange to give a more stable carbocation. cn, cHy Gus cy CHACH:CHCHCH, —— CHsCHyCHCHs, O Indicate whether each of the Following statements is true oF false: a. ‘The addition of Bry to -butene to form 1,2-dibromobutane is u concerted reaction, —T b. The re tion of L-butene with HCI will form I-chlorobutane as the major product, T ©. 2.3-Dimethyl-2-pentene is more stable than 3.4-dimethyl-2-pentene. T 4. ‘The reaction of HBr with 3-methyleyclohexene is more highly regioselective than is the reaction of HBr with I-methyleyclohexene TOF The reaction of an alkene with a carboxy ic acid forms an epoxide. TOF A catalyst increases the equilibrium constant of a reaction, TOF The addition of HBr to 3-methyl-2-pentene is a stereospecific reaction, TO OF 1h, ‘The addition of HBr to 3-methyl-2-pentene is a stereoselective reaction. TOF The addition of HBr to 3-methyl-2-pentene is a regioselective reaction, i F Draw all the products t isomers are formed: would be obtained from each of the following rea ions, indicating which a. L-butene + HCI fe. srans-3-hexene + Bry b. 2-pentene + HBr a. irqiy-3-hepiene + Bry Copysigh 2008 Pearson Bdocation, te 218 Chapter 6 10, Draw the stereoisomers that would be obtained from each of the following reactions: Be cH CH, CHCHy cH, CHACH, nS on Puc 2014 Pearson Ldvaton Chapter6 215 mndary carbocation, which undergoes a ring-expansion rear- bocation, 10S. a. A proton adds to the alkene, forming a sec rangement to form a more stable tertiary ao H HG: HC. CH=CH> HC CHCH, eel cH, cH, CP ne WY Copyright 2914 Pearson Fda fe 216 Chapter 6 Chapter 6 Practice Test Which member of euch pair is more stable? CHy a. CHYCHCHCHy or CHACCHs b. CHSCHSCHSCHy or CH:CHSCHCH: © CHCHCH: or CICHSCI Which would be a better compound to use as a starting material for the synthesis of 2-bromopentane? CHACHCHSCH SCH; or CHSCHACI HCH, ‘The addition of H, in the presence of PAC 10 alkenes A and B results inthe formation of the same alkane ‘The addition of H to alkene A has a heat of hydrozenation (~AA°) of 29.7 heal mol, whereas the addition Of Hy to alkene B hus a heat of hydrogenation of 27.3 keal/mol, Which is the more stable alkene. A or B? What is the major product of each of the following renetions? cu a IF CHy + HBr - cH b. cHLCHCH cH + He) . chcHCH=cHy +c Me chy a. CHCCH SCs + be én fe CHCH=CH, + 4 ee Cee Mo What prot would be obtained trom the hydroboration-oxidaion ofthe fallowing tkeney? a, 2methyl-2-butene bh, L-ethyleyelopentene Copyeight 2014 Pearson Edson, APTE Important Terms acetylide ion aldehyde alkylation r alkyne carbonyl group geminal dihalide internal alky keto-enol tautomers ketone complex he Reactions of Alkynes + An Introducti n to Multistep Synthesis, the conjugate base of a terminal alkyne. Rc=C a compound with a carbonyl group that is bonded to an alky! hydrogen (or bonded to two hydrogens). ° ° or i a ~H HOH oup and toa reaction that adds an alkyl group to a reactant a hydrocarbon that contains a triple bond, a carbon doubly bonded to an oxygen. ° I) ‘an alkene with an OH group bonded (0 one of the sp? carbons. on a compound with twe halogen atoms bonded (o the same carbon, ain alkyne with its tiple bond not at the end of the carbon chain. a ketone or aldehyde and its isomeric enol, The keto and enol tautomers differ only in the location of a double bond and a hydrogen. ° on I I RCHCR -===— RCH=CR keto enol a compound with a carbonyl group that is bonded to two alkyl g ° i} 31 complex formed hetween an electrophile and a triple bond, 219 Copyright © 2008 Pearson Fae 220 Chapter 7 radical anion retrosynthetic analysis or retrosynthesis| tautomerization tautomers terminal alkyne vinylic cation vinylic radical a species with a negative charge and an unpaired electron. working backward (on paper’ from a target molecule to available starting materials. interconversion of tautomers constitutional isomers that are in rapid equilibrium: for example. keto and enol tautomers. The keto and enol tautomers differ only in the location of a double bond and a hydrogen, aan alkyne with its tiple bond at the end of the carbon chain, aa species with a positive charge on a vinylic carbon, ‘a species with an unpaired electron on a vinylic carbon. Copyright © 2014 Pearson Eaton In Chapter? 224 2 jer] molecular formula of a noneyclc hydrocarbon is C,Hy,..2. Therefore, the molecular formula for a noncyelic hydrocarbon with 14 carbons is C,H, Because a compound has two fewer hydrogens for every ring and 17 bond, a compound with one ring and 4 7 bonds (2 triple bonds) would have 10 fewer hydrogens than the C, ll, + formula Therefore, the molecular formula is CygHap a CICHSCHS CCH CH) *\ He CCHSCH;CHCHy, Ihexyne butylucetylene CH.CH.CHCSCH I cHy S-methyl-I-pent see-butykacetylene a. S-bromo-2-pentyne b, G-bromo-2-chloro a, 6-methyl-2-oetyne a -hepten-yne b, 4methyl-t4-hexadiene vinyl-S-oecten-I-yne ‘one of the functional groups ‘cannot be ineluced in the parent hydrocarbon (£)-2-hepten--ol alkane = pentane alkene &. CHCHC I cy CH 4. cnyenen Hy CHAC=CCESCHLCHS 2hexyne methylpropylacetylene crncucnsc=cH Hy 4-methyl-L-pentyne isobutyhacetylene Hy I cnce I CHy 3.3-dimethy!-I-butyne tert-butylacetylene CCHCHCH, ft. :. Lmethoxy- cH, crc) Hhexyne dicthylacetylene CHCHC=CCHy I CH; A-methyl-2-pentyne isopropyhmethytacetylene 2-pentyne dd. Sethyl-I-hexyne b. Sethyl-4-methyl-I-heptyne © 2-bromo-4-octyne d. 3.butyn-L-ol fe. 13.5-heptatriene f. 2.4-dimethyl-4-hexen-I-ol b. Fhepten-5-yne © = I-pentene alkyne = (E)-4+-hepten-I-yne -pentyne Copycat 2008 Pearson Eatin, fe 10. ML 14, 16. Chapter 7 ‘The cis isomer has @ higher boiling point because it has a small dipole moment. whereas the dipole moment of the trans isomer is zero. a ow a. psp 2 ww be yrs sp | b, sposp e por f sap? i sap Solved in the text. a a cH eets e cE ec Br br br Br Be we | b. CHACCHy d. aie f. CHSCCH:CH)CHy + CHyCH»CCH{CHy I I | i br Br Br br br che br "CH br b. Only anti addition occurs, because the intermediate is a ¢ will have the E configuration, clie bromonium ion. Therefore the product Because the alkyne is not symmetrical, two ketones will be obtained. ° ° i CHsCH;CCH;CHCH;CHs and CHsCH3CH;CCH;CH.CH, a, CHC b, CHC CCH:CHy © The best answer for b is 3-hexyne, because it would form only the desired ketone. 2-Hexyne would form twvo different ketones. so only half of the product would be the desired ketone. oH Because the ketone has identical substituents bonded to the CCH; carbonyl carbon. it has only one enol tautome Copyright © 2014 Pears Education Ine Chapter? 223 oH OH I Db. CHCHSCCHICH ICH and CHYCH;C=CHCHACHy E and Z isomers are possible for each of these enol, Hu OH H CHCH:CH, HO, H HO, CHLCHy / Va Ne c coc — —— = os cH cHCIACH, cH, OH HCH, —CHLCH; 60 pk, weaker acid weaker hase srbase stronger ac ‘The base used to remove a proton must be stronger than the base that is formed as t result of proton removal. Therefore, the base used to remove a proton from a terminal alkyne must be « stronger base than the conjugate base of the terminal alkyne, A terminal alkyne has a pk, ~ 2S. In other words. any base ‘whose conjugate acid has a pK, greater than 25 can be used. cH > CHC LO > a. CHCH.CH;CH: > CHsCH CH “NH: > CH a, Solved in the text wo=cu A triply bonded (sp) carbon is more electronegative than a doubly bonded (sp") carbon. Therefore. a triply bonded carbon with a positive charge would be less stable than a doubly bonded carbon with a positive charge. Thus. the Vinyl cation is more stable Solved in the text L NaN CHACH.CH.C LOCC Mut nda att cic L sant LNA os ° 2 ch penne CCS CCHS Tian i de product ofa —/ 2 MUTHE CH\CHSCHSCH-CH 2HO, 1.03.10) Copyright © 2014 Pesson Baueaton ne product of b . HO=CH a a 2a. CHC CH, © a a a a cl 28a & h fe clc=cH ie d. Cly=CHCSCH k. 2», wed only one correctly. heryne —b, T-bromo-3 30, —- tleetrophile nucleophile I CHSCHSCHLCCHLCHSCHy I Chapter 7 a I + CHCHCCH,CHACH:CHy l a equal amounts BrC=CCH-CHCHy on CH CHyCHyC=CCHYCHy Gry CH cHEC = CoC, CHy cH I CoH.cucHicHy chy correct d.-pentyne electsophile nucleophile Chapter 7 cH nucleophile CHC=CCH, + Br: ‘eleetrophile [Methyl bromide is an electrophile because the earbon has partial positive eh 31. a S-bromo- hexyne yexyne e cyclooctadiene b, Semethyl-2-etyne de Sheptyne —f_1.6-dimethyl-1.3-cyclohexadiene 0 32. RCH—CH» / 4 RCHCH, a ae vee aa i t six carbons and one methyl group; then draw the straight-chain compounds with five carbons and two methyl groups (or with one ethyl group). Naming tiem will tell you if you have drawn one compound ‘more than once because if two compounds have the sime name, they are the same compound HC=CCH,CH.CH:CHCHy I-heptyne pentylacetylene CH.CHLCHSCHC: | CHs Semethyl-Lhexyne CHSCH:CHC=CCHy I CHy -methyl-2-hexyne sec-butylmethylacetylene CH I CHYCCSCCH, I CHy methyl-2-pentyne sere-butylmethylacetylene eplyne butyimethy acetylene CHCH,CHCH, -methyl-|-hexyne CHCHCH.C=CCH, I CHy S-methyk2-hexyne isobutyimethylacetylene cy i cucens i cy 44-dimethyl-t-pentyne Copyright © 2014 Pearson Beaton ne CHSCSCCHCHICHCHy — CHYCH3C= CCH CHLCHs CHSCHCH,CHSC -hepryne ethylpropylivetylene H I chy S-methy!-I-hexyne isopentylacetylene CHsCHCSCCHiCHy cH 2-methyl-3-hexyne cathy isopropylucelylene CH CHACH.C I CHy 3.3.imethyl-t-pentyne “evs-pents acetylene 35. 36. 37. 38. Chapter? 227 CHLCH cHy I I CHACH;CHC=CH CHACHCHE=CH I cry Secthyl-I-pentyne -dimethyl-1-pentyne Addition of Br: to the triple bond in the presence of HO forms an enol that immediately tautomerizes to a ketone. cHcHy cH CHCHSCH: 2 HOMO. 1D b. CH CHSCH=CH: CHCHSCH: H80, €. CH CHLCH,C=CCH;CHCH, CHCHSCHSCCH,CH;CHCH, ‘This symmetrical alkyne will give the greatest yield of the desired ketone. Because the reactant is not a terminal alkyne, the reaction can take place without the mercuric ion catalyst, a. H>/Lindlar catalyst b, Na, NHa(lig), —78°C excess H», Pd/C re a cco, a rence, gnc i be he i i b. CHACCH, fe CHACCHy be Br CHy ii Nea’ i che eek ementn one te rf di. Schl dyeloexadene bh cethown/lor(Z)-Rherene al meliloti @ Sealine ‘The molecular formula of the hydrocarbon is CyHso With one triple bond, two double bonds, and one ri Therefore, the compound is missing 10 hydrogens from C,H, > the degree of unsaturation is 5. He Copyright © 2044 Pearson Education, Ine 228 Chapter 7 40. a CHSCH=CCHy e Br Br I be cHRCHECH, ft br c. Ne a oY Br Br @. CHC Br Br { CCH I A ee bn / ae NN co Tintr catalyst 2 CHCH =CH Tia i CHSCCHCH; i, no rexetion ° il CHACCH.CHS J. no reaction on e 2 + “ae@a on ° Aw Aw 3 Le q ; cinencn—cH cuethcn, = engencn, | is cn ony jo ou CHACCHLCH, chy CHACHCH= CH, a cH CHy Copyright © 2014 Peano Eaton Ine 4B. 46. Chapter? 229 b. 3-MethyL-2-butanol will he nnor product obtained fom both Hand 2, on enencuen, bi, 3. aan 3-MethyI-2-butanol will be obtained from 1, because occasionally water wil attack the secondary ear bocation before it has a chance to rearrange to the tertiary carbocation, 3-Methy!-2-butanol will be obtained from 2, because in the second step of the synthesis boron can also, add to the other sp* carbon; it will be a minor product because the transition state for its formation is less stable than the transition state leading to the major product. Because a carbocation is not formed as an intermediate, « carbocation rearrangement cannot occur, (The proton cannot add to the other sp? carbon in the second step of part because that would require the formation of a primary carbocation in the second step of the synthesis, Primary carbocations are so "unstable that they can never be formed.) ‘Three of the names are correct. a. 3-heptyne correct fe. correct b. S-methyl-3-heptyne d. 6.7-dimethyl-3-octyne f correct Only € and e are keto-enol tautomers, Notice that an enol tautomer has an OH group bonded to an sp” carbon. The structures in d are not enol tautomers, because they do not have the oxygen on the same carbon, 10.11.80, a HeSen ES CHOH enol " Tin cHRCHLCHCH SB oe \ ° NaN oth i Clue zene HC eso, 7 CHRCCHS a CHC age A~4 The first equilibrium lies to the right because HOOH (pk, = 11.6) is a stronger acid than HO (pK, = 15.7) ‘The second equilibrium lies to the left because the alkyne (pk, = 25) is a weaker acid than HOOH (pK, = 11.6). Copytigh © 2014 Peano Esato, Ine 230 Chapter 7 -burene, the threo pair of enantiomers is, 47. a Syn addition of Hy forms cis-2-butene: when Bry adds t0 formed, Hs cH Ho} —Br Br} a at 4 Als or CoB +t coc r u SB pes aaa Yee CH b. Reaction with sodium and liquid ammonia forms rrans-2-butene: when Bry adds to 1rams-2-butene. 3 ‘meso compound is formed. cH HBr HBr cH ichloro-2-butene, Anti addition of Cly forms trans-2,3-diehloro-2-butene; when Bry adds to trun 4 meso compound is formed. cH; . - cH or comers cl Br cl ew Hy q i o i ho © ’ NaN MSO a ea cual Yo CH gacaa CHCHCH.CH.C=CH Io CH.CH.CHLCH.CCH, bo nc=cH SE cach. — crcrcuscn, S crscHcucn b HCE CH Socio CHC Cir Beara ee cats by © 40 ncscn LSE cHeancnc=cn = crcicrcu—en 8 crcrcicncit CECH emancia, CHCHICHCS CH iar CHxCHICHa eae ee canis 6 ° 140.1480) i — cHcH, 1.0 2014 Pearson Education, Ie. Consist Chapter? 231 Hy / Sch; - c=c . ss Xo 50, The chemist can make 3-octyne by using I-hexyne instead of I-butyne, He would then need to use ethyl bromide (instead of butyl bromide) for the alkylation step: ont CHACHYCHCHC= CH = CHyCH2CH:CH»C=CCH;CHy Seer Or he could make the I-butyne he needed by alkytating ethyne: 4) NAN scene HC=CH SGhanw 7 CihcInc=cHt 51. a, Only one product is obtained from the hydroboration-oxidation of 2-butyne because the alkyne is symmetrical. Two different products can be obtained from hydroboration-oxidation of 2-pentyne because the alkyne is not symmetrical. CH\C=CCH;CHy 1 annie hang 2 HO... 1hO 2. HOSHOs, O ° ° ° CH CHLCCH, CHACCH:CH,CHy 4 CHyCH,CCHCHy b. Only one product will be obtained from hydroboration-oxidation of any symmetrical alkyne, such as 3-hexyne or 4-octyne. CHSCHCSCCHCH, CHyCH:CH C= CHC Shexyne oetyne Hy 52. a, The first step forms a trany alkene. Syn zadition to a trans alkene form the threo pair of en miomers. CHCH, cHCH, [ o aa cmc p—u Hp Oe De ON I oe CHcH, D cinch, cincny, b. The first step forms a cis alkene. Syn addition to a cis alkene forms the erythro pair of enantiomers but, since each asymmetsic carbon is bonded to the same four groups, he product here i a meso compound, CHICHy nlp cH or cHcN ae He 4 f a ot NciLcHs CHCH, Copyright 9 2014 Reason Bvt, 232 Chapter 7 (3E.6E)-3.7.1 L-trimethyl-1.3.6.10-dodeeatetraene The con isomers are not possible at those positions, because there are wo hydrog roups bonded 16 C11 uration of the double bond at the I-position and at the 10-pasition is not specified because ns bonded to C-1 and (wo methyl Nant crue ees S40 oa HC ; CHLCH.CH.CHCH oN foe i CHsCH;CHSCH;CH: SECEB c=ccHicH, “SY. HC CCHCHy CHLCH.CHSe cinch H ' Vee” Ne CHCH:CHLC=CCHCH oN Mir tin. F8€ 4 cHCHCHy 1 HO and HOOH are added at the sume time ay BH; (or RBH), HO isa better nucleophile than the alkyne (no bonds have to be broken when HO” reacts with the electrophite). so HO™. instead of the alkyne, will react with BH, (or RBH) HO” + BH) === HO—BH, . HC=CH nese SCE e=ecuscH, “MEE cHccucry cH.cHts HyCHs y me CHICHS xat tig) HoH a SNINTS CHACHC=CCHCHy + “ oN Ht Br H CHACHy (3SAR)-A-bromo- (BRAS)-4-bromo- S-hexanol Shexanol Gopyeigh © 204 Pearson Education. te Nant CHACHy cHcHy HoH " on He + Ho Hu Br br H CHSCHy CHLCHy GRAR} 4. bromo: S-hesianol Because anti addition occurs in the last (38.48)-4-bromo: $-hexanol hic=ecn,cr, MN. CHC, HCH, \ c= a W 4 Tinta aly Chapter 7 “CSCCHCH, ‘ eancHsae = CH,CH;C=CCH.CHy It Na/NH,(lig) /—78 °C is used instead of Hy/Lindlar catalyst in the fifth step. the trans alkene will be formed. Reaction of Bry ca IL sha Y e aN Copyright 2914 Peapon Fdvetion, te «l H.O with the trans alkene will form the erythro enantiomers Chapter 7 Chapter 7 Practice Test ls could be used to convert the given starting material into the desired product?” Draw the e for each of the Follow: see-butylisobutylacetylene b. 2-methyl-1.3-cyelohexatdi Indicate whether each of the Following statements is rue or false: a. A terminal alkyne is more stable than an internal alkyne. T b. Propyne iy more reactive than propene toward reaction with HBr. t -- 1-Butyne is more acidic than I-butene. Y Any? carbon is more electronegative than an 9p" carbon 1 ioselective than the reset e. The reactions of internal alkynes are more terminal alkynes, T £Alkenes are more reactive than alkynes, vy What is exch compound's systematic name”? a. CH\CHC=CCH.CH,Br b. CHRCHC=COH.CHOH cH, CHy Chapter 7 What alkyne would be the best reagent to use for the synthesis of each of the Following ketones? ° ° i i a CHCHSCISCCH, —b. CH,CHACCH,CHSCH, Rank the following compounds in order from most acidic to least acidic: NH cHC=cH CHACHy #20. cHyCH Gi ‘example of a ketone that hay two enol tautomer. Show how the target molecules could be prepared from the given starting materials, a, CHCHCSCH + CHACHaCHCHYCHSCHy b. CHCIIC=CH + CHACH HCH SCHSCHy br ° i | CHCHC=CH = CH)CHSCCHCHSCHy Copysigtt 2914 Person Fastin, I 235 “HAPTER S Delocalized Fl Important Terms 1.2-addition (direct addition) (conjugate addition) aliphatic compound allene allylic carbon. allylic eation romatic compound molecular mmetrie molecular orbital aromatic npound benzylic carbon benzylic & al bridged bicyclic compound ‘common interme’ conjugate addition conjugated diene ectrons and Their Effect on Stabi } PK,. and the Products of a Reaction addition to the 1- and 2-positions of a conjugated sy stem. addition (o the 1- and 4-positions of a conjugated system. a Saturated or unsaturated organic compound that does not contain an aromatic a compound with two adjacent double bonds. 2 carbon adjacent to an sp" eerbon of a carbon-carbon double bond. a compound with a positive charge on an allylic carbon, a cyclic and planar compound with an uninterrupted cloud of electrons containing an even number of pairs of 7 electrons. the molecular orbital formed when out-of-phase orbitals overlap a molecular orbital that does not have a plane of symmetry but would have if one half of the MO were turned upside down a cyelie and planar compound with an uninterrupted cloud of electrons containil aan odd number of pairs of 7 electrons, :\ carbon, joined to other atoms by single bonds, that is bonded to a benzene Fins 4 compound with a positive charge on a benzylie carbon, the molecular orbital formed when in-phase orbitals overlap. 8 bieyclie compound in which the rings share two nonuadjacent carbon, aan intermediate that reaction pathways have in common, a reaction in whieh all the boxd-makin single step. and breaking processes occur in addition to the 1- and 4-positions of a conjugated system. a compound with two conjugated double bonds. 236 conjugated double bonds contributing resonance structure [442] eyeloaddition reaction: delocalization energ: (resonance energy) delocalized electrons, Alder reaction 2-addition) donation of electrons by resonance fused rings electron deto equilibrium control highest occupi molecular orbital (HOMO) heteroatom heterocyclic compound (heterocycle) iprer8 237 double bonds separated by one si a structure with localized electrons that approximates the true structure of compound with delocalized electrons. double bonds that are adjacent to one another: a reaction in which two ar eleetron-containing reactants combine to form a single cyclic product a cycloaddition reaction in which six a electrons participate in the transition state ith four 7 electrons coming trom one reactant and two 7 electrons coming from the other reactant the extra stability associated with a compound as a result of having delocalized electrons. electrons that are not localized on a single atom or between (wo atoms, a [442] cycloaddition reaction, a hydrocarbon with two double bonds, aan alkene that reacts with a diene in a Diels-Alder reaction, addition to the |- and 2-positions of a conjugated system donation of electrons through = bonds, rings that share two adjacent carbons the sharing of electrons by more than two atoms fa substituent is endo if it and the bri compound, are on opposite sides of a bicyclic thermodynamic control substituent is exo it it and the bridge are on the same side of a bieyclie compound. the highest energy molecular orbital that contains electrons. aan atom other than carbon or hydrogen, a eyclie compound in which one or more of the atoms of the ring are heteroatoms, Copysight © 2014 Pearson taetion, Ie 238 Chapter 8 Hiickel’s rule or the4n + 2rule ‘olated double bonds. kinetic control Kinetic product linear combination of molecular orbitals (LCAO) localized electrons, lowest unoccupied. molecular orbital (LUMO) pheny! group polye polymer polymerization proximity effect resonance resonance contributor (resonance structure) resonance electron donation resonance electron withdrawal resonance energy (delocalization energy) (resonance stabilization energy) rue that gives the number of = electrons a compound must have in its 7 cloud in der to be atom double bonds separated from one another by more than one single bond. when reaction is under kinctie control. the relative amounts of the produets depend on the rates at which they are formed the product that is formed the fastest the combination of atomic orbitals to produce molecular orbitals. cleetrons that are restricted tw a particular Locality the lowest energy molecular orbital that does not contain electrons. a rewetion that takes place in one step ay a result of a eyeli¢ reorganization of electrons. st compound that has several double bonds, ‘a karge molecule made by linking many small molecules together. the process of linking up mary small molecules to form a polymer, an effect caused by one species being close to another. electron delocalization, iclure of a structure with localized electrons that approximates the true st compound with delocalized electrons, donation of electrons through = bonds, withdrawal of e] wctroms throu a bonds. the extra stability ‘compound possesses ay a result of h Copysight © 2014 Peano ideation, Ine resonance hybrid s-cis-conformation separated charges s-trans-conformati symmetric molecular orbital thermodynami thermodynamic product withdrawal of electrons by resonance Chapter8 239 the actual structure of a compound with delocalized electrons: itis represented by ‘hyo or more resonance contributors with localized electrons, the conformation in which two double bonds of a conjugated diene are on the same side of a connecting single bond, a positive and a ne} tive char 1¢ that can both be neutralized by the movement of electrons. the conformation in which two double bonds of a conjugated diene are on opposite Sides of a connectin le bond. ‘an orbital with a plane of symmetry so that one half is the mirror image of the other half when a reaction is ander thermodynamic control, the relative a products depend on t nounts of the cir stabilities, the most stable product. withdrawal of electrons through 7 bonds, Copyright © 2014 arson Flt ne 240 Chapter 8 Solutions to Problems three different monosubstituted compounds are possible, C=CCHSCH:Br a 1. If stereoisomers are not include BiCSCCECCH CH: HC=CCSCCHCH, HC I Br Irstereoisomers are included, four different monosubstituted compounds are possible, because the second listed compound has an sisymmetric center so it can have both the R and S configuration, 2. IF stereoisomers are not included. vo different monosubstituted compounds are possible BiCH=CHC=ccH= Ch=CCSCCH= CH Br Ii stereoisomers are included. three different monosubstituted compounds are possible, because the first compound has a double bond that can have cis-trans isomers b. 1. [stereoisomers are not included. Hive different disubstituted compounds are possible MeSecSccHctiBr, HE=CC=CCBACH, HCCC CCHCH Br Br BICSCCSCCHCH;Br BIC CHCH, Br [stereoisomers are not ineluded, five different disubstituted compounds are possible ce cc cHBr CH cHbe 1. I’ sterevisomers are included. seven different disubstituted compounds are possible. because 160) of the compounds have ayymmetrie centers s9 each can have either the R or S conliguration. If stereoisomers are included. nine different disubstituted compounds, use the second and third compounds can have cis-trens isomers, and the fifth compound ean have cis-cis. fruns-trans, and cis-trans isomers. (Note that cis-trans is the same as trans-cis.| ¢ possible, be Ladenbury benzene is a better propos IL would form one monosubstituted compound and three disubst: tuted compounds, in aecordance with what early chemists knew about the structure of benzene. nee Ta Se Ne Copycight © 2014 Pearson Keaton. I Chapter 8241 Dewar benzene is not in accordance with what early chemists knew about the structure of benzene, because it would form two monosubstituted compornds and six disubstituted compounds, and it would undergo electrophilic addition reactions. or cd Br Br Br Br TD. Be Br a, 2,4, and 5 have delocalized electrons. I does not have delocalized electrons, because 7 clectrons cannot be moved toward an sp" carbon. 3, 6, and 7 do not have delocalized electrons, because lone-pair electrons cannot be moved toward an sp* carbon, a * 2 cucH=cu—cnZcu™ ey cHycH—ct H—CH=CH, ‘The resonance contributor that makes th B contributes less to the hybrid than A. and C contributes less to the hybrid than B. Solved in the text <9 oO Ais more stable than B because B has separated i I charges and has a postive charge on an oxygen. A + b. cud “Scr cue Sden, A 8 A is more stable than B because the negative charge in isonanoxygen, whereasthe negativein Bison carbon, which is less electronegative than oxygen. Copyeigh © 204 Pearson Faction, tne 242 Chapter 8 a) Ais more stable than B, because A YQ. doesnot hve spud cages A 8 Ais more stable than B, because the positive charge in A is on a less pe cg) oe cu? “Kuen, elesroneativ tr, (Ns os . KN electronegative than 0.) t cH CHCH, A and B are equally stable \ B & on Ba CH=CH CHCH, Axe i cH NHCH CH 3 o b xs f cHCH= cH CHCH, cue “OCH, a, All the carbon-oxygen bonds in the carbonate ion should be the same length. because euch earbon- ‘oxygen bond is represented in one resonance contributor by a double bond and in two resonance co tributors by at single bond, ° o v I as | — I c Le. Ue. om oO ait rents, each oxygen will have (wor Less stable, becuuse the positive charge is shared hy two primary allylic carbons, CHCH;CH CHS CH, => CHCHCH— CH=CH; More stable. because the povitive charge is shared by a primary ally ie and a secondary allylic carbon, Copy zight #204 Peay Eduction, ln Chapter8 243 ° o So | . b. CHC“ CH=CH +—» CH;C=CH—CH) Less stable, beeause the positive charge is on a primary allylie carbon, CH—CHCHy is om a secondary allylic carbon. More stable, because the positive cha q fe. cHCH— CH=CH, Less stable, because the negative charge is not delocalized co ° fay i CHC ECHCH, = CHC @ucn, More stable, because the negative charge iy delocalized on Less stable, because the positive charge fs shared by an O and an N. NHS - CH =NH More stable, because the positive charge iy shared by two nitrogens. Nitrogen is less electronegative than oxygen. so nitrogen is more comtoriable with a positive charge 8 The second species has the greatest delocalization energy: it has three resonance contributors and none of them have separated charges. (See the answer to Problem 6.) ‘The first species is the next most stable has two resonance contributors, charges. nd none of them has separated he third species has the smallest delocalization energy: it has two resonance contributors, one of which thas separated charges. 9 a. Inthe case of 9 pairs of w electrons, there are I8 electrons. Therefore, 4 + 2 = 18 where # = 1b, Because it has an odd number of pairs of 7 electrons. it will be aromatic if it is eyelic and planar, and iff every atom in the ring has a p orbital 10, a SJ Thisis the only one thats aromas itis eyclie planar every rng atom has ap orbital, and it has one pair of electrons. The first compound is not aromatic, because one of the atoms is sp" hybridized and there- fore does not have a p orbital ‘The third compound is not aromatic, be Ie it has two pairs of a electrons, Copytight © 2014 Pearson Fado Ie M4 Chapter 8 b, ZX, This isthe only one that is aromatic: its eyelie, planar, every ring atom has a p orbital. and ) it has three pairs of = electrons The first compound is not aromatic, because one of the atoms is sp* hybridized and therefore does not have a p orbital ‘The third compound is not aromatic, hecause it has four pairs of 7 electrons, Solved in the text Only e is aromatic. € is aromatic, because it is eyelie, phunar, every atom in the ring has a p orbital, and it hay seven pains of 7 electrons. iy not aromatic. because it hay two pairs of 7 electrons, aa, b, and d are not aromatic, because each compound has two pairs of 7 ring does not have a p orbital sclrons andl every atom in the Fis not aromatic, because it iy not eyelie. move toward ze predicted a, In Tulvene, the electrons in the exocyelie double bond (a double bond attached 10 the five-membered ring, because the resonance contributor that results hay relatively lar em — Dem b. In calicene, the electrons in the double bond beween the Ovo ri}gs move toward the tiv ring. because that results in a resonance contributor with two aromatic rings. ei ” ? Lap Lye ony 2014 Pear Eesti, Chapter8 245 16, ‘The lone-pair electrons in A and D are sp" electrons; therefore, they are not part of the 7 cloud. ‘The lone-pair electrons on B and C are 7 electrons and are part of the a cloud. Thus, B has three pairs of ar electrons and C has five pairs of a electrons, making them aromatic compounds. If these 7 electrons are protonated, they will no longer be part of the 77 cloud (they cannot be delocalized) and the compounds will not be aromatic 17. a, ‘The nitrogen atom (the atom atthe bottom of the epm) in pyrrole has a partial positive change because it donates electrons by resonance into the ring b. The nitrogen atom (the atom at the bottom of the epm) in pyridine cannot donate electrons by reso- nance: it withdraws electrons from the ring inductively because it i the most electronegative atom in the molecule. Thus, this nitrogen is electron rich. The relatively electronegative nitrogen atom in pyridine withdraws electrons from the ring, 18. a. Cyclopentadiene has a lower pX, value, That is, itis a stronger acid, When cyclopentadiene loses a proton, a relatively stable aromatic compound is formed. When cycloheptatriene loses a proton, an unstable antiaromatic compound is formed (Section 8.11). Recall that the more stable the base, the stronger its conjugate acid, ( \ ff - + oH A Pe H antiaromatic b. Cyclopropane has a lower p&, value because a very unstable antiaromatic compound is formed when Yo YY Vor fe WW antiaromatic Copyright © 2014 Pear doction, Ine M6 Chapter 8 19, 3-Bromocyclopropene is more soluble in water because itis more apt to ionize since an aromatic compound is formed when its carbon-bromine bond breaks. . + Br - ite Br 20. ix amtiaromatic, because it is eyelic. planar, every atom in the ring hay a p orbital, and it has two pairs of electrons. When you did Problem 12, you found that ¢ is aromatic a,b. d,and fare neither aromatic nor antiaromatic, a, band d have ring atoms that do not have p orbitals, and Fis not cyclic 21. Cyclobutadiene has one bonding molecular orbital, two nonbonding molecular orbitals. and one antibond= ing molecular orbital. It has four 7 electrons; two 7 electrons are in the bonding 7 molecular orbital, and each of the two nonbonding molecular orbitals conta.ns one 7 electron, 22, Iti not possible for an atom that bears a single electron to be part of the 7 cloud Remember that to be aromatic. all the bonding MOs that make up the 7 cloud must be filled (each contain ing two electrons) and there must be no partially filled orbitals. Since a radical has an unpaired electron, there will be an orbital with a single electron (a partially tilled MO), s0 it cannot be aromatic. (A radical can, however, be attached to an aromatic compound, For example. the ben7y radical has a methylene radi- cal attached 10 an aromatic benzene ring.) The Frost cireles show that species with completely filled bonding MOs. and with elvetrons in no other orbitals, are aromatic (For example, the eycloheptatrienyl eation and the eyelopropeny! cation cycloheptatrieny! cation teyelopropeny! cation ‘The species with unpaired electrons in degenerate MOs is antiaromatic (the eyeloheptattienyl anion), eyeloheptatrieny anion Copyrighe 014 Peano Esti, I 24. 25. 26. 28, Chapters 247 ‘The smaller the heat of hydrogenation (the pasitive value of AH°), the more stable the compound. ‘Therefore. the relative stabilities of the dienes are conjugated diene > isolated diene > cumulated diene Hy at cH I I CHC CHCH=CCH, > CH\CH=CHCHCHCH, > CHyCH=CHCH=CH, » CH= CHCHCH hexaiene 2A-heradiene 1.3-pentudiene 1¢-pentadiene 2.S.alimethyl-2, a. The compound with delocalized electrons is more stable than the compound in which all the electrons are localized. a _CHCHy of —C O A Net 4 cleetrons are delocalized clectrons are localized b Because nitrogen is less electronegative than oxygen, itis better able to share the positive charge cHOTCH, + CHO CHLAH™ CH, ++ CHNH=CH, more stable €. In order for electron delocalization to ovcur, the atoms that share the 2 electrons must be in the same plane so their p orbitals can overlap, The two bulky tert-butyl groups do not allow enough room for the group with the positively charged carbon to be in the same plane as the benzene ring. Therefore, the carbocation cannot be stabilized by clectron delocalization because the p orbital of the positively charged carbon cannot overlap the p orbitals of the benzene ring since they are not in the same plane \é « re eK more stable tr orbital of {,3-butadiene has three nodes (two vertical and one horizontal) bu Phe ds molecu lar orbital of 1,3-butadiene has four nodes (three vertical and one horizontal). ‘The wis mole antibonding molecular orbitals. a. hand ify are bonding molecular orbitals, and yy and isymmetrie molecular orbitals Be dry and ts ure symmetric molecular orbitals, and ify and wey are a ¢. dry is the HOMO and yy is the LUMO in the ground state. gris the HOMO and q, is the LUMO in the excited state fe. I'the HOMO is symmetric, the LUMO is antisymmetric, and vice versa, The MO of benzene is more stable because it hus six bonding interactions, whereas the MO of 1,3.-hexatriene has five bonding interactions. > 2014 Peas tion. Ine Copyriem U8 30, Chapter 8 In each case, the compound shown is the stronger acid because the negative charge that results when it loses, 41 proton can be delocalized. El ization stabilizes the base and the more stable the base, the mote aeidie ity conjugate acid. Electron delocalization is not possible for the other compound in each pair iron deloca i t 4 + S a cH Sow - oH s+ cng So HO =~ CH,CHCH b. CHyCH=CHOH ——* HY + CHSCH CHCH=CHRH, —- HY + CHYCH=CHNH, = CH.CHCH Ethylumine is a stronger base because when the lone pair on the nitrogen in aniline iy protonated. i ean no longer be delocalized into the benzene ring, Therefore, aniline is less pt to share its electrons with a proton, b. Ethoxide ion is a stron: n iy a stronger base than a neutral cr have because a negatively charged ox ¢. Ethoxide ion is a stronger base because when the phenola is protonated ean no longer be delocalized into the benzene tis apt to share ity electrons with a proton. ion is protonated. the pair of electrons that Therefore. the phenolate ion is less The carboxylic avid is the most acidic because its conjugate base has greater delocalization energy than does the conjugate base of phenol. The alcohol is the least acidic because, unlike the neyative charge on the i¢ buse of phenol, the negative charge on the conjugate base of the alcohol cannot be delocalized, ° I |. Solved in the text ‘ctron withdrawal by the methoxy group will make ita stronger acid (because it will niake the conjugate base weaken), Electron donation by the methoxy group will make it a weaker acid (because it will make the conjugate base stronger) ‘The pK; values show that the methoxy substituted acid isa weaker acid (it has a kurger pA’, value), Therefore, \we know that resonance electron donation is more important effect than inductive elvetvon withdrawl Recall that. if a more stable carbocation can be formed as @ result of earboe, Hn rearmgement, rearrange: ment will occur. 5 \ A i é a CHyCH=CH. . \ SCI, wa © cicten secondary carbocation secondary bens ylie cation —CrICHCy Br Copsrigh ©2114 Peay ction. he Chapter 8 249 36. a. Solved in the text b. The contributing resonance structures show that there are two sites that can be protonated, the lone pair (on nitrogen or the lone pair on carbon, OS" OO 37, a. The more reactive double bond is the one that forms a tertiary carbocation, cH I Hy cHeI CHCH;CHSCH;C—CH; ———* CH. at Instead of Br’ being the nucleophile that adds to the tertiary carbon, the a bond can be the nucleo- phile. In that case, a stable six-membered ring will be formed. (See the Problem-Solving Strategy on Page 260 of the text.) This iy expected to be a minor product because, unlike the above reaction of the carbocation with Br-, bond breaking is required to form the product. CHy (Hs CH; : Cr —chh O — chy city cae cH Sey, 7 cue Seren,” Sey | | nN B a, Ithas eight molecular orbitals be dh. ths ty, and dh, are bonding molecular orbitals: hs. Ys rs and Ware antibonding molecular orbitals Ve dhs ths, an yy are symmetsic molecular orbitals ts. dy, Wo. and ty are antisymmetric molecular orbitals 4. iy is the HOMO and gf is the LUMO in the ground state. €. isis the HOMO and if, is the LUMO in the excited state {Ifthe HOMO is symmetric, the LUMO is antisymmetric, and vice versa 4 Ithay seven nodes between the nuclei, Italso has one node that passes through the nuclei. 10) eae Zlaus x The reaction of 1,3-cyctohexadiene with Brs forms 3.4-dibromocyclohexene as the 1,2-addition product and 3,6-dibromocyclohexene as the |4-addition product. (Recall that in naming the compounds, the double bond is at the 1.2-position.) The reaction of 1,3-cyelohexadiene with HBr forms only 3-bromocyclohexene, so itis both the 1,2-addition product and the I 4-addition product. br ~ $-tibremoeyetohexene ) 1naddtion product 1 3-cyclohexadiene $-bromocyelohenene 1,2-addition product 14-addition product Copy sigh M14 Pes Bloat, Ie 266 Chapter 8 86, a, Only part a involves the reaction of two unsymmetrically substituted reactants. Theretore. only for parta do we need to look at the charge distribution in the reactants to determine the major product of the reaction, Che OL Qo eC ys S an aX \ ax CHCO.CHy eel 87, Numbering the carbons in the conjugated system will help you determine the 1.2- and 1 4-uddition products. a. ‘O + By 2 oH (Copyright© 2018 Peso Elation I Chapter8 267 CH; Br. CHy 2 O sme — | a Br Cis C + Mer — : A 3 eo BS Ch es H0o~ CH or = om Ho erty cH 3 i 7 _ San, 88. cH, MY. CHyCHCH=CHCH=CH, + eee CH,CH=CHCHCH=CH, + CHyCH=CHCH=CHCH,Br B opr c 1b, A will predominate if the reaction is under kinetic control because it is the 1,2-product and, therefore, will be the produet tormed most rapidly as a result of the proximity effect, In addition, A will be the 1.2-produet regardless of which end of the conjugated system reacts with the electrophile. C will predominate if the reaction is under thermodynamic control because itis the most stable diene {tis the most substituted conjugated diene.) 89. The diene is the nucleophile, and the dienophile is the electrophile in a Diels-Alder reaction, An electron-donating substituent in the diene would increase the rate of the reaction, because electron donation would inerease its nucteophiliity b. An clectron-donating substituent in the dienophile would decrease the rate of the reaction, because electron donation would decrease its eleetrophi Copysight © 2014 Pearson Elation oe: 268 Chapter 8 ¢. An electron-withdrawing substituent in the diene would decrease the rate of the reaction, because electron withdrawal would decrease its nucleophilicity 90, Addition of an electrophile to C-1 forms a carbocation with (wo resonance contributors, a rertiany allylic cation and a secondary allylic cation. Addition of an electrophile to C-4 forms a carbocation with two resonance contributors. a tertiary allylic cation and a primary allylic cation. Therefore, addition to C-1 results in formation of the more stable carbocation intermediate, and the more stable inermadite lea the major pts cit ath ons ciy=e—C=cnen, Lone Cenc —+ cHse= CCH, ay oi, on, . Is cl cts cit, ciye—Cecnct cake Cc bik on b. Addition of an electrophile to C-1 forms a cartocation with two resonance contributors: both are tertiary allylic cations. Addition of an electrophile to C-$ forms a carbocation with (wo resonance ‘contributors. a secondary atiytic cation and a primary alfylic vation, Therefore. aulition 0 C1 results in formation of the more stable carbocation. Only one product is formed. bees symmet use the carbocation is cH; CH= CCH; This is the only product because the carbocation is symmetrical Copyright 2014 Pearson Even Ine Chaper8 269 91 aundd. : e XS Progress of the re ‘The 2nd. 3rd, and 4th resonance contributors in € are more stable than those resonance contributors nb, because in b a positive charge is on the most electronegative atom (the oxygen) and there is ‘charge separation, Therefore, the phenolate ion has greater electron delocalization than phenol ‘Thus, as shown in the energy diagram, the difference in energy between the phenolate ion and the cyclohexoxide ion is greater than the difference in energy between phenol and cyclohexanol. Because of greater electron delocalization in the phenolate ion compared to that in phenol, phenol has a larger K, than eyelohexanol. Because it hay a larger K, (a lower pX,), phenol is a stronger acid Copysigh © 2014 Pearson Eduction, In 270 Chapter 8 92. 93, Aniline has greater electron delocalization than the anilinium ion, Thus in the energy diagram, the difference in cnergy between aniline and cyclorexylamine is greater than the difference in energy between the anilinium ion and the cyelohexylammonium ion Because of greater electron delocalization in aniline compared to that ith ion has a larger X, than the eyclohexylammonium ion. Because ithasa larger K, (a lower pK,). the anilinium ion is astronger acid than the eyelohexylammoniun ion. Therefore, eyclohexylamine is stronger base than aniline, (The stronger the aeid. the weaker its conjugate base.) SS Because the reaction creates an asymmetric center in the product, the product will be a racemie mixture, ‘Copyright © 2014 Pear Eatin, Ine 4. 95. ¢. Looking at where the partial positive Chapter8 271 A con or Even though both reactants are unsymmetrically Because the reaction ereates an substituted, they will be aligned primarily as asymmetric center, the product shown, because of the relatively stable tertiary will be a racemie mixture. benzylic cation and delocalization of the a electrons of the dienophile onto the oxygen. aire in the wo resonance hybrids of the diene shows that the resonance hybrid with the positive charge shared by a primary and a tertiary carbon is more stable. In the dienophile, a primary carbanion is more stable than a primary earboeation would be. ct“ ‘oto ‘more stable ‘more stable ‘Therefore, the major product is the | 4-disubstituted product. Because the reaction creates an asymmetric center, the product will be a racemic mixture. wore nucleophilic diene and the more ‘The first pair is the preferred set of reagents because it hay the clectrophilic dienophile, ( XX A Diels-Alder reaction is a reaction between a nucleophilic diene and an electrophilic dienophile. ‘a, The compound shown below is more resctive in both I and 2, because electron delocalization in- creases the electrophilicity of the dienophile. ° I CH=CH 272 Chapter 8 b. The compound shown below is more reactive, because electron delocalization increases the nucleophilicity of the diene. CH cH—cH CH OCH, ° cal bb ; ON + i Nw uN - aon 98a. cH cH ‘Ye dso. pe Copyright ©2014 Peuron Fulvio, I Chapter8 273 99, The electrophile can add to either end of the conjugated system. Adding the electrophile to one end forms, A-and B: adding the electrophile to the other end forms Cand B. br a Cr - Ce , A~cHBr . cre br br b. A has (wo asymmettie centers but only two stereoisomers are obtained, because only anti addition of 7 \ Cane B hay four stereoisomers because it hay an asymmetric center and a double bond that ean be in either the E or Z configuration Noone, ee, A - - Lhe C has two stereoisomers because it has one asymmetric center. Br Bre Ht Hee cre cree Copyright © 2014 Pearson Fauation I 24 100, 101. Chapter 8 nach has one asymmetric center. each ean have either the R Nine of the compounds are shown below. Sing or S configuration, Therefore, 18 different products can be obtained, ‘The 3.4:bond oF The 1.2-bondl of 1.3-Butadiene is 2-amethy!1 ee 2methyl-1,3-butadiene the eleetrophile is the elecirophile cu 1 3-Butaene i my theuttephite ° Ke Aaa He 2-Maty 3 butadiene J [row is the nucleaphile \4 WS tte ponon fron top) 2-Methy-13-butaiene isthe micigophte en (the 4-position is on Top) ( — “CH, ee ANY ain ait 2-Methyl-1,3-pentadiene (with conjugated double bonds) is more stable than 2-methyle1-pentadiene (with isolated double bonds). The rate-limiting step of the reaction iy formation of the carbocation intermediate. 2-Methyl-1.3-pentadiene torms more stable carbocation intermediate than does 2-methyl-I 4-pentadie Since the more stable reactant forms the of activation for the rate-limiting steps of the (wo reactions depend on whether the difference in the stabilities of the reactants is greater o less than the difference in the stubilities of the Wansition states eding to formation of the carbocation intermediates (which depend on the difference in stabilities of the carbocation intermediates), There is a significant difference in the stabilities of the curhocation interm ates because one is stabilized by electron delocalization and one is not. The transitions states look more like the carbocation intermediates than line the slkenes, Therefore, the difference in the stabilities of the reactants is less than the ditference in the stabilities of the transition states. so the rate of reaetion of HBr with 2-methyl-1,3-pentadiene is the faster reaction, (If the difference in the stabilities of the reactants had been greater than the difference in the stabilities of she transition states, the rate of reaction of HBr with 2-methyl-1.4-pentadiene would have been the faster reaction.) nore stable carbocation intermediate. the relative free energies Copyright © 2014 Pearwn Eatin ne Hy Gn HCH; WM CHCCHCHCH, CHC CHCHCH, 2-methyl-1 3-pontadiene ae | ve om ay cuecu=cucn, cuse=cuenicr, br Br 4Hbromo-d-methyl-2-pentene _ 4-bromo-2-methy-2-pentene cH, Hy | he cH. CCHCH=CHy + CHCCHSCH=CH: 2-methyl-1 4-pentadiene : 4-bromo--methyl-L-pentene Aromo-4 methyl-Lpentene 4-bromo-t-methyl-2-pe Prygress of the reaetion mal 102. His reerystallization was not successful. Becau 1ophile, it reacts with eyelopen- tadiene in a Diels-Alder reaction, c anhydride isa di ° NL oo — FP ot 7 Le endo oxo ° 103. We saw in Problem 102 that maleic anhydride r anhydride in this reaction is to remove cyclopentadiene. since removal of a product driv toward products, (See Le Chatelier’s principle on page 208 of the text.) wets with cyelopentadiene. The function of maleic the equilibrium sarbon of a double bond, 104. ‘The bridgehead carbon cannot have the 120° bond angle required for the 9 because iF it did, the compound would be too strained to exist Copyright 9 2014 Pearson actin, Ie 276 Chapter $ 105. Unless the reaction is being carried out under kinetic contro}, the amount of product obtained is not dependent on the rate at which the product is formed. so the relative amounts of producty obtained will not tell you which product was formed faster. b. Ina thermodynamieally controlled reaction. the product distribution depends on the relative stabili~ ties of the products because the products come to equilibrium, Therefore, if the distribution of prod- ucts does not reflect the relative stabilities of the products. the reaction must have been kinetically controlled, 106. 107. a. The three resonance contributors marked with an X are the least stable, because in these contributors the two negative charges are on adjacent carbons, b, Because these contributors are the least stable. they make the smallest contribution to the hybrid. 108. We have classified cyclobutadiene as antiaromatic, However. the recent observation that eyclobuta- diene is rectangular and the observation that there ure two different 1.2-dideuterio-I.3-cyelobutadienes both indicate that the 7 electrons are localized rather than delocalized. Localization of the 7 electrons prevents the compound from being antiaromatic. Apparently. the extreme instability aysociated with being antiaromatic causes eyclobutadiene to be rectangular Copyright 912014 Pour Fal: Chapter$ 277 Chapter 8 Practice Test For each of the following pairs of compounds, indicate the one that is the more stable: 7 Can 7 (an 4. ciy=ciity oF cH =CHCH, CH, b. CHyCHCHs or CH;CHC=CH e cr HCHs on ° ° i Il I Ne S ~ lt ¢ CHyCHCH;CCH; or CHyCHCCHy Draw reyonance contributors foreach of the following a. CHCH=CH—ScH, b. CHyCH=CH—CH=CH—CH> © ee. CHy—CH=CH—CH Which compounds do not have delocalized electrons? cH CH,CH)NHCH=CHCH, — CHsCCH;CH=CHy CH >==CHCH,C! Ff What are the products of each of the following reactions? bo MC. ? + queer, | — ~S ch Which of the following pairs are resonance contributors? e a a. CHLEHOH and CHHOCH, — CLO and CHAE =O a 0 ° a be CHCOH and cHCO 4. CHCHLH and cH;cH=CH Copyright © 2014 Peano Education, Ine 28 6. 0, Chapter 8 Which of the following dienes can be used in a Diels-Alder reaction? LM; aN Cy Z~o~ [ . . LA A, Las Which is a stronger base’? wns or © Smit Draw resonance contributors for each of the followin, Nn, Which resonance contributor makes a greater contribution to the resonance hybrid? i oO CH; CHy Indicate whether each of the following statements is true or false 8. A compound with four conjugated double bonds has four molecular orb TOF b. hand dy are symmettie molecular orbitals 1 If) is the HOMO in the ground state, py will he the HOMO in the excited sate, TF 4. Uf is the LUMO, ty will be the HOMO. TOF If the ground-state HOMO is symmetric, the ground-state LUMO vill be antisymmetric. ue Copysit 204 Poor Edin, 12, 4 Chapter 8-279 fA conjugated diene ix more stable than an isomeric-isolated diene. TOF g Asingle bond formed by an sp°—sp? overlap is longer than a single bond formed by an sp’—sp" overlap. TOF h. ‘The thermodynamically controlled product is the major produet obtained when the reaetion is carried out under mild conditions. T i. 1,3-Hexadiene is more stable than 1.4-hexadiene. y Draw the four products that would be obtained from the following reaction. Ignore stereoisomers. ‘What reactants are necessary for the synthesis of the following compound via a Diels-Alder reaction? chy og CCH, oy ‘Two 1.2-produets and two 4-products ean be obtained from the following reaction: xan ( +H 7 a Which are the predominant 1.2- and 14-products? b. Which of the products is the product of thermodynamic control? What reagents could be used to convert the given starting n terial into the given product? CConynight 8 2014 Parson El 280 16. 18, W, 20. Chapter 8 Drav the product of the following reaction. showing its conliguration HOOC, coon Vf For cach of the following reaetions, give the major 1.2-and 1.4-products, Label the product of kinetie con ‘vol and the product of thermodynamic control Hs a. CH)=CH-C=CHy + HCL Which are aromatic compounds? ~~ FV Tm y C) is © Which are antiaromatic compounds? TOOoOr7OH ¥ \~ Which compound has the greater delocalization energy? Copycigh © 2014 Pearson Eduction. I SPECIAL TOPIC 11 Molecular Orbital Theory and the reae- Chemists use models to describe such things as the bonding in molecules, the stability of molecule: tions between molecules. The model used is generally the one that provides the best description of the molecule under consideration, One very powerful model is molecular orbital theory. You were introduced to molecular orbital (MO) theory in Section 1.6 where you saw that electrons are assigned. to a volume of space called an orbital, According to MO theory, covalent bonds are formed when atomic orbitals combine to form molecular orbitals. Let's review some important principles: 1. Orbitals are conserved. In other words. the number of molecular orbitals formed must equtal the number of alomie orbitals combined. For example, when two atomic orbitals overlap. two molecular orbitals are formed—one lower in energy (a bonding MO) and one higher in energy (an antibonding MO, indi- cated by a *) than the overlapping orbitals, 2, Flectrons always occupy the available atomic orbitals with the lowest energy, and no more than two electrons can occupy an atomie orbital. Similarly, electrons always occupy the available molecular or- ‘italy with the lowest energy. and no more than two electrons can occupy a molecular orbital. 3. The relative energies of the molecular orbitals are @ <7 < * <0 4, The strongest covalent bonds are formed by electrons that occupy the molecular orbitals with the low- est energy. For example. the enetgy of a ¢ MO is lower than that of a 7 MO. and we have seen that a a bond is stronger than a ar bond (Section 1.15). There are two ways atomic orbitaly can overlap to form molecular orbitals: these are shown in Figures ¥ and 2 In Figure I. each of the overlapping atomic orbitals contributes one electron to the bond. In Figure 2, filled stomie ‘orbital (it has two electrons) overlaps an empty atomic orbital. In each case, we see that the electrons are stabilized {are lower in energy) as a result of orbital overlap. antibonding MO antibonding MO . fos ~ e | | # 4 a T 1 a yy tL + I i bonding MO. bonding MO Figure 1. Each of the overlapping atomic orbitals. Figure 2. A bond is formed ay a result of the overlap, contributes one electron to the bond, of filled atomie orbital with an empty atomic orbital. 1 Theory to Describe Covalent Bond Formation Using Mole ls Contributes One Electron to the Bond 1. Each of the Overlapping Atomic Orbit “Take a look at Figure 1.4 on page 25 of the text. There you can see that an H—H bond is formed by the overlap of a 1s atomic orbital of a hydrogen atom with a Ly atomic orbital of another hydrogen atom: each of the atomic orbitals contributes one electron to the molecular orbital 281 Copyrit © 2014 Pearson Fact, Ie 282 Special Topic It Figure 3 shows that the C—C bond in ethane is formed by the overlap of an sp" atomiie orbital of carbon with aun sp* atomic orbital of another carbon: again, each of the overlapping atomic orbitaly contributes one electron to the bond, Figure + shows that the C—H bond of ethane is formed by the overlap of un yp° atomic orbital of earbon with an s atomic orbital of hydrogen, Because an y atomic orbital of hydrogen is more stable than an sp atomic orbital of carbon (see page 29 of the text), the MO formed by sp'—s overlap is more stable than the MO formed by sp'—sp? overlap, As a result, the C—H bond is stronger (and shorter) than the C—C bond. Ce QD | ° antibonding MO orbital g bonding MO Figure 3. The C—C bond of ethane is formed by sp'—sp' overlap. Ce C) q No) o" antibonding MO = i 2H +2 Figure 4. A C—H bond of ethane is formed by sp'—» overlap. ire 5 shows that the two sp* atomic orbitals that overlap to form the C—O bond of an alcohol or of an ether ddo not have the same energy. An electron is more stable in the atomic orbital of the more electronegative atom. Thus, the C—O bond is. little stronger and shorter than the C—C bond. Coppi ©2014 Pear Eaton Special Topic M283 antibonding MO a | Oe ° 5 | Figure 5. ‘The C—O bond of an ether or of an alcohol is formed by sp*—yp" overlap. omic orbital of earbon with ide overlap of two p orbit- Figure 6 shows that the C—C or bond of ethene is Formed by the overlap of an 9p” aan 9p" atomic orbital of another carbon, The 7 bond ef ethene is formed by the side- aly (see Figure 1.5 on page 26 of the text), A zr molecular orbital is less stable than ao molecular orbital. The 77 bond. therefore, is weaker than the bond. gure 1.6 on page 27 of the text to see the molecular orbitals, that are Formed when the overlapping p orbitals do not each belong to the same kind of atom antibonding MO jet +e S| sy? atomic sp? atomic 3S igure 6, ‘The CC bond of ethene is formed by sj sp" overlap. HL. A Filled Atomic Orbital Overlaps an Empty Atomic Orbital to Form a Bond The overlap of a lilled atomic orbital with an empty atomic orbital is the second way two atomic orbitals can over- lap to form a bond (Figure 2), For example, the bond formed between a Lewis base (such as NHy) and a Lewis acid (such as FeBry) results from the base sharing « pair of electrons with the acid. Bond formation results from the overlap of a filled sp* of iron. This type of reaction is discussed in Section 2.12 of the text oxbital of nitrogen with an empty orbi Bou | BPN Bron Capps 920 Pearson Facto, le 284 Special Topie I Using Molecular Orbital Theory to Describe Chemical Reactions, We have seen that most organic reactions involve the react on of a nucleophile with an electrophile. Molecular orbital theory describes a reaction between a nucleophile ard an electrophile as occurring ay the result of the in- teraction of the HOMO {highest oecupied MO) of the nucleophile with the LUMO (lowest unoccupied MO) of the electrophile, because the most stabilizing interaetion is between orbitals closest in energy. Notice tht in these examples. i filled orbital overlaps an empty orbital. The interaction of a filled orbital with an empty orbital is sta- bilizing. because the two electrons involved in bond formation end up in the lower-energy bonding MO and no electrons have to be phiced in an antibonding MO (Figure 7), / fewest /t 4h ee th MOs of the MOs of the raucleophile eletrophile Figure 7, The interaction of the HOMO of the nucleophile with the LUMO of the electrophile, -action of 2-butene with HBr, an electrophilic addition reaction we first exam= We willl sart by looking at the in Section 5.6. HCH; + HBr > CHACH—CHSCH, + = SS cHCH—cH br In the first step of the reaction, the alkene isthe nucleophile: the electrons of the 7 bond are in the 7 bonding MO: this is the HOMO, HBr is the eleetrophile. The electrons that form the HBr bond are in a or bonding MO. There- fore. the LUMO of HBr is the # antibonding MO (Figure 8) —\o CH ; at ao HBr /LUMO \ / / OM ae toc Howe to CBr i 7 Figure 8, Interaction of the HOMO of the alkene with re 9, Interaction of the HOMO of Br~ with the the LUMO of HBr LUMO of the earbocation, 11.1 2014 Pour Fate Special Topic 285 In the second step of the reaction, Br is the nucleophile; its HOMO is a filled nonbonding sp* orbital. The carbo- ‘sation isthe electrophile; the LUMO is carbon’ empty p orbital (Figure 9) In Section 9.1 ofthe text, we use MO theory to explain why the alkyl halide in an Sy2 reaction undergoes ba side attack, resulting in inversion of configuration, The filled nonbonding orbital of the nucleophile is the HOMO. ‘The LUMO of the electrophilic alky! halide is the o* antibonding MO, which has its largest lobe at the back of the «carbon in the C—Br bond. so this is where overlap is best. (See Figure 9.| on page 406 of the text.) In Section 16.5 of the text, we use MO theory to explain how a nucleophile reacts with a carbonyl group to form a tetrahedral species. Once again the reaction results from the interaction of the HOMO of the nucleophile and the LUMO of the electrophile. In this case, a filled nonbonding orbital of the nucleophile is the HOMO and the LUMO is the 77° antibonding orbital of the carbonyl group. The 7* antibonding orbital is largest at the carbon atom. so this is where the nucleophile overlaps. (Sce Figure 16.2 on page 733 of the text.) Molecular Orbital Theory and Delocalized Electrons Molecular orbital theory is useful to describe compounds with delocalized electrons. For example. in Section 6.2 ‘we saw that tertiary carbocations are more stable than secondary carbocations, which are more stable than primary carbocations, because the electrons in a filled « bond are delocalized by overlapping the empty p orbital of the positively charged carbon, (See Figure 6.1 on page 239 of the text.) This kind of electron delocalization is known as hyperconjugation; itis one more example of the stabilization that results when a filled orbital overlaps an empty orbital Molecular orbital theory avoids having to use contributing resonance structures, because the electrons in the most stable MO are delocalized over the entire molecule, For example, in Section 8.14, we saw that 1.3-butadiene is more stable than 1.4-pentadiene, because the 7 electrons in |.3-butadiene are delocalized over four sp” carbons, whereas the intervening methylene group in I.4-pentadiene prevents the p orbitals of C-2 and C-4 from overlap- ping, Thus the 7 electrons of 1.4-pentadiene are localized, causing its molecular orbitals to have the same energy as thove of ethene—another compound with localized electrons. (See page 359 of the text.) intervening methylene group 1,3-butadiene |.4-pemtadiene Let's now look at the molecular orbitals of the allyl cation, the ally! radical, and the allyl anion. CH;=CH—CH, CH) =CH—CH, cH. the allyl cation the allyl radical the ally! anion cH GH Copysihn © 2014 Pearson Eduction, Ie 286 Special Topie IT The three p atomic orbitals of the three allyl carbons combine to produce three * molecular orbitals (Figure 10) 2 8 a RQ oh 4 ‘stone otbitals allyl cation allyl radical allyl anion x molecular orbitals 2 ° : igure 10. The distribution of the electrons in the molecular orbitals of the allyl cation, she ally! radical, and the allyl anion, ‘The bonding MO (#/,} encompasses the three carbons, In an acyclic system. the number of bonding MOs always equals the number of antibonding MOs. Therefore. when there is an odd number af MOy. one of them must be a nonbonding molecular orbital: hs is the nonbonding MO. We have seen (Section 8.14) that as the energy of the MO increases, the number of nodes increases. Consequently #3 must have a node—in addition to the one that dy has that bisects the p orbitals. The only symmetrical position for a node to pass through in as iy through the middle rbon, You also know that it needs to pass through the middle carbon because that is the only way Wy can be fully antisymmetric, which it must be since thy and qs are symmetric. (Recall that MOs alternate between being sy metric and antisymmetric; Section 8.14.) You can see why ty is called a nonbonding molecular orbital—there is no overlap between the p orbital on the middle carbon and the p orbital on either of the end carbons, Notice that a nonbonding MO hiss the sume energy as the isolated p atomic orbitals. The third MO (3) is an antibending MO, The two w electrons of the allyl cation are in the bonding MO, which means they are spread out over all three carbons, Consequently. the two carbon-carbon bonds are identical. with each having some double-bond character The resonance contributors show that the positive charge is shared equally by the end carbon atoms, which is an- ‘other way of showing that the stability of the ally! cation is due to electron delocalization. cH cHu—CH. Cy — CH=CH The contributing resonance structures show that when a nucleophile such as Br reacts with an allyl cation, the Br can bond to either of the end carbons—because they share the positive ehiarge—but cannot bond to the middle carbon, Likewise, MO theory shows that only the end carbons have an empty orbital with which the filled orbital of Br- can overlap. The central carbon has a node so there can be no interaction with this carbon, The allyl radical has two electrons in the bonding MO, so these electrons are spread over al three carbon atoms. The third clectron isin the nonbonding MO, ‘The MO diagram shows that the third electron is shared equally by the end carbons, with none of the electron density residing on the middle carbon. This agrees with what the resonance contributors show. cic enh, ey cr= cy ‘Copsright © 21 Pearson Edusation,le Special Topic I 287 Finally, the ally! anion has two electrons in the nonbonding MO. These {wo electrons are shared equally by the ‘end carbons. This. too, agrees with what the resonance contributors show. CHy=CH—CH, == CHy CH=CH, We have seen that both molecular orbital theory and contributing resonance structures can be used to explain electron delocalization, The choice is a matter of preference. Hyperconjugation is probably best shown by mo- lecular orbital theory, because the contributing resonance structures that describe hyperconjugation would require breaking «r bonds. Contributing resonance structures are sometimes preferred when one needs to see on which toms cha reside Copyngit 020-4 Pearson Fab. I Substitution Reactions of Alkyl Halides Important Terms aprotic solvent back-side attack base basicity bifunctional molecule bimolecular reaction ati complete race dielectric constant elimination fi ‘order reaction intermolecular reaction intimate ion pair intramolecular reaction inversion of configuration ipole i Kinetics leaving group nucleophile nucleophilic a solvent that does not have a hydrogen bonded to an oxygen oF fo a nitrogen some aprotic solvents are polar: others are nonpolar nucleophilic attack on the side of the carbon opposite to the side bonded to the Jeaving group. aa substurice that accepts proton, the tendeney of a compound to share its electrons with a proton a molecule with (wo functional groups. a reaction in which Qo molecules are involved in the transition state of the rate-determining step. formation of a pair of enantiomers in equatl amounts. aumeasure of how well a solvent can insulate opposite chi rges from one another. aureaction that removes atoms or sroups from the reactant to form a bond. ‘a reaction whose rate is proportional to the concentration of one reactant a reaction that takes place between two molecules. tan ion pair that results when the covalent bond that joined the cation and anion: broken. but the cation and arion are still next to each other: a reaction that takes pkice within a molecule, tuming the carbon inside out like an umbrelia so that the resulting product has, configuration opposite to that of the reactant the interaction beoween an ien and the dipole of a mole she field of chemistry that deals with the rates of chemieal rewetions, roup that is displaced in substitution reaction. aan electron-rich atom or molecule. a measure of how readily an atom or molecule with u lone pair attacks another atom, 288 CCopgright © 2014 Peano Futon. Ine nucleophilic substitution reaction protic solvent rate constant rate law second-order solvent-separated ion pair solvolysis steric effects steric hindrance substitution reaction unimolecular reaction Chapter9 289 a reaction in which s nucleophile substitutes for an atom oF group. Formation of a pair of enantiomers in unequal amounts, aa solvent that has a kydrogen bonded to an oxygen of to a nitrogen, the constant of proportionality in the rate law for a reaction; it describes how dif- ficult it is to overcome the energy barrier of a reaction. the equation that shows th en the rate of a reaction and the con- centration of the reactants. relationship betw: reaction whose rate is dependent on the concentration of two reactants, or on the square of the concentration of wo reactants, unimolecular nucleophilic substitution reaction, a bimolecular nuclecphilie substitution reaction, aan ion pair that results when the solvent molecules. cation and anion are separated by one or more reaction with a solvent effects due to the fact that pups occupy a certain volume of spuce. caused by bulky groups at the site of a reaction that make it difficult for the re: tants to approach each other, a reaction that exchanges one substituent of a reactant for another. a reaction in which only one molecule is involved in the transition state of the rate determining step. CCopysight © 2014 Pearson dean ne 290 Chapter 9 Solutions to Problems 1 6. DEE is formed when HCI is eliminated from DDT. (See the box on page 403.) a.a CS cl oN S cl Methoxychlor has methoxy groups in place of the chlorines on the benzene ri of DDT. These methoxy ‘groups can form hydrogen bonds with water, methoxychlor more soluble in water and, therefore. less soluble in fatty tissues rate = k {alkyl halide } [nucleophile | original: rate = k [1.0] 1.0] a. rate = k[1.0][3.0] = 3.0. The rate is tripled, 0.50. The rate is cut in halt b. rate = k [0.501 {1.0 rate = k [0.5][2.0] = 1.0. The rate is not changed. Increasing the height of the energy barrier decreases the magnitude of the rate constant: this causes the reaction 10 be slower: The closer the methyl group is to the site of nucleophilic attack, the greater the stevie hind Dhilic attack and the slower the rate of the reaction, CHy chy cH I CHSCH:CH)CHsCH)Br > CHyCHCH;CHBr > CH\CH.CHCHBr > CHsCH;CBr ch a Solved in the text cHy chy { © « ce b.CH.CH NH HZ ~CHCH, ‘br CHO (R)-2-bromodoutane (S)-2-methoxybutane CHCHCH, cucHcH f Ho i fe. CHCH \"H wy cH,CH, ‘cr Ho (S)-3-chlorohexane (Ri-B-hexanol a ccHeHeHcH, AHO. CHACHLCHCH.CH, 1 on iodopentane 3-pentsnol Copyright ©2014 Pearson Easton. 7. 10. Chapter9 291 a, Solved in the text ba Coen, 10 eno )-en.en, ae chy cueno oO af cH.CH.O ~ “ P a 1 Br the primary alkyl halide is less sterically hindered than the secondary alkyl halide (the CH, group is farther away trom the back side of the carbon attached to the Br) Br boaN Brisa weaker base; therefore, it isa better leaving group ona with one methyl and one ethy! group, this alkyl halide is tess sterically hindered or than the other alky! halide that has two ethyl groups a ly hindered than the secondary alkyl halide _ Br iS | the primary alkyl hulle is less ster A protic solvent hay a hydrogen bonded to an oxygen or to a nitrogen, whereas an aprotic solvent does not have a hydrogen bonded (0 an oxygen or to a nitrogen, a. aprotic by aprotic e. protic d. aprotic a RO” because ROH is a weaker acid than RSH since the hydrogen is attached 0 a smaller atom, be RS: bec il sult ie itis lens well solvated by water is more polarizable tha oxygen, RO_ because. ulthough they differ in size, they are in an aprotic solvent. Remember that the stronger baye is alway’ the better nucleophile in an aprotic solvent. Remember that the stronger base is always the better mu aprotic solvent. sophile unless they differ in size AND they are in a, They differin size and because they are ina protic solvent, the larger one (Br) is the better nucleophile b. They differ in size and because they are in an aprotic solvent, the stronger base (CI>) is the better nucleophile. ¢. Because the oxygen is negatively charged, CHO" is the better nucleophile. d. Because the oxygen is negatively charged, CHO” is the better nucleophile. €. Because H:O isa stronger acid than NH, “NH, is the stronger baye and the better nucleophile. f. Because HO is stronger acid than NH, “‘NHo is the stronger base and the better nucleophile They differ in size and because they are ina profie solvent, the larger one (I>) isthe better nucleophile. bh. They differ in size and because they are in an aprotic solvent, the stronger base (Br) is the better nucleophile Copynigh © 2014 Pear ication, tne 202 14 17, 18, v. Chapter 9 Solved in the text. a. CH,CH3Br + HOM HO isa better nucleophile than H.O. b. CH\CHCH:Br + HO” This alkyl halide has less sterie hindrance toward nucleophilic attack, Hy CHACH CL + CHS” CHS” is a better nucleophile than CHO” in a protic solvent (a solvent that can form hydrogen bonds) d. CHACH Br +1 Brisa weaker tase than Cl, so Br isa better leaving group. ‘These are all $2 reactions a, CHxCH,OCH;CH,CHy CH;CH N(CHy}3, Br b. CH CH;C=CCHy d. CHyCH)SCHCH Solved in the text a, Reaction of an alkyl hatide with am ives low yield of primary amine, because as soon as the primary amine is formed. it ean react with another molecule of alkyl halide to form a secondary amine: the secondary amine can react with the alky! halide to form a tertiary amine, which ean then react with aan alhy! halide to form a quaternary ammonium salt. (See Problem 15 on page 415.) b. ‘The alkyl acide is not treated with hydrogen until after all the alky! halide has reacted with aide ion. Therefore. when the primary amine is formed, ‘here is no alkyl halide for it to react with to form a secondary amine. aN b. an + NN OCH, OCH: ocny cme product becuse the Bein Foul S because the leaving stop aso attach 0 an np watched 49 am ‘symmetric center oxyntic went >™ 5 an

“AY Y ee cH, ¢ 24. sensey, NHs isa good nucleophile, so this is an $ HW SCH, He 7 HECHS The product has the inverted configuration compared to that of the reactant cHy 5 en Loren anyon L/h irbon from the top oF the b. (CH Once the tertiary carbocation forms, methanol can attack the sp" bottom of the planar carbocation, Copyrigtt ©2014 Peason Eston, Ie 294 2. Chapter 9 LAN S,2 ives back-side attack only. Ss * SyI gives ba ‘OCH, ‘ocH, C OC, ‘The fate ofan St reaction snot alfested by insreang the eancentation of the mleopil. wheres the rate of an Sy2 reaction is increased when the concentration of the nucleophile is increased. Therefore. we first have (0 determine whether the reactions are Sy! or Sy2 reactions. oct k-side and front-side attack, A isan Sy2 reaction because the conliguration of the product is inverted compared with that of the reactant. B i Cis an Sx1 reaction because the reactant is a tertiary alkyl halide. Sx2 reaction because the reactant is a primary alkyl halide, Because they are S,2 reactions. the rate of A and B will inerease if the concentration of the nucleophile is increased, Because it is an Sx reaction, the rate of C will not chan increased, we if the concentration of the nucleophile is on will be faster Because both reactants in the rate-limiting step are neutral, the react solvent is increased. Fthe polarity of the a, Increasing the polarity will decrease the rate of the reaction because the concentration of charge on the reactants is greater (the reactants are charged) than the concentration of change on the transition state b. Increasing the polarity will decrease the rate of the reaction because the concentration of charge on the reactants is greater (the reactants are charged) then the concentration of charge on the transition state. - Increasing the polarity will increase the rate of the reaction because the concentration of charge on the reactants iy less (the reactants are not charged) than the concentration of charge on the a. CHsBr + HO" - CHOW + Br HO” isa better nucleophile than HO. bo CHL + HO] + CHOH + I 1 isa better leaving group than Cl ¢. CHyBr + NHy CHNH, + Be NH, isa better nucleophile than H,O. a. CHyBr + HOT —PMSO, CHLOH + Br Unlike ethyl alcohol, DMSO will not stabilize the nucleophile (and therefore decrease the rate of the reaction) by hydrogen bonding, HOH CH ANH, + Br CHyBr + NH, A more polar solvent is able to stabilize the transition state, (EtOH is ethanol.) Copsright © 2014 Peason Flat, In 3B. Solved in the text Acetate ion will be a better nucleophile in dimethyl sulfoxide because dimethyl sulfoxide will not stabili the negatively charged nucleophile by ion-dipole interactions, whereas methanol will stabilize it by ior dipole interactions, Only an Syl reaction will give the product with retention of configuration. Because the Sy1 reaction is favored by a polar solvent, a greater percentage of the reaction will take place by an Sy! pathway in 50% water/50% ethanol, the more polar of the two solvents a HOTS because it forms a six-membered ring, whereas the other compound would form a seven-membered ring. A seven-membered ri more strained than a six-membered ring, so the six-membered ring is formed more easily. (See Table 3.8 on page 127 of the text) b WO LALA, because it forms a five-membered ring, whereas the other compound ‘would form a four-membered ring, A four-membered ring is more strained than a five-membered ring. so the five-membered ring is formed more easily. ed ring, whereas the other Jat-membered so the seven- & HOLA ALAA, because it forms a seven-membe © compound would form an eight-membered ring. An s more strained than a seven-membered Fi membered ring is formed more easily: also, the Br and OH in the compound that leads to the eight-membered ring are less likely t0 be in the proper position relative to one another for reaction because there are more bonds around which rotation to an unfavorable con- formation can occur, (See page 434 of the text.) a. When hydride ion removes a proton fron the OH group, the alkoxide ion cannot react in an intramo Jecular reaction with the alky! chloride to form an epoxide, because it cannot reuch the back side of the carbon attached to the chlorine, Thus, the major product will result from aa intermolecular re \ » b. Hydride ion removes a proton from the OH group more rapidly than it attacks the alkyl chloride, Once the alkoxide ion is formed, it attacks the back side of the alkyl chloride, forming an epoxide. Copgnigin #14 Pers Edo, I 296 Chapter9 Hydride ion removes a proton from the OH carbon attached to the bromine, forming at si group. and the alkoxide fon attacks the back side of the membered ring ether a : BrcH.CH,cH,CHCH,oH "Br HCH CHSCH CHG 4. Hydlride ion removes a proton from the OH group, and the alkoxide ion attacks the back side of the carbon attached to the chlorine, forming an epoxide. cH, cH, Hs " 4 pe cHeHc—cHy tt CHICKS Gy After the halohydrin is formed, hydride jon removes a proton from the OH forms an epoxide. roup and the alkoxide jon CH,CH.CHsCH=CHs i Se oncncncn enc) > cence ate ou o ’ CHACH.CH 3H. Instead of attacking the back side of the carbon (0 the right of the sul side of the carbon to the left of the sulfur. Nitty . N am rs YN NNO Ca o| Lo HY HO OH a. © CHCHCHSCH, ©. CHCH.CHOCH, b. CH\CHsCH.NHy d. CH\CH,CH,SH © CHyCH:CH:NH;CH; (Notice that the produet in part ¢ is not protonated because its pX, is ~ —7: the product in “E" is proton- ated because its p&, is ~ 11. In part & CH,NH(CH;CH-CH, jy and CH,N(CH3CH.CH,); ean also be formed. depending on the concentration of I-bromopropane: see Problem 15 on page 415 of the text.) Copysight © 2014 Peron Faleton. 37. 40. a Chapter 9 297 Ithe atoms are in the same horizontal row ef the periodic table, the stronger base is the better nucleophile. If the atoms are in the same column, the larger atom is the better nucleophile in the protic polar solvent because the solvent will form stronger hydrogen bonds with the smaller atom, a. HO HS b. NH, a. HS” fs Be The weaker base is the better leaving group. a, 1,0 c. HLS et b. 1,0 a Hs f Br a, HO CH NH; e. CH.CH.S & CEN ° b. CHO a HS CH CO he CHACHC Jn parte, a tertiary amine and a quaternary ammonium ion can also form unless a large excess of CHsNHs is used. (See Problem 15 on page 415 of the text.) ‘a, The rate will be increased nine-fold. b. ‘The reaction will be slower because of tie more polar solvent ¢. The reaction will be slower because it will be an Sy? reaction with a poor nucleophile. 4. The reaction will be slower because the leaving group will be poorer fe. The reaction will be slower because there will be more sterie hindrance. a, The reaction will be slower hecause the leaving group will be poorer. b. The reaction will be slower because it will be an Sx2 reaction with a poor nucleophile. Oo (A large excess of methylamine will have to be used in the second step in order to minimize the formation of a tertiary amine and a quartemary ammonium ion.) ¢. Half of the cyclohexene is converted to bromocyclohexane, and half iy converted to an alkoxide ion, ‘The ether is formed from the reaction of bromocyclohexane with the alkoxide ion, OQ” cr" - - OO Son o LJ Or Cong © 2914 Pearson Eston, I 298 Chapter 9 oa CHCHSS ce NH, > 10 i b ( )-o ato Be > cr 43, The pk, would increase (it would be a weaker acid) because of a decreased tendeney to form a charged species in less polar solvent, (See Problem 29.) ones ay, an, cn CHCCH, | a b. The products are obtained as a result of the nucleophiles reseting with the carbocation, 2-Bromo- 2-methylpropane and 2-chloro-2-methylpropane form the same carbocation, so boti alkyl halides form the same products 43. a. The Sy2 reuetion takes place with inversion of configuration CHCHCH GcHscH, { Ho i Be WZ >ocns ‘Hs Hs (R}-2-bromopentane (S)-2-mnethoxypentane cHy City br H MnO octy CHCH.CH: CHCHCHs CHCH, HCH, CHCH, I HOH | po ne act be CH CHCHLCH,~ \°CHy CHCHCH CH, VCH, © CHE 7 CHACHACHACH, Br OCH; cH {R)-3-bromo-3-methytheptane (Ry-Femethoxy-3-meliytheptane —_(5)-3-methoyy-3-methytheptane HCH, CHCHy CHCA, e——a anon eno Hy + cry 0c JCHACHSCHy CHCHCHCH, LCHyCH.CHy Copyright ©2014 Pearson Fadaton Chapter9 299 _ c CHAOCH;CH, \=/ a crscrcnc HCHOCH, cro fe. CHLCH=CHCH,Br = CH,CH=CHCH,OCH, 11,08 f CHCH=CHCH Br "+ CH.CH=CHCHOCH, + 46. a Br Meson OCHSCH, ‘rewtesned CHB CH ch —o- OF o& + Br : encom cnenon| ore ° ci: “och CH, tote an a ae Br cnernont ‘cusctton ‘ , NZ “Yow OCH.CHs OcH.CH: Thiscompounl is a agmatiie Thi conpount fas asym ene, oats Rud esr ath the Ra 8 Sfremonet il eet, Seuomers il tain 47. Methoxide ion will be a better nucleophile in DMSO. because DMSO cannot stabilize the anion by hydro gen bonding. Boa oe “The nucleophile isles sterically _ = _ + Cr hindered CCongtght © 2014 Peason Education. ne 300 Chapter 9 Ho The eleetron-withdrawing oxygen ro OTOH + CF increases the elecirophilicity of the ee Og ano carbon that the nucleophile attacks, b. al Steric strain is decreased when the alkyl halide diysoeiates to form the a carbocation because the hybridiza. ~ L “ ae tion of the carbon changes from a TA sp to ap allowing th bond ag “ between the bulky groups to increase from 109.5" 120" Therefore the fers forme more ply @. (CH yCBr Because the reactants are neutral. the the reaction will be faster more polar solvent. 9. cr NN SY a ow SNS cac & 7 an eee os | 50, a. CHO « & \-o Br 4. ie) cag si. on on \ IX wl Vf wf — NM Ory ye a LN we Kd N NHy | 0. oe Ns ) Neer TI On OH Copysight © 2014 Peano Eaton Ine Chapter9 301 52, The slow step of the solvolysis reuetion is formation of the carbocation. Because the products of the slow Step are charged, they will be better stabilized by formic acid than by acetic acid, because formic acid has «greater dielectric constant, Because the products are more stabilized. the transition state leading to them will also be more stabilized, so the reaction will be faster in the solvent with the greater dielectric constant ‘Therefore, the second reaction is faster a this is an Sy1 reaction because acetate ion is a relatively poor nucleophile and the alkyl halide is tertiary. 53. a. We can predict t CHy Hy i | CHACCH=CHCI CHCH CH; += CHjC=CHCHCH.CH, el 6 et I cuco Hy + CH\C=CHCHCHCHy occHy I oO mn predict that this is an Sy reaction because acetate ion is relatively poor nucleophile cH cH cn, 4-4-6. fo Congright 012014 Pearn Baan, Ie s7. Chapter 9 CH CH CH Br + Ht CHCHCHIC SCH oe CHCHLCHSCHSCH ° 1 b. CHACH,CH,Br CHCHCH GE CHACHICHLCCH 1 Ree 6. CHACHCH:Br + “> CHACH CHC =CH Site tos io” ° CH.CH.CH,CH.CH d. CHACHCH.Br + CH,CH,CH,C = CHCHCH CH=CH CHACHACHS ‘The equilbrium contstant is given by the relative stabilities of the produets and reactants, Therefore. any Factor that stabilizes the products will increase the equilibrium constant produ [reactants] K eater Ethanol will stabilize the charged products more than will diethyl ether because ethanol has a g dielectric constant, Therefore, the equilibrium will lie 9 (Qoward products) in ethanol is less sterivally a, The reaetion with quinuelidine had the la hindered as a result of the substituents an the nitrogen being pulled back into 3 ring structure. fer rate constant because quinuclidin b, The reaction with quinuctidine had the larger rate constant for the same reason given in para Isopropyl iodide has the larger difference in rate constants and therefore the ka ratio because, since itis more sterically hindered than m in the amount of serie hindrance in the nucleophile Bet Kesnaciie/ Kristy ine Wl iodide. itis more affected by differences Because methanol is a poor nucleophile. the reaction will Luke plice predominately via an Syl pathway: The bromine that will depart is the one that Formis & secondary benzylic cation and not the one tht would have to form a secondary carbocation. The nucleophile can approach from the top oF the bottom of the pla nar carbocation, OCH; och, co, Oa, i Chapter9 303 ‘The number of atoms in the ring is given by n. Three- and four-membered rings are strained, so they are harder to make than five- and six-membered rings. The three-membered ring is formed faster than the four-membered ring because the compound leading to the three-membered ring has one less ¢ single bond that can rotate to give a conformer in whieh the reacting groups are positioned too far from one another For reaction, conformer in which the reacting groups are positioned too far from one another for reaction (compared to the compound that form the four-membered ring), the five-membered ring is formed faster because it is relatively strain free. So lack of strain more than makes up for the lower probability of hav groups in the proper position for reaction, ‘The rate of the ring-forming reaction gets slower as the size of the ring being formed gets larger, because the reactant has more bonds that can rotate (o give conformers in which the reacting groups are positioned too far from one another for reaction Because all the reactions are Sy? reactions, the configuration of the asymmetric center attached to the Br in the reactant will be inverted in the product. CHACH, a. CHO, H pee ee oe 7 one CH CCH, CHCA R45) bo cho CHC CCH) oF We NG HCH CHCHy CMs RAR) cH, HCH HW H——ocn ScHicHy °F s No HO} CHy CH say CULCHy cue ana He _ ole eer a Noes ctu CHO KCl: sas) CHACHs Copycight © 2014 Peano Esco, te 304 Chapter 9 60, a -LCH,CHLC=CCH.CH, 2. CH\CH,CH,OCH, be CH CHC + CH.CH,CH.CH;Br or CH,CH,CH,CH,C= + CHCHBr 6 CHYCHO” + CH,CHCH,CH\Br or CHCHCHSCH.O + CH,CHBr Hy chy ol. os Fc, — = o : . cu CHOW : Ba n+ ocn, “CH GH \_} 6cn, HH 62, Tetrahydrofuran ean solvate a charge better than diethyl ether ean, because the floppy ethyl substituents of diethy! ether provide sterie hindrance, maki approach the positive charge that is to be solvated, electrons of the oxygen to y+ kt SSS CHCH + Kcr 6. CHC! + KCK precipitates out in acetone, which drives the reaction to the right os Chel — | ny Br Br AN *LAR A, ‘OCH, S07 S01 un HBS b. Two products are obtained because methanol can add to the top or the bottom of the planar double bond One bromine is etiminated with the help of one of oxygen’s lone pairs. forming a carbocation where the positive charge is shared by a carbon and an oxygen. The oxygen cannot help the oth dissociate, Copyright © 2014 Peurwont ation. 67. Chapter9 305 A Diels-Alder reaction between hexachlorocyclopentadiene and 1.4-dichlorocyclopentene forms chlordane. a cl cl ‘cl a 1 is a good nucleophite in a polar solvent such as methanol, so it reacts rapidly with methyl bromide, caus: ing the concentration of Lt decrease rapidly. seni A cai Lens 5 i 1 isa good leaving group so methyl iodide undergoes an Sy2 reaction with methanol. Methanol is a poor nucleophile, so the Sy2 reaction is slow. Therefore. iodide ion returns slowly to its original concentration. cong «cH croc, + ae Iwill not undergo an $y2 reaction, because of steric hindrance to back-side altack Tt will not undergo an Syl reaction, because the carbocation that would be formed is unstable, since the ring structure prevents it trom achieving the 120° bond angles required for an sp? carbon, 57. ‘The equation needed to calculate K., from the change in free energy is given in Sect In Kay = Ink = 2D eal mol!) 2.7 BRS 0.001986 keal mol 'K'X303K 0.60 In Ky = 36.1 Ku = 48 x10" As expected. this highly exergonic reaction has at very karge equilibrium constant CConyrght © 2014 Pearson Eaton a: 306 Chapter 9 Chapter 9 Practice Test Which of the following is more reactive in an Sx 1 reaction? a © S-cuencny or &- Br br HACHCH, re Br i b. CH\CH=CCH, or CHCH=CHCHCHs Which of the followi cH Hci is more reactive in an S.2 reaction? | a. CHSCHCHBr or CH.CH;CHBr Draw the product(s) of the following reactions. showing the stereoisomers that are formed: ee Ch cH, » CS cwenen, Br cH, 3 al ee HCH cH, | cist © cen kT caon fe. CH,CH=CHCH.Br . Copyright 912014 Pearson Eduction a 4. Chapier9 307 Indicate whether each of the following statements is true or false: a, Increasing the concentration of the nucleophile favors an Sy1 reaction over aan Sy2 reaction, T F b. Ethyl iodide is more reactive than ethyl chloride in an Sy? reaction, T F ¢. Inan Syt reaction, the product with the retained configuration is obtained in greater yield. 7 Fi 4. ‘The rate of a substitution reaction in which none of the reactants is charged will increase if the polarity of the solvent i increased. T F fe. An Sy? react n is a two-step reaction, y F f. The pX, of a carboxylic acid is greater in water than itis in a mixture of dioxane and water. v F 4 2 4-Bromo-I-butanol will form a eyelie ether faster than will 3-bromo-T-propanol Answer the following a, Which ia stronger base, CH\O" or CHS”? b. Which is a better nucleophile in an aqueous solution, CHO™ or CHS”? For each of the following pairs of Sx? reactions, indicate the one that occurs with the greater rate constant that is, occurs faster}: a CHCHCIC] + HO- or CHACHCH) + HO & b. CHCHCHCL + HO- or CHYCHSCHSE + HO 6. CHCHYCH:Br + HO" or CH\CHSCHaBr + 1,0 d. CH.CHCH, or CHYCHCH, CHO” I ‘cHon br Br @. BICH,CH)CH;CH)NHCH; or BrCH,CH,CH)NHCH, Circle the aprotie solvents a, dimethyl sulfoxide b. diethyl! ether ¢. ethanol hexane How would inereasing the polarity of the solvent alfeet the following? athe rate of the $x2 reaction of methylamine with 2-bromobutane b. the rate of the Sx! reaction of methylamine with 2-bromo-2-methylbutane 6. the rate of the $,2 reaction of methoxide ion with 2-bromobutane d. the pX, of acetic acid the pk, of phenol CCongright © 2014 Peano Basen, le anti anti-periplanar dehydrohalogenation deuterium kinetic isotope effect regiosel sawhorse projection syn elimination syn-periplanar target molecule Williamson ether synthesis Zaitsey’s rule aan elimination reaction in which the substituents being eliminated are removed. trom opposite sides of the molecule, substituents are attached (© parallel bonds on apposite sides of a molecule, elimination of a proton and a halide ion, ratio of the rate constant obtsined for the reaction of a compound containin; hydrogen and the rate constant obtained For the reaction of an analogous compound in which one or more of the hydrogens have been replaced by deuterium, ‘a reaetion that removes atoms or groups from the reactant to form a1 7 bond. aan elimination reaction where the groups being eliminated are bonuled to adjacent carbons, 4 unimolecular elimination reaction a bimolecular elimination reaction the preferential formation of « constitutional isomer, ‘4 way (o represent the three-cimensional spatial relationships of atoms by looking. at the carbon-carbon bond from an oblique angle, aan elimination reaction in which substituents being eliminated are removed from the same side of the molecule substituents are attached to parallel bonds on the same side of a molecule, the desired end product ofa synthesis formation of an ether from the reaction of an alkoxide ion with an alkyl halide, the cule that states that the more stuble alkene product of an elimination reaction is obtained by removing a proton from the B-carbon that is bonded 10 the Fewest hydrogens. 308, Copyright 2014 Pearson acon Chapter 10 309 chy cH, cH La cHERCHCH, wh eMC=CHE, — & CCLLCH=CH, ony a aia The alkene (2-butene) that is formed is more stable than the alkene (C-butene) that is formed from the other alkyl halide. Br b on Br’ isa better leaving group (weaker base) than Cl ‘The alkene (2-methyl-2-pentene) that is formed is more stable than be eX the alkene -methyl-2-pemene) tha is formed fom te oer aly » > cHRCHCCH.CH Gy cH. u i Four alkyl substituents. Three ky substituents are ‘Three alky1 substiuents are Two ay! substituents ive onuded io the sponded the sp carbons: onded the sp" carboms: are onal wo the p* carbons the largest groups areon the k oupsare onthe carbons “opposite ses ofthe same Seo the double Bo double bond. 6. ‘The major product would be the one predicted by Zaitsev's rule, because the fluoride ion would dissociate in the first step, forming a carbocation, Loss of a proton from the carbocation would follow Zaitse's rule, asi does in other E] reactions, 7. a Because it Forms the more stable carbocation. b. B because it forms the more stable alkene. ¢.B because it forms the more stable carbocation. ._A because itis less sterically hindered. CCopgght 0.2014 Pearson Halton Ine 0, a 2, Chapter 10311 : oe a oe Lamas oth 1 © docn, 8 a shit Q ctl, I a ch, he CH uBe + Conjugated double bonds are more stable and, therefore, are easier (o form than isolated double bonds. “ay 2 cH, CH) =CHCH=CCH, Parts a and ¢ form allylic cations and will form the same products that are formed by E2 reactions. Because the alkyl halide in part b is a secondary alkyl halide. it does not undergo an El reaction. Benzyl bromide does not have a hydrogen on a B-carbon that can be removed to form an elimination product. Allyl bromide has a hydrogen on a -carbon that, if removed, would leacl 10 a cumulated diene. Because cumulated dienes are high energy species, allyl bromide does not form an elimination product, Becarbon a a. E2 CH,CH==CHCH, a PB CHC Gopytigh © 2014 Peanon Education. le We 16. Chapter 10 Solved in the text 7 o 178x107 Le 57 Law cto 7+ 150% 10 cH | 1. CHCH.CH=CCH, No stereoisomers are possible. 2 CHCH OH ‘The major product is the conjugated diene with the larger group \ bonded to one 9p? earbon on the apposite side of the double bond from the larger group bonded t the herp" arb. The majo pret is the conjagated alkene with the larger group bonded to one 9? carbon on the opposite side of the double bond from the larger group bonded to the other 9p carbon. 1b. Innone of the reactions is the major product dependent on whether you start with the R or S enantio- mer of the reactant the larger substituent attached to one sp? a, Solved in the text e as carbon and the larger substituent attached to the other sp? carbon are on opposite Sides of the double bond en Hy b. CHCHSCH CCH, —_ NS nts to be eliminated are £2 elimination reactions trom six-membered rings occur only when the substi both in axial positions. In the cis isomer, when Br is in an axial position, it has an axial hydrogen on each of the adjacent ear- bons, The one bonded to the same carbon as the ethy! group will be more apt to be the one eliminated with Br because the product formed is more stable and therefore more easily formed than the prod- uct formed when the other H is eliminated with Br. (Recall that when there is a choive. a hydrogen is removed from the B-carbon bonded to the fewest hydrogens.) Copyright 2014 Pearson dation Ine Chapter 10313 Inthe trans isomer, when Br is in an axial position, it has an axial hydrogen on only one adjacent carbon, and itis not the carbon that is bonded to the ethyl group. Therefore, different product is formed, (Notice in this case there is no choice: there is only one hydrogen bonded by un axial bond to a B-carbon.) ve br fu Late, Lfn i i 4 cnet cis- Lbromo-2: ‘bromo-2-ethyleyelohexane ethyleyeTohexane trans | Ll LY crt CHLCHy |-othyleyclohexene S-ethyleyelohexene 17. Inorder fora six-membered ring to undergo an E2 reaction, the substituents that are to be eliminated must both be in axial positions, When bromine and an adjacent hydrogen are both in axial positions, the large tert-butyl substituent is in an ‘equatorial position in the cis isomer and in an axial position in the trans isomer. The rate constant tor the reaction is A'K. Because a large substituent is mote stable in an equatorial position than in an axial position, elimination Of the cis isomer occurs through its more stable chair conformer (Ky, is large: see page 463 of the text), whereas elimination of the trans isomer has to occur through its less stable chair conformer (K., is small) ‘The cis isomer, therefore, reacts more rapidly in an E2 reaction, Be Br fn Hn ome LL nw fin H H (CHC H clohexane srans-L-bromo-4-ter-butyleyelohexane cis-L-bromo4-rerr-butyle Copyrigtt ©2014 Person Baducaton, I 314 Chapter 10 18, a. There are two stereoisomers of rns I-shloo-2-methyeyelohexan £ vA chy CH, Gi on b. There are two stereoisomers of cis-I-chloro-2-methyleyclohexane. elim ation sus though the move stale enter ct, ci, a = { | ™ only pri LA cn, oc, = CF Nw 19, The atetmiting step in an reaction is erboction formation. Becatne the protons removed ins sequent fast step. the difference in the rate of removal of an H* versus a D” would not be reflected in the fate constant. Therefore, the deuterium kinetic otoe effect woul be close 01 2. Bris the weakest base, so it is the best leaving group, and F~ is the strongest base and worst leavin, group. Itis easier to break a C—H bond than a C—D bond, so the more hydrogens on the B-carbons that are replaced by a deuterium, the slower the rate of the E2 reaction will be. cHy CHy CHy cD, | —Br > CHCHCl > CHC: cH Hy Hy Copyright © 2014 Peston Edo ne: 2 23. mw 25. Chapter 10315 Because CH,S~ i a beiter nucleophile in the protic pokar solvent and weaker baxe than CH,O-. the ratio of substitution (where Y reacts as a nucleophile) to elimination (where Y~ reaets as a base) will inerease when the nucleophile is changed from CH,O~ (0 CHS In order to undergo an elimination reaction under E2 conditions, the substituents that are to be eliminated (H and Br) must both be in axial positions, Drawing the compound in the chair conformation shows that when Br is in an axial position, neither of the adjacent B-carbons has a hydrogen in an axial position, so an elimination reaction cannot take place, cus CHy LY Br ‘The substitu produet does, a bond to be broken in the carbocation, but the elimination on product does not require a. CHCH:CH:Br ‘This compound has less steric hindrance. CHy b OC ; 1 isa better leaving group (weaker base) than Br cH 6. CHYCHSCHSCCH; ‘The tertiary alky! halide because « secondary alky! halide does not be undergo Syl reactions. a Aer When this compound undergoes an E2 reaction, it forms a conjugated J double bond. The other compound cannot undergo an E2 reaction, be- eo cause neither two adjacent double bonds nor triple bond ean be formed in a six-membered ring, a. 1. Because primary alky! halides do not undergo Sy! /El reactions, they will undergo slow Sy2 reac- tions under Sy1/Et conditions. Since the base is weak (CHjOH), the product will be primarily the substitution product. 2. Because primary alkyl halides do not undergo Sy1/E1 reactions, they will undergo slow Sy2 reac tions under Sy1/EI conditions. Since the base is weak (CH,OH). the product will be primarily the substitution product 3. Because primary alkyl halides do not undergo Sx1 /EI reactions, they will undergo slow Sy2 reae- tions under Sx1/EL conditions. Since the base is weak (CH,OH). the product will be primarily the substitution product. 4. substitution and elimination - primarily substitution substitution and elimination (Because of the isopropyl group that slows down back-side attack and therefore formation of the substitution product, this primary alkyl halide will give more elimination product than will a primary alkyl halide such ay [-bromobutane.) - substitution and el n 4. elimination (Copyrign 92014 Reason doen, Ie cH CHSCCHybr carn 2.2-dimethylpropane a The hulky re7z-butyl substitu we back side of the carbon bonded to the bromine to nucleo- philic attack. making an Sx? reaction difficult. An Sx1 reaction cannot occur because it would require the formation of an unstable primary earbocation, b. I cannot undergo an E2 reaetion, because the B-carbon is not bonded to a hydrogen. Ir cannot undergo an EI reaction. because that would require the formation of a primary carbocation, Because a strong base is used in the Williamson ether synthesis, the reaction is an <2 reaction, so a com. peting E2 reuetion can also occur AL CHSCIXCH3Br + CHyCHyCHjCHy0° + CHyCHyCHyCH3OCHyCH3CHs + CHyCH=CHy butyl propyl ether propene b. CHsCH3CH3CH3Br + CHsCHyCH30° + CHsCHyCHsCHOCH,CH3CHy + CHyCHyCH=CHy butyl propyl ether Lebutene In onder to maximize the amount of ether formed in the Sx? reaction, make sure the less hindered group, is provided by the alkyl halide. In order to convert the aleohol (p&, ~ 15) to an alkoxide ion in a reaction that favors products (parts a, b. and ¢). a strong base (HH) is needed. ou oh Hs a cHcH CHO 8S cHcHcHor SECECE cH cH CHOCHCH:CH; oi Na CHC oy CHACHACHCH.OC b. CHYCH:CH:CHCHOH + CHLCH.CHCHCH.O CHCHCHCHCHOCHCH, cH Hy cH ‘ CO) sa O 5 Conn In part d. HO™ can be used to convert phenol (pX, ~ 15) to phenoxide ion in a reaction that favors prod- ucts, because phenol is a considerable stronger acid than an alcohol = Oven af Soon - ¢ ~~ Remember that ary! halides cannot undergo Sx? reactions, city cn «in os CH.CH.OF I I cncmte SHS econ = and ocnsen + cect cn bn bas Copssigh ©2014 Peston Edson, hs Chapter 10° 317 7 igh HC, CHy HAC, CH cn conenscenseny sate Sg MN Ce i r Sie i CH, —_sibsintion action oe ae CHACHICCH CH, = “> CHACHSCCHACHy + C=C + couse, Sipe tte dee 31. Because a cumulated diene is less stable than an alkyne, the transition state for its formation is less stable than that for the formation of the alkyne, so tae cumulated diene is harder to make 32. Inthe first elimination reaction, « hydrogen will be removed from the B-carbon bonded to the fewest hy drogens as expected. In the second elimination reaction, a hydrogen will be removed from the B-carbon that results in the formation of a conjugated double bond cH Hy cHy cH cH, $n CH,CHCHCH,CHCHCH , #2 CHC =OHCHAEHEHCH, AS ~ CH\C=CHCH=CHCHCH , ee ei major product = (E}-sterevisomer ‘minor product = (Z)-stereoisomer MES HocHscHcHcHcHy Se [\ | ~CHy be 0 33. ‘The synthesis shown on page 475 of the text will give a higher yield of the target molecule because the alkoxide ion attacks the back side of a primary alkyl halide. In contrast, the alkoxide ion in the synthesis shown above attacks the back side of a secondary alk! halide, which provides greater steric hindrance to back-side attack. Therefore, there will be greater competition from the E2 reaction that forms an elimination product, reducing the yield of the desired substitution product M. In parts a and b, a bulky base is used to encourage elimination over substitution. eri C loos, (be oe orca m0 i) “OH : ‘Br ws t S: ‘Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, te 318 Chapter 10 ~~ Br | Ratt 2. HO 105.10 o or Br 2 CHC ZECHCHy cH NSH VO cH a) 37. a 1. An El reaction i not affected by the strength of the base. but a weak base favors an E reaction by dlisfavoring an B2 reaction 2. An El reaction is not affected by the concentration of the base. but a low concentration of a base favors an El reaction by disfavoring an E2 reaction, 3. [the reactant is charged, an El reaction will be favored by the least polar solvent that will dissolve the reactant (generally an aprotic polar solvent). If the reactant is not charged, an El reaction will be favored by a protic polar solvent Copyright © 2014 Pearyom Eduction Chapter 103 hed to the B-carbon, the sterevisomer «ant, The reactant can have four differ- Because it is an E2 reaction and there is only one hydrogen at Formed in greater yield depends on the configuration of the n tent configurations: 8,8: 8,R: RR: and R.S."To determine the produet of the reaction: Draw the skeleton of a perspective formula, putting the groups to be eliminated on the solid lines. 1 Notice that on each carbon, the solid wedge is below the hatched wedge. Br De u Add the remaining, groups to the structure in a way that gives the asymmetric centers the de: configurations. For example, the structure below is (35.48}-3-bromo-3.4-dimethylhexane. Br, Hy Ne HCH, CHYCHyayO— CSE cut 4 (G8:48)-3-beomo-3.4-dimethythexane Because the groups to be eliminated are both attached to solid Lines, they are anti to one another, 4. Once the groups are you can draw the structure of the alkene product. (The groups tached 0 the solid wedges are on the same side of the double bond, and the groups attached by are on the other side of the double bond.) cHy Z hatched wei CHCH., \ x \ on ‘cHcih, ()-3.4-dimethyl-3-hexene ‘The configuration of the elimination product obtained from each of the other three stereoixomers cean be determined in the same way. HCH, CHCH, =cH, — \ Br MN CH CH a CHy H c= Poe cH cHy (S.4R)-3-bromo-3.4-dimethylhexane (Z)-3-dimethy! 14 Pearson Euucation fn Copycat 8: 324 Chapter 10 Br CHSCHy CH SCH 2 CHO —CS cS CHCHS Hu CHACHS | SRARY-}-bromo-34-dimethy hexane Hy SaCHLCHy . “H (3R48)-3-bromo-3-bdimethy Thexane (Z)-3adimethyl-B-hexene a this ether cannot be made by a Williamson ether synthesis cHy Li these reagents cannot be used because the tert alky1 halide undergoes only an elimination reaction these reagents cannot he used because the ary! halide (O° cannot undergo a vbsitution reaction ony 48. owen CH CH, CHy=C—CHCH, + CHC =CCHS 2.3-imethyl-I-butene Jimethy!-2-butene cHCH, a CHCH.CO™ Because it is the most sterically hindered base, B gives the highest Le percentage of the less stable I-alkene becuse it is easier for it to HCH remove the most accessible hydrogen. b. CHCHLO Because it is the least sterically hindered base, C gives the highest percentage of the more stable 2-alkene, Coppi 02014 Pearson Fal: Chapter 10319 B.-L. A strong base favors an E2 reaction. 2. A high concentration of a base favors an E2 re 3. one of the reactants is charged, an E2 reaction will be favored by the least polar solvent that will dissolve the reaetant (generally an aprotic polar solvent), If neither of the reactants is charged. an E2 reaction will be favored by a protic polar solvent. CH CHCH CH) stabilized by electron delocalization (resonance) b. CHACHCHLCH, & cHcncuch, cH & cuecincr, chy 38. He obtained only the elimination product besause under the Sx2/ alky! halide forms an elimination product and no substitution product conditions he employed, the tertiary cHy cH, I CHRECHS + CH ICH” > rn a predominant product Rather than a tertiary alkyl halide and st primary alkoxide ion, he should have used a primary alkyl halide and a tertiary alkoxide ion. They will react in an Sx2 reaction to form the desired ether. chy cHy I | CHACHCL + CH;CO” ——+ CH COCIRCH, + cr I chy cus ‘Although the Williamson ether synthesis (an x2 reaction) is the preferred way to synthesize an ether because it gives higher yields, the ether also could be synthesized using an $y reaction, oi cH, CHIEBr + CHCHLOH —* CHEOCHLCH + HBr cHy Hy Copysight 012014 Pearson tala, 320 Chapter 10 cor Ne 40. a (CH a D because Bro is ab leaving group than Cl ‘This compound is the only one that can undergo an E2 elimination reaction because the other compound does not have an axial hydrogen bonded to a B-carbon. This compound will not be able to undergo an £2 reaction because it does not have an adjacent H and Br that are both attached to axial bonds 41. The very minor products that would be obtained from “anti-Zaitsev" elimination (that is. the less substi- tuted alkenes) are not shown, a CHRCICH: OH CHCHCH: CH, major minor b. The reactant has two B-carbons that are attached to two hydrogens, so two constitutional isomers ean be formed. Each constitutional isomer hay £ and Z stereoisomers. cH.Ct H. H CECH: CH,CHy \ ene CHCH, major minor major minor ¢. tmany-1-Chloro-2-methyleyclohexane has two sterevisomers, \ hydrogen cannot be removed from the @-carbon bonded to the Fewest hydrogens because that hydrogen is not attached to an axial bond, (Cy cH, CH, CH (Copysigt ©2004 Peas baat ne Chapter 10 321 4d. srans-1-Chloro-3-methyleyclohexane has two stereoisomers. oo ease ed bag: CHy CH; CHy CHy CHy / YS / \ / \ f. CHyCHy H CHACHy CHy / \ / / \ / \ a, 3-Bromocyelohexene forms 1.3-cyelohexadiene: bromocyetohexane forms cyclohexene, 3-Bromocy- clohexene reacts faster in an E2 reaction, because a conjugated double bond iy more stable than an isolated double bond, so the transition state leading to formation of the conjugated double bond is, more stable and, therefore. the conjugated double bond is -O CO eO b. 3-Bromocyclohexene, because it forms a relatively stable secondary allylic cation, The other compound isa secondary alkyl halide, so it does not undergo an E1 reaction. wsier to form. Alkyl chlorides and alkyl iodides could also be used. It is best to avoid alkyl fluorides because they have the poorest leaving groups CHSCHCI & CHYCHCHCH ¢ Be och, b. CHyCH3CH3CH2Br EE CHACHyCHyCHZOCHs cunt, Ho” CHACH,CHSCHANHCH; HO. CHCHCH,CH,NHCH, . CHyCHyCH)CH2Br Copysigh © 2014 Peunon Eduction, Ine 322 Chapter 10 44, a, ethoxide ion, because elimination is favored by the bulkier base and fer7-butoxide ion is bulkier than ethoxide ion b. “SCN because elimination is favored by the stronger ase and OCN isa stronger base than ~ SCN ¢. Br” because elimination is favored by the stronger base and CI” is.a stronger base than Br 4d. CHS” because elimination is favored by the stronger base and CHO” is u stronger baye than CH,S 48, The first compound has two axial hydrogens attached to B-carbons: the second compound has one axial hydrogen attached (© a B-carbon, but it cannot form che more substituted (more stable) alkene that ean be formed by the first compound. The last compound eannot undergo an E2 reaction because it does not have an axial hydrogen attached t0 a B-carbon. a *-ot-c ony ty Br 46. ‘These are all E2 reactions. because a high concentration of a good nucleophile is employed. a, The stereoisomer formed in greater yield is the one in which the larger group attached {0 one sp" carbon and the larger group attached to the other sp* carbon are on opposite HAC cH es of the double bond —. (CHa in b. No stereoisomers are possible for this compound because one of the sp” carbony is bonded to two hydrogens. CH cH CHC CCH = CH CHy CH ¢. No stereoisomers are possible for this compound because one of the sp” carbons is bonded to wo methyl groups. cH, \ cH None Copysght © 2014 Pearson Eaton, Ine 49. Chapter 10325 aa, These are $y2/E2 reactions, because a good nucleophile is being used and the alkyl halide is second ary. The minor elimination products are not shown, Qi ct HICH): cH0 YCHCH): ‘CHUCHy)2 Q #« 2 iCHy.cH Cr (CHyCH OCHS (CHy)CH OD b. Only the substitution products are optically active: the elimination product does not have an asymmetric center w. YY . Q Q -« RQ. iy cl cctysCH “och, cc Yes. all the products are optically active 4. The cis enantiomers form the substitution products more rapidly, because there is less steric hindrance from the adjacent substituent to back-side attack by the nucleophile The cis enantiomers form the elimination products more rapidly, because the alkenes formed from the cis enantiomers are more substituted ane, therefore, more stable. The more stable the alkene, the lower the energy of the transition state leading to its formation and the more rapidly itis formed. org =O" ee Q BiH cu.cHon oy" Copyright © 2014 Pearson Essen, te cu.cH.on I,0CH,CHy oe ~~~ OCHSCHy 326 Chapter 10 E2 rea When the bromine iy in the axial position in the cis igomer. the fer/-buty! substituent is in the more stable equatorial position, ion, both groups to be eliminated must be in axial positions. When the bromine is in the axial position in the trans isomer, the rerr-huty] substituent is in the Tess stable axial position Thus. elimination takes place via the most stable conformer in the cis isomer and via the less stable chair conformer in the trans isomer, so the cis isomer undergoes elimination more rapidly. br be J 4 = TH cH PF : fea noon wcHyc cisL-brom-trt-batyleyclohexane tna |-broo--er-buteyloexane paw Ce aR Ar a. ni Aw At war henna major minor major minor ae NAN INES OD In reactions a-d. the B-carbon from which the hydroger Therefore. the conf s 10 be removed is bonded to only one hydrogen. uration of the reactant determines the configuration of the E2 elimination product. To determine the configuration of the product, see the instructions in Problem 46. cl CH cH cHy Chege CCH _. Nc=e’ aN aN H H H CHCHy (29,35)-2-chloro-3-methy pentane (E)-F-methy!-2-pentene 2014 Pearson dation te. Chapter 10, 333 sree CHO Oo .CHCI co 4 cHech Tomar CHMCHCH, rom Br Br a ee HO” Br Br ‘What is the major product obtained from the E2 reaction of each of the following compounds with hydrox- ide ion? Br Which would be more reactive in an E2 reaction, cis-1-bromo-2-methyleyelohexane or trany-t- bromo-2-methyleyclohexane? Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education. TER Reactions of Alcohols, Ethers, Epoxides, Ai Important ‘Terms aleohol alkaloid alkyl tosylate antibi crown ether dehydration epoxide ether inclusion npound Hofmann elimination reaction lead compound mercapto group molecular modification molecular recognition quaternary ammonium ion sulfide (thioether) sulfonate ester sulfonium salt thioether (sulfide) ines, and Thiols nie compound with an OH functional group (ROH), 4 natural produet with a hevroeyclic ring (where the heteroatom is a nitrogen) found in the leaves. bark, roots. or seeds of plants, aan ester of para-toluenesulfosie avid. ‘a compound that interferes with the growth of « bacterial microorganism, 's several ether link acyclic molecule that posse around a central cavity loss of water aan ether in whieh the oxy. emis incorporated into a three-membered ring, n bonded to two carbons (ROR). a compound containing an oxy the complex formed when a crown ether specifically binds a metal ion or an organic molecule, elimination of a proton and a tertiary amine from a quaternary ammonium hydroxide aa prototype in a search for other physiol an SH up. changing the structure of a lead compound. the recognition of one molecule by another as a result of specific interactions. a cation containing a nitrogen bonded to four alky’ nups (RAN) the sulfur analog of an ether (RSR the ester ofa sulfonic acid (RSOOR) RS°X the sulfur analog of an ether (RR) the sulfur analog of an aleohel (RSH). Copyright Chapter 10327 cl, cHscHy Ch cr, be Hye = Dos: H " " cH )-2-chloro-3 pentene CH SeHschs (28.38)-2-ehlor-3-methypentane (2-3-metyl-2-penten cic, Ho erkcHhy a wye-eL — Neael out HW ony cus (2R3K)-2-chloro-S-methylpentane (d-3-methyl-2-pentene €. This reactant has two hydrogens bonded to the B-earbon, so both Z and E stereoisomers are formed CHACH: —CHy CHCH OK Nf NY fo \ (CHC u (CHC CH, major product minor product Under E1 reaction conditions, both compounds will form the same product because both will form the same tertiary carbocation. a oh . i ° = ° Oo i » 4 ety b. we b ~ Ch Ce. cee =O i i Copyright ©:204 Peano Education. te 328 Chapter 10 Under E2 reaction conditions, the to compounds will from different products because in a the Hand Br ‘ould be eliminated only where they are anti to one another. Because the H and Br are n would have to be removed from the other -carbon (that is attached to the ri ‘on the same side of the ring in b. a hyde trom the methy! group), br on Ben, NES bs [ =o ae No i cHy cy 4 cls aes Ree on =o - =o eatin! A 4 # In order to undergo an E2 reaction, a chlorine and a hydrogen bonded to an adjacent carbon must be trans, to one another so they can both be in the required axis! positions. Every Cl in the following compound has. a Cl trans t0 it, so no CL hus 10 it, Thus. iL is the least reaetive of th undergo an E2 reaction. hydrogen isomers: it cannot cl cl Cl x a cr ‘cl 56. The silver ion increases the ease of departure of the halogen atom by sharing one of bromine’s Jone pair, which weakens the carbon-bromine bond. Pag + CH\CH=CHCH. Br—Ag + CHACHSCHCH: + AgBr 57. For a description of how to do this problem. see Problem 46. Br Us cnen CHC th a cH CH. eC aC SRO Pas W H H cHCH, (8A513bromo-+:maby hexane (E-S-methy2-pentene H 2CHy Noe CHC: + CHCH yo 2 < CH.O* HW CCopyght 2014 Pers tion In 39, 60. b. Br CHCHy wage—e acts cHCHE H (BRAR)-3-bromo-t-methythexane Br \, CHE oe © CHCH ey W 35.4R)-3-bromo-d-anethylhexane a. Bre cH SaCHCHy wege—eL CHCHS H (GRAS)-3-bromo-t-methythesane a. CHyCH,CD=C and Chapter 10 329 CHC \ aN cCHCHS cHy ()-3-methyl-2-pemtene in CHCHy . sone eats CHOWe—CL cHCH H CHCH, CHCH: Hen Nae” CN ‘cH ‘ Noe ach CHYCH yy CS fone) Hn ence A cuscnt (2)-S-methy-2-pentene Hoc acter, 7 HOO CS wee cucu’ a CHyCH,CH=CH, b. The deuterium-containing compound results from efimination of HBr, whereas the non-deuterium- containing compound results from elimination of DBr, The deuteritim-containing compound will be obtained in greater yield, bec: crcl OL CHCHCH= CH: —cHch.ch = se a C—H bond is easier to break than a C—D bond. OCH, oH LE on “Nt ee ae Br Ni m0 cnet SO. HoCHs cH Copyright ©2014 Peon Futon. ne 330 Chapter 10 bow A, ene ‘one equivalent reacts in the Diels-Alder on asa diene and the other as a dienophile ¢ they both have hydrogens bonded to the Both compounds form the same elimination produets becaus 6. same B-carhons that are anti to the bromine. H / i \ Ho _ + HoT ——- Ho) + nord Y \_/ Sf LLY H cist-bromocyetohexanol H x ry a wot > Br HO HORN p * ton » i trany-t-bromocyelohexatol 20 an intramolecular substitution reaction because the $2 reaction b. Only the trans isomer ean unde requires back-side attack. srans--bromocyelobexanol The cis isomer can undergo only an intermolecular substitution reaction, wok > ' =) ciy-t-bromocyclohexanol mers because the reaction creates an asymmetri¢ cen- The elimination reaction forms a pair of enar {er in the product. Both substitution reactions forma single stereoisomer, because the reaction does not create an asymmetric center in the product. Copyright © 2014 Pearson Eduction 2. Br a Hse ror (18.25)-1-bromo- 1.2-diphenylpropane b. Br Calls > CH a Wey CoH H als. Coa Colls < H )-I-bromo-1,2-diphenylpropane “ow LT sare CH ‘There is only a substitution product The reactant does not undergo elimination because when Cl is in an her of the B-carbons is bonded to an axial hydrogen, axial posit CH (£)-3-methyl-2-pentene Copyright © 2014 Pearson Edration, ne: 332 Chapter 10 Chapter 10 Practice Test 1. Which ofthe followings more reuetive nan 2 eeton? o / a © Seencnn oO eeajcrchine \/ Sy be bm eHeHER oe cHeHHE f a Which of the following would Sy2/E2 rewetions? give the greater amount of substitution product under conditions that favor ots ts CHCBr CH CHBe I Hy What produets are obtained when (R)-2-bromobutane reacts with CH,O- / CHOH under conditions that favor $x2/E2 reactions? Include the configuration ofthe products What alkoxide ion and what alkyl bromide should be used w synthesize the following ethers? For each of the following pairs of E2 reactions, indicste the one that oecurs with the greater rate constant @ CH;CH;CH;Cl + HO or CHsrHCH + HO cl b. CHACHSCHSCL «HO or CHYCHSCH + HO or CHACHSCH,Br + H0 Conga 2014 Peas uation tne a, Solved in the text ou soct, be None” ct on 6 Solved in the text Pet, a PB gpyraine on gsocr a cr. aa a H gu amet x — Se shit Chapter 1337 ~ ah x * ad ot Copysigh © 314 Pearson Baca. te 338 10. Chapter 11 Laide sti © or octet Cx “a yf cn, - ) — SS “OH ‘Osocl > ‘Cl OCH, “~ Ce ips HO" 1CUinciine ] - on “on a won BCHpSeS CH CHCHYSCHSCH, : 2 CRC: be crncu.ceon !ECH CIE CH CH CHLOCH.CHCH, 2 neHCHO 1 ba CHs D because it forms a very stable tertiary allylic cation intermediate. cH, oe CHy I Hs | a, CIRCHSCCHCH, 2" CHYCHSC—CHCH, = CYCHLC -CHCH I | | OH CH HCH 4 CH + HO. Copyright © 2016 Pearson Easton In Chapter 11337 6 a Solved in the text. H on OH b 4 = ee ow D> ae a on om & ae ee ee J Br Br AK AN on osocl cl sock | a be NN ptt NN H OH +OH SHC 1 amt EOE OKT OS a 8 Solved in the text. OY tint OY os. (YY on A onnes 7 WH ect Copyright 2014 Pearson Education, fe 338 Chapter 11 10. a crncHcHon EEC eH CHCHSCHICH, : TCHS b. CH.CH.CHLOH CHACH CHOC CHy HD because it forms a very stable tertiary allylic cation intermediate. cH, CH.CH:C—CHCH, cH cH ecu ! OH CHy CH + Ho cH. Ho + cH oH b Cy” A Con ~ LN { — ia ww NS (3 Copyright© 2018 Pear ttuaton. tn Chapter 1335, Solutions to Problems 2 “They no longer have a lone pait of electrons, “The relative reactivity would be: tertiary > primary > secondary If secondary alcohols underwent Sx2 reaetions with hydrogen halides. they would be less reuetive than primary alcohols, because they are more sterically hindered than primary alcohols at the carbon attached (0 the OH group. a. Solved in the text b. The conjugate acid of the leaving group of HOH, is HyO' sits pA, is — 7. The conjugate acid of the leaving group of CH,OH is HyO: its p&, is 15.7 Because HO™ isa much stronger acid than H,0, #0" isa much weaker base than HO” an therelore is the better leaving group. Therefore, CHOH; is more reactive than CH,OH, a. Solved in the text Noy ll NI 6 aN OH REHCHNCH aN be. d. CHACH,CHCH2OH [All four alcohols undergo an Sy! reaetion, because they are either secondary or tertiary alcohols. The arrows ‘are shown for the frst protonation step in part a, but are not shown in parts b, ¢. and d f a CHYCH;CHCH, + H=Br == CH,CHJCHCH, = I i on Sou oa == CH.CH.CHCH, + 1,0 + 10 Copyright ©2014 Pesewe Edeaton. Ine 936 Chapter The carbocations that are initially formed in ¢ and d rearrange in order to form more stable carbocations & ce —cHcH mh = cke—cHeH + Ho bu, bu Seeonlary carbocation Laman jo Gt os Che —enicis = cyc—cHen, Br CHy Cy tertiary cearbocation Ie cu, cy Hy lhe cy co a Me Cr CK sin Cr = we BY ou bon A) " f CHy f “12 hyde sit a + H,O tertiary carbo secondary carbocation Copysitt 92014 Pearson Faction, Ine Chapter I 339 eu cH CH CHSCH CCH, = CHCHACH CCH, + 1:0 ¢ : OH CHy cH {somo chy m0" + = crycncH— cor ms cry 50, . “H.CHACH,OH CHCHCHACH.CH.OH CHACHACHSCH 4H + Hl n h y CH,CH:CHLCHCHs \ a ° Ht H CHy major produet + HO 380, e Cl CHCH,CH,OH. CHO os CHy=CHCH= CH {Ind and f, the reactant is a primary alcohol. Therefore, elimination of water takes place via an E- reaction, Because the dehydration reaction is being carried out in an acidic solution, the alkene that is formed initially is protona irbocation. The proton that is then lost from the carbocation is the one that results in formation of the most stable alkene, woe 13. as Inosder to synthesize an unsymmetrical ether (ROR") by this method, two different alcohols (ROH dnd ROH) would have to be heated with sulfuric acid, Therefore, three different ethers would be ob- tained as products, Consequently. the desired ether would aecount for considerably Tess than half of the total amount of ether that is synthesized 1804 ROH + ROH ~~ ROR + ROR + ROR target molecule CCopyrigit 12044 Peano Laat, be 30 Chapter 11 b. Icould be synthesized by a Williamson ether synthesis. (See Section 10.10 on page 471 of the text.) Natt Clif crcrcron ™S crycuscHo” SM cHcuycHoctscHy +. Br ms Of pede ORS b. Because a primary carbocation cannot be formed, the dehydration is an E2 reaction, The alkene that results is protonated. and the proton that is removed is the one that revults in formation of the most stable alkene, vou # 0 \ ‘ = [ wLbson J \ oO re _/ : OO cog Axe 0gH 7 NSS Ke ON tt : me - =H0 15, “The stained thee-membered rng causes tetiary carbocation with a thnce-nemibere sing wo be eve sable than a secondary extbocation with les site four membered sng cr +H, cn cH, fi Cet + 0 1) wo, : c H bd ‘OM OH I AT ‘Aso, LI nol CT Copyright © 2014 Peason Fauation. tne 16. 17. 18, Vv. 20. Both alcohols form the same carbocation, so they both form the same alkenes. on +OH +H,0 Chapter 1134 = OC- OOO Oo ORO Oo me a Cc ae - + “oN NX b. 7 : ; ( / CH, CHaCHs, CHCHs | CH, ‘on I te ° ; if b. CHyCHSCH2CH)CH da couscous (CCH {CHs Copyright ©2014 Pearson Fao, be, a. e. f Aono J O- 4 HCCHSCH:CH 342 Chapter 11 21. Solved in the text. 22, We saw that HCI does not cleave ethers because CI” is not a good enough nucleophile, F isan even poorer nucleophile, so HF cannot cleave ethers. Therefore. ethers can be cleaved only with HBr or HI. 23. a, Solved in the text b. Cleavage occurs by an Sx? pathway because a primary carbocation is too unstable to be formed. ve HOCH.CH,CHSCH.CHAI © Cleavage oceury by an Sx pathway because the benzyl cation that is formed is relatively stable: T reacts with the benzyl cation, Cano i i d. Cleavage occurs by am Sy1 pathway because the benzyl cation tl 1 reacts with the benzyl cation, is formed is relatively stable: f-~ fr f - \ \ cacucr—olom y — cnencnon + en -sen4 > | \/ \=/ \ Cleavage occurs by an Sx2 pathway because a primary carbocation or a vinylic cation is too unstable tw be formed, o Se _stneratn CY Ne enol ketone Copyritt ©2114 Pear cation, Ine Chapter 1343, f. Cleavage occurs by an Sy! pathway, beea 1 will react with the tertiary carbocation use the tertiary carbocation that Formed is relatively stable: ony cn, cn, I | ae HOCH)CH CH CCH, a HOCH CH>CH{CCHy, 09 Net ! # oct on On oct gethon \ | Ba, Hocincery - fe cHCH—CcH, crc Cer | cuts cn, cH, 25, ‘The reactivity of tetrahydrofuran is more similar to that of @ noneyelic ether, because the ive-membered ring does not have the strain that makes the epoxide reactive. 26. a s on . on on i 1150 1 2 mest ho cue eassaneeaad cHecH— CH shill CHCCH—CHy - GHCH + W ba, by bn, ba by oth ah oi, cn . 2 b. cHccH=cH, MT. cc AE. cnc-cucn, “ crc ene, CHy CH, CH, O| CH,OH 6 9 s mos Cc en a CY’ 5 es uct, i Cd ces QO NHCHy or fj 2 5 cHy | 2B a CHC -CHICHECH, be HOH I on on \_/*on Copytight ©2014 Pearson Econ, Ie M4 Chapter 11 2». Diol formation iy a syn addition reaction, Syn addition to the trans isomer forms the threo pair of enan tiomers. (See Section 6.16. particularly page 277.) cH Hy He H 4 cH | ie - He wee cOHl Wome —c%, gee 2 N 7 ale Ho, an ean HoH HOH k Hy Hs , Sym addition to the eis isomer forms the erythro pair of enantiomers. In this ease. the produet is meso compound because each asymmetric center is bonded to the same four Substituents, so only one stere isomer is formed, Hy Ue u—}-on s ic or Hy ~ ie Honk : cH ¢. Syn audition to the cis isomer forms the erythro pair of enantiomer. cH cH HC OH HO, cH at ons wo-t-ne Wye oH + WS e—Cony or Ho" CHCH; = CHyCH ‘oH coal oom |me 3 sok cHCH, CHICH, Syn addition to the trans isomer forms the threo pair of enantiomer. CH. cH, ‘ f : 1 ycrecon SCH y oF HO" cue cuscHy ‘ott oes ee HOH & a8 RoR CHCH, 2CHy 30. a, Reaction with a peroxyacid forms a product with wo new asymmetric centers. Because itis a syn addition re tion, the trans alkene will form the two teans products Hydroxide ion can attack either of the two axymmetic venters in the epoxide ‘The asymmetric center that is attacked (undergoes an Sx? reaction) will have its contig The configuration of the other asymmetric center will not change. ation inverted, Therefore. when hydroxide ion attacks the asymmetric center on the left of epoxide A. the 5. Mtereoisomer will be Formed: when it attacks the asymmetric center on the right of epoxide A. the R.S Meereoisomer will be formed. The $,R and R.S stereoisomers are identical: itis a meso compound Copyeit 2 2014 Pear Education, Ine Chapter 11345 Attack of hydroxide n on epoxide B will form the same meso compound nc an a fo Koon, + cnygyo—“Gn cH 4 cult i Nou A B |no V mo Hy HoH Je-e~ Sone Horyzo—EroH cH —SoeH, igen no® SN, cH chy ons | Ho-t-HR one won s cH, cu, ‘a meso compound b. Reaction of the cis alkene with a peroxyacid will form only one peroxide (a meso compound). The meso compound has the R.S conliguration, so when it reacts with hydroxide ion, the $.S and RR prod- ucts will be formed no HO A 4 OH cH re HorS~ SSO cH CH cH ey HO Reaction of the cis alkene with a peroxyacid will form the two cis isomers. Hydroxide ion will prefer- centially attack the least sterically hindered carbon of each epoxide. Thus, the 5.5 and R.R products will be formed. ° H ll Pr K ROOOW ene hho a a ve SNS cH HCH, cy cHcnt ‘CH, Ho 4 H n on Sc—c + Se-e: Horyo—CSoH + cH CHEE GSH cH SNcuciy, Ho” NY Copyright ©2014 Pearson cation, Ie 346 Chapter 11 4. Reaction of the (rans alkene with a peroxyacid will form the two trans isomers. Hydroxide ion will preferentially attack the least sterically hindered carbon of each epoxide. Thus, the 5.8 and R.S prod- ucts will be formed. A - eee desce WA EN CEH © CHC ATS cn Hl . i cHy chek, noo c~c; Ne c- HO! me gt ~ HO: SCH, Shy ‘ \ tion leading to I-naphthol can be stabilized by electron delocalization without destroying the 31. The carbe n be stabilized by electron aaromaticity of the intact benzene ring. The carbocation leading to 2-naphthol delocalization only by destroying the aromaticity of the intact benzene ring. Therefore. the leading to L-naphthol is more stable. carbocation that leads to |-naphthol C oy —¢ SO 32. a, with an NIH shift SS + pe cu Copyright 92014 Beurson Education, In Chapter 11347 33, The products obtained from the two reactions would not differ, The epoxide opens in the direetion that fon, The carbocation undergoes an NIH shift, and, as a result of the NIH. shift, both reactants Form the same Ketone intermediate. Because they form the same intermediate, they form the same products. The de ontaining product is the major product, because in the last step of jer to break a carbon-hydrogen bond than a earbon-deuterium bond major product minor product a. Solved in the text 1b, The compound without the double bond in the second ring is more apt to be carcinogenic. It opens to form a less stable carbocation than the other compound, because it can be stabilized by electron delocal- ization only if the aromaticity of the benene ring is destroyed. Because the carbocation is less stable, it is formed more slowly. giving the carcinogenic pathway a better chance to compete with ring-opening, less stable carbocation oH . Cr cpa SON more stable carbocation 3B. Each arene oxide will open in the direction that forms the most stable carbocation. Thus, the methoxy- substituted arene oxide opens so the positive charge can be stabilized by electron donation from the methoxy ‘group. on no, O “och, ‘ocr more sable tes sae Copyright 1.2014 Pearson Euston, Ue M8 Chapter 11 “The nitro-substituted arene oxide opens inthe direction that forms the most stable carbocation intermedi- ate. the one where the positive charge is farther away from the electron-withdrawing NOs group. snore sable less stable 36. Note that: bond shared by two rings cannot be epoxidized b. The epoxide ring in phenanthrene oxides II and III can open in two different directions t different carbocations and. therefore. wvo different phenols Copssigh © 2004 Porn Baton. Is 37. Chapter 11349) The ovo different carbocations formed by phenanthrene oxides I and III differ in stability. One carbocation is more stable than the other because it can he stabilized by electron delocalization without disrupting the aromaticity of the adjacent ring. The more stable carbocition leads to the major product. yp OH ¢\_é i | | OH major product, ‘minor product 1 + = \, + | \ OD HO major proluet ‘minor product HH 4d. Phenanthrene oxide 1 is the most carving nic, because it is the only one that opens to form a earboca- tion that cannot be stabilized without disrupting the aromaticity of the other ring{s). The drugs are metabolized as a result of reacting with water. Nucleophilic water adds to the electrophilic ‘carbon of the carbonyl group. The greater the contribution from the resonance contributor on the right (the ‘one with separated charges), the less electrophilic is the carbonyl carbon, so the less reactive is the ear bony! group. Xylocaine’s resonance contributor with separated charges is more stable than Novocaine’s because it has a positive charge on nitrogen, which is less electronegative than oxygen. Therefore, Xylocaine is less reac tive and consequently has a longer half-life. o i Ue o- “sn SA Novocaine HG: Xylocaine Copyright © 2014 Pearson Faton fs. 40. A 2 Chapter 11 ‘The strong base will immediately remove a proton from the protonated amine, und then there would be no base to carry out the elimination reaction. “The major products result from removing a proton frem the B-carbon that is bonded to the most hydrogens. cHy CH.CHCH.N + cH, CHy ‘The minor products result from removing a proton from the B-carbon that is bonded to the fewest hydrogens, cH CECH, + -NCHLCHLCH, CH, CHy ‘The only difference is the leaving group. chy Hy CH CHNC CHa CHT NCH HS cu ach case, a proton is removed from the B-carbon that is bonded to the most hyd cH; chy CHy a. CH)=CHCHCHSCH.NCH, Se CHS Copyright © 2014 Pearson Easton Ine db © Chapter 11351 Solved in the text. cunemenene, cncrrcrcrey 2. cacncu.cicn, Br Cus CH; Br CH) NCH, HO” | Hy Hy lo (CH),N_ + CH,CH,CHjCH=CH, cus l > exes a rg \ i ee ) XC Ho" ON CH, CH, CH, CH; CH, CH) c | f\ 1h are an OX Ho THOR cH | cH cue | cu, ch cHy : Lh mH NSO ALS tor + HO ‘The synthesis must be done with fert-butyithiol and a methy! halide. It cannot be done with methanethiol and tert-butyl bromide because a tertiary alkyl halide cannot undergo an $x? reaction, so it would form an elimination product rather than a substitution product. + Br XY x + HO ho’ HB ‘The highest yield of the target molecule is obtained by having the less substituted of the two R groups bf the thioether he the alkyl halide and the more substituted be the thiol cH cu omy O HCH Br L wicusn HO cucys: CCB CHCHSCH:CHs + Br * HO Copyeigh > 2014 Pearson Buaaton tne 352 Chapter 11 4. The synthesis must be done with these reagents because the yp" carbon of the benzene ring cannot un- dergo back-side attack 48. The first compound is too insoluble. ‘The second compound is used clinically; it has fewer carbons that the first compound. so it is more soluble in water. The third compound is less reactive than the second compound, because the lone pair on the nitrogen ean be delocalized into the benzene ring. so the lone pair is less apt to displace a chloride ion and form the three-membered ring that is needed for the compound to be an alkylating agent. H gX \, / 46. Melphalan is a good alkylating reagent because the group on the side chain makes the compound water soluble. It can deloculize electrons into the benzene ring so it iy not as reactive as the 100 reactive com- pound in Problem 45. 47. Cyclophosphamide, carmustine. and chloroambucil are less reactive than mechlorethamine because, unlike the lone-pair electrons on the nitrogen of mechlorethamine, the lone-pair electrons on the nitrogen of the other three compounds ean be delocalized. and, therefore. these compounds are less apt to form the three-membered ring that is needed tor the compound to be an alkylating agent. ° i 48. a. CIRCHCHLOCCH, 4. cHCH=CHCH, 2. CHCHCHCHCL cH, ony b. CH.CH.CH.CHBr cHcH.ch—cen, i cho On lan oH e cHcucncHo fh cH.CH.CH—CCI \= I chy OW oct, -CH.CHOH Ba ye ‘The other alcohol cannot undergo dehydration to form an alkene. be- Copstight 9 2014 Poaron Eatin, le Chapter 1353, oH b. ‘The rate-limiting step in a dehydration is carbocation formation, A sec- ondary allylic cation is more stable than a secondary carbocation and therefore is formed more rapidly. 6 So tertiary carbocation is more stable than a secondary carbocation, af A secondary benzylic cation is more stable than a secondary carbocation. \ on t ef ‘A secondary benzylic cation is more stable than a py OH O on - on ou D E 51, Only one S42 reaction takes plaice in a and b, so the product has the inverted configuration compared to the configuration of the reactant D b on f é a c idm ; W0 HCH Q ea ova -. cwcH 7 V'H a. CHC Nore i cl Vosok sa 7 CHSCHY N i ine (Ry deter propane (5)1-deatero--propanol cHCH, 7 9 HCH Ay cHncHy, worn 5 esa PH Ro b—f-on i i PO ese OT (Ay dete -propanol (Steer -propanol Copyright 92014 Reanim Ltn, te 354 Chapter 11 dD | c be cHchy VE eR ‘oH (Ry L-deuterio- -propanol ° I Ho— + R-S-al il ° (Ry L-dewterio-I-propanol ocHy fe tiling Gy a ~ CHCHY CHLCHY * Yosoue aversion ‘o (S)-1-deuterio-|-methoxypropane 9 cHCHy CHCHS pine | I co Rso—}—p J DOCH i 2 imerson i (5)-1-deuterio--methoxypropane Since the desired product has the sume configuration as the starting material, it can be synthesized us- ing reactions that do not break uny of the bonds to the axymnietric center » D a cia 1 alle c ou crcns NG) ott cHscny Nocn, cH cmcns Noy (Ry Tale {Ry-L-deuterio-1-propanol ivel-methorypropane It could also be synthesized using two consecutive Sy2 reactions. Since each one involves inversion of configuration, the final product will have the same configuration as the starting material, For example. treating the starting material with PBr3 forms (S)-I-bromo-I-deuteriopropane. Treating ($)-I-bromo- |-deuteriopropane with methoxide ion forms (R)-I-deuterio-I-methoxypropane, Dd » D Ec Ww crc: of CHCHY VH imehion ‘OH inversion cus A {R)-I-deuterio--propanol (5) L-bromo-1-deuteriopropane (Ry-L-deuterio- I-methoxypropane \ uo rt OZ © |reitio. uy 2.40 ay CY Aol Lon (Cp we [ ae Cx OH on o OH nsoya on 22. CY suoe! Cy 7 ] 128 CL Ticoon Tia 2H. oc 2 terra —“~on oO” “te | crus 14 Pearson Elation Copyright 53. >hesene and 3hexene cncrencnen.cron HW! + CHYCHSCH,CH: fee CHyCHyCH3CHCH CH, cH HOCH, « OCH, S40 a CHACBr + CICLO & . I cH cHOCH, b. CHCHCHOH + CHA on | Hy © v e CH ° 5 don J CHC a “yr ° h 7 lury alcohol cH I CHCHCCHy chy OH 2.3-dimethyl-2-butanol a tertiary aleohol -Dimethy|-2-butanol will dehy drate faster because it iste Chapter 11355 CHsCHSCH,CH;CH=CHs HACHCH, “= CHyCHCH= CHCH,CH, + CH\CHJCH;CH=CHCH, + HT Bherene (cis and trans) (cis and trans) cHy CH,CHCH,N + CH, CHy C ry alcohol, whereas 3.3-dimethyl-2-butanol CHy I Cac comy I OH CHy 3,3-dimethyl-2-butanol a secondary alcohol Copynpt © 2014 Pears cation Ine Chapter 1 56. Ms 2-ethyloxirane a CHACHCHCHOH ¢. CHCHCHCH,OH 1! oH on 0.1. MHCLis a dilute solution of HCI in water. dh. CHYCHCHCH: OCH, on $7. a. [tan NIH shift occurs. both carbocations will form the same intermediate Ketone. Because it is about four times easier to break a C—H bond (A) compared with a C—D bond (&,). about 80% of the deuterium will be retained yD HHO 5 tk - ‘ —< tho wa at “/ b. If an NIH shift does not occur, 50% of the deuterium wil be retained, because the epoxide can open equally easily in either direction (Ay is equal to 3) and subsequent loss of H™ or D~ is fas Copyright © 2014 Peano Edwtion 58, cr alkohol 2oci|cH,cooH H 59, a be CHCHICH= CH; eS om O- L ) Hoe tees + Chapter 11357 snajor product minor product LR BATHE 2.80, HALO. ‘OH original unknown alcohol 1 Ruta Those no” CHACHCH.CH.OH H1s05 CHICH=CHCH, + 10 ° i LR.BH/THE moc) a “on 210; HOO" cuicoon” CHCH:CHS we Br oH O ‘Substitution product ‘oes |€H,C008 MOO OC jecas ° ' Q wt Copyright © 204 Pesnun Eductin, Ie: 358 Chapter 11 60. When (S)-2-butanol loses water, the ayymmetrie center in the reactar fore, the chirality is Jost. When water attacks the carbocation ‘arbocation, forming (5)-2-butanol and (R)-2-butanol with equ Kom 18801 onde, “hon cHch: You, (5}-2-butanot nt becomes a pkanar yy? carbon. There- it can attack from either side of the planar Hn ‘OH a cme ¢ N fol + 3 = CHC Is euch 1,0 ¢ cHyCH=CHCH: Hy + HO H oH “OH L ont cu.cls Yor é wef Sen wd oncns (R)2-butanol HCH: OK 63. Diethyl ether is the ether that would be obtained in greatest yield, because i is symmetrical ether: Since ‘alcohol is used in its synthesis. Therefore, it is the only ether that would be her requires two different alcohols. Therelore, the itis symmetrical. only one formed. In contrast the synthesis of an unsymmetrical e unsymmetrical ether is one of three different ethers that would be formed Copyright ©2014 Pearson dota. Chapter 11359 64 co a GC a O ho. H.C, bo CHACH.CHCHBr —“°— CHCH,CH.CH OH ° ii > CH,CHSCH,COH 65. _N-Methylpiperidine forms 1. ony cea , I Co] She = c=cucn,crycuxcn, 2 - aN, Jey a 2 Hy CH.==CHCH CH=CH, 2-Methylpiperidine forms 1,5-hexadiene, Oh Bhs CHy | FAs0.10 chy CHCH:CH:CH,CHANCH Len a 840.140 a3 icp er Ce=cucn,cHscii—cth or hytogens 3-Methylpiperidine forms 2-methyl-I,4-pentadiene. oy Wy Len C ase N ZAG. au _ CH)=CHCHCHCH NCH, Lei 2 An0.1,0) nal chy I CH= CHCHC 4+-Methy piperidine forms 3 nethyl-1,4-pentadiene. eee ko r 5 oe \ RZ Hoe Leu n an 2-Ag20.180) cy “chy pes chy HCHCH=CH, Copy 204 Posen Eton. fe 360 Chapter 11 lary alcoho! and, therefore, will undergo an SxI reaction. The carbocation sto a more stable tertiary carbocation. 66, 3-Methy!-2-butanol is a secon intermediate that is formed rearran; Hy cus cHy cH | | i : 1 crycucucHs T+ cH.HCcH, —> CH:CHy | a Hy = CH CHLCCHS 1 OH " Br 3-methyl-2-bunanol Methyl l-propano! is a primary alcohol and, therefore, will undergo an Sx2 reaction. Because carbo gement cannot occur. ‘ations are not formed in Sx? reactions. a carbocation rearran cHs cH I Br CHACHCHSOH y+ CHYCHCH:Br 2emethyl-t-propanol 09 6. 67. a CHICHCHCH, + CHS: co cH CHCH.OCHs +c cl —— / on on Ben CO fey al at H 68 cancion 2. crew mc: LET. carensci.oM srg CHCHACH: I ‘ 210s, HO HO pyridine I 8 Nal cascuon 2s cen chy concoct HCH, cH Copyright 92014 Pearson Falaton. Chapter 11 361 Ch chy fen 69. HC OH . - Cy CHy | \ | chy cry cu, SH 0: : ©. Ce On +H +H A oe Cyclopropane does not react with HO”, because cyclopropane does not contain a leaving groups a carb- anion is Tar too basie to serve as a leaving group. Ethylene oxide reacts with HO”, because ethylene oxide contains an RO” leaving group. 7H The alcohol must lose a proton before it attacks the sulfonium ion, otherwise there would be two ponitive charges on the intermediate R R hk, RCH OW === RCH HE Sc ce LN a Hl A Ate NT Copy ©2014 Peano Pat, Ie 362 Chapter 11 % “ & (ch Sa Lg?! Lg Oo) ( a 7 “+ HOBr | \ HO + Br ee 73. The product of each reaction is an alkene. 1130, ; CH.CHCHCH, === CH.CH:CHCHs ===> CHLCH= CHET + HHO , ¢ on + HO iy cciicucy, 82+ cHCH=CHCIy + HO +B ( Br Recall that alkenes undergo electrophilic addition reactions. and the first step in an electrophilic addition reaction is addition of an electrophife to the alkene. The acid-catalyzed dehydration reaction is reversible, because the electrophile (H) needed to react with the alkene in the first step of the reverse reaction is available, The base-promoted elimination reaction ofa hydrogen halide iy not reversible, becauye an electophile is ‘not available to react with the alkene in the first step of the reverse reaction. gz— 6 ~ —- Geno Gencricnsc br Yperscrsctispr ui ) oom, & The sixcmembered ring is formed by atack on the more sterically hindered carbon of the epoxide Attack on the less sterically hindered carbon is preferred. CH HO OH Ethyl aleohol is not obtained as a product, because it reacts with the excess HI and forms ethyl iodide. im a CH,CH;OCHLCH, = eHCHL + CHACHOH NS cHucH + 10 :B is any base in the solution (HSO3, HO. ROH), on 4 Cte oli ENS pH HC ONO con Copysigh © 2014 Pearson Elation. te 364 Chapter 11 79a. The primary amine is 2-methyl-3-pentanamine. cH tv Bbsdruzens one Basen ie out a ial cwycinentatcn, Gr CHRCHEHEHCH ihenettony NH 7 cuties V CALNcHy Ho" 2-methy! 3: pentanamine bn by a y cH CHACH=CHCHCH, + CHNCHy 4-methyl-2-pentene Hy The primary amine is 3-methyl-2-butanime CH ent ors ois chy i wos seo A CHCHCHCH, SSS> CHYCHCHCH 5% CHACHCHCH, 7 CH= CHCHCH ‘ C0. cH 0 ‘i N CHNCH; cHyNCHs + CHANCHS oH Hy HO" Hy The secondary amine is 3-methylpyrrolidine. cHy _/ CHy CH a oleae Co) HHCHCHSNCHs x Wo a on cH, CH cy CH, chy | ke i . = CH) =CHCHCH:NCHy CHCHCHNCHy CH, HO cHy CHO CHy a 80. Ais the substitution product that forms when methoxide ion attacks a earbon of the three-membered ring and eliminates the amino group. thereby opening the ring. It does not discolor Bry because it does not have a double bond to which Brs ean add, ‘Copyright 9.2014 Pear estion Ine Chapter 12373 Solutions to Problems 1. All the reactions vecur be (methane, pK, ~ 60) wuse, in each case, the reactant acid is a stronger acid than the product acid 2. The greater the polarity of the carbon-metal bond, the more reactive isthe organometallic compound Polarity depends on the difference in electronegativity between the aloms forming the bond: the greater the difference in electronegativity, the more polar the bond. Ct C—Na 25-9 = 6 The electronegativity difference between carbon and sodium is greater than that between carbon and lith- jum. Therefore, organosodium compounds (with a more polar carbon-metal bond) are more reactive than organolithium compounds, Transmetallation will occur if the new metal’ electronegativity is closer to that of carbon, Because gallium (1.8) is more electronegative than magnesium, (1.2), and therefore closer to that of carbon, transmetal. {ation will occur. Notice that after transmetallation the number of alkyl groups attached to gallium is the same as the number of chorines that were attached lo it in the reactant 3 CHyMgCl + GaCl, -——+ (CH4),Ga + 3 MgC or" *# 4. Solved in the text AL or 6 Because the tertiary alky! halide will undergo an elimination reaction with the strongly basic ‘organocuprate. 7. The Bris replaced by the alky! group ofthe omanocuprate 2 «! rewcnyctis, 2 rcrycHycisi Le eHemcHcucnscai | | | CHC eH | | BCHaCHon ACH) CH, sooN | or Zc \ u " | 4 H ‘ CHCH CH CH Foe. 4 4 oa on 8 a. CHsCH==CH. Hac CHa be CHRCHLEHCHCH, oH cH Copyeight ©.2014 Pearson Eaton. te 374 Chapter 12 (Y- {-\ oa .CH.CHOH ob. cucuion oe. ()ciACHCH.OH cH (rene N77 CHOH + HO i < on Son . uy l oH 9 cHCH—cH CHO + HO" bs Dehydration of the primary alcohol group cannot occur, because it cannot love water via an E} path= ‘way. since & primary carbocation cannot be formed. Ht eannot lose water via an E2 pathway because the sB-carbon is not bonded to a hydrogen. However, dehydration of the tertiary aleahol group eam occur “The product is an enol that tautomerizes to an aldehyde. (See page 311 of the wext) 86. ~ )N wor + |X 87, Cyclopentene oxide undergoes buck-side attack by the nucleophife, so the two substituents inthe products ave trans to each other, Therefore, both the R.R-isomer and the S.S-isomer are obtained CY +e Savem © oxide Copyrit 0) 2014 Pern Education I Chapter 11369) 88. Notice that the initially generated carbocation can undergo either a 1,2-methy! shift or a 1,2-alkyl shift HO OH om, ocr a Hc—j_ leon, HOU cH, "AS ? \ ) : HO ct oO CHs HO) CHy Sow S CHy CHy chy HOt + eee . ox chy c chy Ho * on 0 on b. ft + Hd ‘CH—CHy chy che 89. a. A nitrogen is stronger base than un oxygen, so unlike an epoxide that can be opened without the oxy gen being protonated, the three-membered nitrogen-containing ring has to be protonated to improve the lewving propensity of the group. b. A nucleophile such as an NH; group on a chain of DNA can reuct with the three-membered ring, It nucleophile on another chain of DNA reacts with another of the three-membered rings in this com: pound, the two DNA chains will be crosslinked. CCopytight © 2014 Pearson Eaton, 370 4, Chapter 11 Chapter LI Practice Test Which of the following reagents is the best one to use in order to convert methy! alcohol into methyl bromide? Br HBr Bry NaBr Br Which of the following reagents is the best one (0 use in order to convert methyl alcohol into methyl chloride? CL/CHCl C/A Cr SOCK, NaCl a. What would be the major product obtained from the reaction of the epoxide shown betow in methanol containing 0.1 MHCI? What would be the major product obtained from the reaction of the epoxide in methanol containing 0.1 MNaOCH,? Draw the major produet(s) of each of the following reactions: CH) CH, +l a CHCHCHANCHSCH,CH.CHs CH, HOT © Copyright 2014 Pearson Fain. Ine Chapter 11371 Draw the major elimination product that is obtained when each of the Following alcohols is heated in the presence of HsS0, cHy I a. CHCHSC—CHCH, (CH,CH.CH,CH.CH,OH. it OW CH, Hy : oH b. CH CHACHCH—CCH, a Ye | I ou da, LZ Indicate whether each of the following statements is true or false: a. Tertiary aleohols are easier to dehydrate than secondary alcohols. Tor b. Alcohols are more acidic than thiols. ror €. Alcohols have higher boiling points than thiols. TOR d. The acid-catalyzed dehydration of a primary alcohol is an Sy! re T OF ‘The Hofmann elimination reaction is an E2 reaction, TOF What products would be obtained trom heating the following ethers with one equivalent of HE? cH, _ I \o-on,t \ evens b (So on’) Draw the major product of each of the following reactions CHACH, i a. CHACHSCHLNH, + CHCH,SCH,CH, = —— b CHI WOH + SOC, Hs0, (CH CH;CHCH,CH,CH,OH CH,CHCH,CH,OH cHCo ne CH\CHCH,CHJOH CPs Copyright © 2014 Pear cation, I ‘Compounds Important Terms alkene metathesis (olefin metathesis) alkyne metathesis coupling reaction dialky! lithium euprate Gilman reagent (organocuprate) nard reagent rig Heck reaction olefin metathesis (alkene metathes organoboron compound organocuprate (Gilman reagent) organolithium compound organomagnesium compound organometallic compound organopalladium compound oxidative addi transmetallation, «reaction that breaks the double bond of an alkene and then rejoins the fragments to form a new double bond between two carbons that were not previously bonded, gents reaction that breaks the triple bond of an alkyne and then rejoins the fr to form a new triple bond between two carbons that were not previously bonded ‘a reaction that joins two groups with a carbon-carbon bond, (R)sCuLi: prepared by eating an organolithium reagent with cuprous iodide adialky! lithium cuprate used to replace @ halogen in an alkyl. aryl. of vinylic halide with an alky the compound that results when magnesium is inserted between the carbon and the halogen of an alky! halide (RMgBr. RMgCh) a reaetion that couples an aryl halide or vinylic halide with an alkene: areuetion that breaks the double bond of an alkene and then rejoins the fragments to form a new double bond between two carhons that were not previously bonded. an alkyl-organoboron compound, an alkenyl-organoboron compound. or an ary-organoboron compound: R'BLOR)s a dialkyl lithium cuprate used to replace a hal vinylie halide with an alkyl group. n inant alkyl. aryl. or RLi: prepared by adding lithium to an alkyl halide, RMgBr or RMgCl: prepared by alding an alkyl halide to magnesiuan shavin metal bond, a compound with a carbon ‘a compound with a palladium-carbon bond. insertion of a metal between two atoms elimination of a metal trom between two atoms, resulting in @ covalent bond being formed between two carbons. a reaction that couples an aryl halide or vinylic halide with an 0 reagent, the exchange of two groups (often alkyl and halide) bewween two metal. 12. 14, 16. & TS doo WJ Solved in the text Chapter 12375 Her jh Pac a, Solved inthe text. b, Solved inthe test. j Sy ae Add the number of carbons in the chain in the boron compound and then make sure that it i product, a ay™ 3 SS ry Br Analkenylboron compound is prepared from an alkyne. aN I-pentyne Cp Copyright © 2014 Pearson Bdgcaton, fe ! SS 5 NA uso Sy | | VAL ry XA eee Marting material to the number of carbons inthe organo- the same as the number of carbons in the chain in the 376 Chapter 12 7, Suzuki reaet a BE OR Puls ai ea eo 4 , OR ae . a _ ba 7 | po Heck reactions ad) Pal. Os ae ay KK 7 : Ua ~ ane Z : cen with an alkyl group, A Heck renetion Notice that only a Suzuki reaction can be used to replace a halog replaces a halogen wih an alkenyl group. However, the alkenyl group ean subsequently be reduced to an alkyl group, + eno“ rove 18. Oe » ene crew \/ . 1 4 CHYCHCH =CHCHSCH, E and Z A oe yee eR Copyright © 2014 Paarsun Education. I 20. 2. 4. 25, Chapter 12377 ‘To determine the size of the ring that is formed in ring-closing metathesis, subtract 2 from the number of cearbon in the reactant. -O © one © Solved in the text © a b. Solved in the text. a “~~ Nos Ne ¢ c LV). & ch Noon, + CHy i cl Nn, “ow “Ox” c: 4 CALAN S Cis the only one that can be used to form a Grignard reagent The Grignard reagent formed from A will be destroyed immediately by reacting with the proton of the aleohol group ‘The Grignard reagent formed from B will be destroyed inmediately by reacting carboxylic acd group, The Grignard seagent Formed from D willbe destroyed immediatly by reacting with the proton of the sti grea, ith the proton of the AS Li D = ethylene oxide G = ethylene oxide B= Cul E=H H-H C= (CHy.Culi = Nalt Copysit ©2014 Pear Eduction. Ine 378 Chapter 12 NT vs A ‘ont [+ chs Soot 1 Leet 7 x | 70 HOO or Br cuLi A HCH ' Z~\oli Ave CHHOH Ficig J wes LC et Sy I 2HCr Wwe , he b , b. CH,CHCHOH pee CHCUCUI Src fecermae f f a CHs cus ony 1g Lay 2c) cnscricrecrecnLon Hs aS : scwcd ES. enencecencnon oN LB Pils fT +™“ anc we on e 9 CHy scticls 480, nia LO? “a a ; 1 oa a AN gy 2 Se) ae an Le fennennjcats 2S on eine Wane a HCW ra ma Br b. Ne Br 8 a. | Cr A aw AAA, Copyright © 2014 Peano Eaton. Ine Chapter 12-379 28 ae a e Os a f A 3 Ayo { Se cn ~ wa | b. | © } | a aa 30. Remember that the double bond that cor E (rans) con! mes from the alkenyl-organoboron compound alway’ has the Copy eebs ©2014 Reason Fuoco, Ie 380 Chapter 12 b. HCH. Br CHACH=CHCHs o ts s EE = (CHCHCHICHY Cul ! poet peclencr, oF | C#.COOH \ oc ' , ° i CHACH,CH.CHCH.CH i °. on RCOOH, oN LICHICHy Cub I FOO cycfcncr, PORES cH.cucHcHscls cus 14304) CHICH=CCHCH, CHy Copyright ©2014 Pearson Edun. Ie I COOH 2 CHXCH==CHCH, — Chapter 12381 9, on aN LeCHy Cali i] CHCH—CHCH, ge cmncHcHCH, cn, [soci |eH.coon or ' 9 Wi CHRCCHCH, | chy 34 Once some bromoeyclohexane has been converted to a Grignard reagent, the nucleophilic Grignard reagent an react with the bromocyclohexane that has not been converted to a Grignard reagent. eo= Heo. a OH 38 a Aon CT a Oy XY) 34. The student did not get any of the ex the alcohol group. Addition of HCI/| Cj — “OO + MgBry ‘pected product, because the Grignard reagent removed a proton from 1.0 protonated the alkoxide ion and opened the epoxide ring, ee a Ihc. OH i ou He Y ho on ° br cui 2X cHsci.on f tt ra 2 Ne 36, Remember that the double bond that comes from the alkenyl-organoboron compound always has the E (trans) configuration, aC cannot be prepared by a Heck reaction, because the double bond in the alkenyl-organoboron compound reactant of a Heck reaction always has the £ configuration in the product. Both double bonds in C have the Z confi uration, Copyriht © 2014 Peayom Education, Ine 382 Chapter 12 ‘A-cannot be directly synthesized by a Heck reaction. A Heck reaetion couples a vinylic halide and a fikene, so the product will contain a least two double bonds, However, A ean be mate by & Heck 7 tion followed by reduction of the double bonds. . om Oo al J + aca KY 1, | pac own bs The starting materials for the synthesis of A are shown above. ‘Those forthe synthesis of B are Shown here. 3. CH,CH=CHCHCHs 2pentene cHCH= Be CHCH:CH A = apiece containing two carbons and B = & piece containing three carbons, The two pes can be put together in four different ways. A-A BOB AWB BTA ‘Two of the four pieces (AB and B—A) represent 2-pentene, Therefore the maximum yield of 2-pentene is 50%. 38 Bombykol can be prepared using a Suzuki reaction, First, make the organoboron compound, Draws the vinylic bromide so you can see what product will be obtained from the eoupling reaction. Ce oe aaa a | Pats | to | ' A OO Copyright 02014 Peon Eaton. Ie rer 12383 Bombykol can also be prepared using a Heck reaction, 1 nar ZOO oy SE Lm 39 a. 2-butene and 3-hexene b. ‘Two symmetrical alkenes. The only alkenes that will be synthesized other than the target alkene ar the reactant alkenes. 40. There ate three possibilities A. B, and C. Only the bromine bonded the benrylie carbon can be replied by hydroxide ion via a nucleophilic substitution reaction. Both bromines can react with mas Form an organomagnesium group that can react with acid, aw CHB Ce HBr SG Gi br A B c Copyeigh® 204 Pearson Pawan, Ie 384 Chapter 12 12 metathesis to form high-molecular-weight polymers, Relieving il (recall that sp? carbons have 120° bond angles) causes the 42. Some alkenes can undergo ring-open the strain of a ring that contains a double bon reaction to go to completion. fa. First draw the product obtained by breaking the double bond and forming new double bonds. Seeing asonable structure forthe polymer that six-membered rings are formed allows you to draw a rea N\ al CHCH =CH — AQ 4 “+= CH=CHCHCH,CH3CHCH=CHCHCH,CH _ rR encore b. Fon= Copyright © 2014 Peano Baton In 1 2 Chapter 12385 Chapter 12 Practice Test, Which is more reactive, an organocadmium compound (electronegativity of Cd compound (electronegativity of lead = 1.6)? 1.5) or an organolead ich of the Following alky! halides could be used to form a Grignard reagent? | 4 _— woe wa wo What are the products of the following reactions? a oN Br I Pa: ) + 2 aaann ‘What are the products of the following reactions? a A Pats 2 at. | 2 fORCHAN OWS eG = © Je eon Draw the products of ain ich of the Following reactions: Gaby ANS Giuhos Copysiht 82014 Pearson Education, Ine 386 & 9. 10. u. Chapter 12 Indicate how each of the following compounds could be prepared using the given starting materia " : " cls ‘c yan N, a . J W Br bw Anon awe / {What alcohols would be formed from the reaction of ethylene oxide with the following orgunocuprates? CH:CHy Which of the following could be used asa reactant in a Heck or a Suzuki reaction’? J eae wa : _ . ae AY OD A Oo wee w& ‘Show how the following compounds can be prepared by a fa. Heckreaction, by Suzuki reaction Hs [4a ava aoe i © é s What are the products of the following reactions? LO al HO Pat, ‘aie be Cr + Using any needed reagents, show how the folowing synthesis could be eared out ° B a j a Brees on SS S Copyright © 2014 Pearson Fauaton Ine Chapter 13389 Solutions to Problems initiation Propagation a MW termination 2 ch, H+ 2c cle + Cy) + -CHy + HEL “CHs + Cl —- cha + a Ch + CHC! ——~ CHC + HEI CHC] + Ch ——= CHC, + Ch Ch + CHC == eH, + HEL SCHCL + Ch =~ CHC + Ch Cl + CHC + -ec, + HCI “Ch + Ch + CC + Ch + €Ch + cy _ CH,CH:CHCH;CCH:CHy Hy Six secondary hydrogens 4 a3 es es a2 4 bo a La na S. Solved in the text. 6 Solved in the text. Copyeiht © 2014 Pearson Flan. ts, 390 & 10. Chapter 13 fa. The major product would be the one obtained from the removal of a tertiary hydrogen. CH cue br b. ‘The relative amounts of the four possible products would be OX1=6 1X 1600= 1600 2x 82= 164 3X1= 1600 1773 percentage of major product = X 100 = 90.2% fa, Chlorination, because the halogen is substituting for a primary hydrogen, b. Bromination, because the halogen is substituting for a tertiary hydrogen ¢. Becuuise the molecule has only one kind of hydrogen, both chlorination and bromination will form only one monohalogenated product Sotsed inthe xt ot cH a. crue 2+ cnyden be ch on ty lien one b. CH\CHCH, — CHSCCHy (CH) =CCHa Br CH; CHy ie CHy cnneneny = eden, 2 ences + ene bs | To start peroxide formation, the chai en atom from an carbon of the ether, itiating radival removes a hyd a. Diy most apt to form a peroxide, because removal of a hydrogen trom an a-carbon forms a secondary radical b, Bis least apt to form a peroxide. because it does not have any hyd cHy ee + Be ns bonded to its a-carbons, Hy chy UA br UA br + HBr + Be LO Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education. Ie CHAPTER 13 Radicals + React Important 7 alkane alkoxy radical allylic radical benzylic radical combustion free ra (radical) halogenation reaction heterolytic bond cleavage (heterolysis) homolytic bond cleavage (homolysis) nitiation step roxide ps peroxide effect primary alkyl rad addition re radical chain reaction radical inhibitor ons of Alkanes 1 hydrocarbon that contains only single bonds. an alkoxy group with an unpaired electron on oxygen, a species with an unpaired electron on an allylic carbon, species with an unpaired electron on a benzylic carbon, ion with oxygen that takes place at high temperatures and converts alkanes, (or other organic compounds) to carbon dioxide and water aan atom ora molecule with an unpaired electron, the reaction of an alkane (or other organic compounds) with a haloger breaking a bond with the result that both bonding electrons stay with one Of the previously bonded atoms. breaking a bond with the result that each of the atoms that formed the bond gets one of the bonding electrons. the step in which radicals are created and/or the step in which the radical needed for the first propagating step is created, a compound with an O—O bond, peroxide causes the initial step in thy bromine radical instead of a proton, addition of HBr (o an alkene to be a aun alkyl radical with the unpaired e iron on a primary carbon in the first of a pair of propagation steps, a radical reacts to produce another radi- ccal that reacts in the second propagation step to produce the radical that was the ictant in the first propagation step, an atom or a molecule with an unpaired electron, aan addition reaction in which the first species that adds is a radical a reaction in which radicals are formed and react in repeating propagating steps. 1. compound that traps radicals. 387 Lo Elation tn 388 Chapter 13 reaction reactivity-selectivity principle saturated hydrocarbon secondary alkyl radical mn step -y alkyl radical ‘a compound that creates radicals ‘a substitution reaction that has a radical intermediate. the greater the reactivity of a species, the less selective it will be. a hydrocarbon that contains only si Le bonds (it is saturated with hydrogen). aan alky! radical with the unpaired electron on a secondary carbon, wo radicals combine to produce a molecule in which afl the electrons, fe paired. aan alkyl radies with the unpaired electron on a tertiary carbon. Consign © 2008 Feat In Chapter 13 391 cH cH 13. a, CHKC=CHCH, HBr) cue—cnen, br chy cHy b. cHeScHieny) + HeT - ene HCH, a chy ony e cne=cicn, + mp ond enc, br chy Hs acunc=cucn, ¢ ce PS cn cHy I CHACHCHC] + CHy 1. a. CHACHCH, CHy swehiral b, achiral CHCH, Gc, | o be CHCHICHCH, “E+ CHYCHSCHCHCL + C + yee . achiral cee We cn chiral 15, Bromination can occur at either of the 1wo tertiary positions. Because the radical intermediate is sp? hybridized and the the bottom of the plane, (Notice that there are four stereoisomers: RAR, RSS, efore planar, the incoming bromine can add to tertiary radical from either the top or ind S.R.) be \ a CA A Om Cr Copy B 2014 Pears ction forms a compound with an asymmetric center, Br Be 392 Chapter 13 b._ The reaction forms two constitutional isomers, and each constitutional isomer has two stereoisomers. oo” oo oo” — or" - ie |e ie a - cr oe : on 17. CHyBr Solved in the text jon in Problem 18 has one asymmetric center. Therefore, two allylic substituted 19, The product of the react figuration at the asymmetric center and one with the bromoalkenes are obtained, one with the R coi S configuration, Br Br ee aN (Re-E-bromo-2-peniene — «S}-L:-bromo-2-pentene a 2s CI = eee -or a Cnc _. cr cong 12014 Pearwm Eston, Is Chapter 13393 I. There are two sets of secondary allylic hydrogens, a and b (plus a less reactive set of primary allylic hydrogens on the methy! group), Removing one of the a allylic hydrogens forms an intermediate in which the unpaired electron is shared by two secondary allylic carbons. Removing one of the B allylic hydrogens forms an inter- mediate in which the unpaired electron is shared by a tertiary allylic carbon and a secondary allylic carbon, a eh mh Gh e DEC , oi cm mnt O- —-O Therefore, the major products are obiained by removing a b allylic hydrogen, CH CH HC Br > Se Oo), = _ J Sy mame LU ; L-mehyyelterene we pe cae ons 2 Be OF OO CO he Hs Br, ,CHy HAC, Br 2. The product has two asymmetric « Because addition of Bry is anti, only the stereoisomers with the bromine atoms on opposite sides of the ring ate obtained, edi Hu 0 3. The product does not have an asymmetric center, so it does not have stereoisomers HC Br Ne 2014 Poses Elion, te, 394 Chapter 13, 4. The product hay two ayymmetric centers, Because radical addition of HBr can be either syn or anti, four stereoisomers are obtained ay products, AN Br oe he ° r a cs _ cuCootT CJ) ae cam . z 23. 7 a ° A o A I —y— j— a. fi or a mi ts Copyright © 2014 Pearson Flvetion In Chapter 13395 24, Antioxidants are radical inhibitors. That is, they react with radicals and, thereby, prevent radical chain rea tions. There are several OH groups in a catechin that, upon losing a hydrogen atom as a result of reacting with radical, form a radical that is stabilized by electron delocalization, This highly stabilized radical is, sufficiently unreactive that it cannot damage cells by reacting with them, An example of one of the st radicals is shown below. on on 25, CH =CHCHCH:CHy =~ CHSCH=CHCHLCHy |p. Bis cH CHEHCHRCH, + BrCHsCH—CHCH:CH, be b, In the radical intermediate that leads to the major products, the unpaired electron is shared by a primary carbon and a tertiary carbocation. In the radical intermediate that leads to the minor products, the unpaired electron is shared by a primary and a secondary carbocation, It therefore, is not as stable asthe intermediate that leads to the major products oi, cae=cH= ry a on oi on oi cae—cHeise + cen =ctt mCHe=CHeHN, + crk=CeHeA h th In bromination, selectivity is much more important than probability. Therefore, even though twice as many hydrogens are available for removal by a bromine radical that leads to the minor products. they \ill still be minor products because the easier-to-remove hydrogens lead to the major products aN e. no reaction (There is no light or heat, so radicals cannot be Formed.) Br major produet (Copyright ©2014 Pear Hato, In 396 28. Chapter 13 CHCL CHy fp \ +o ww Ne CHS limethypropane CH 7 _ ae CH cl Four secondary hydrogens cea be removed to form this product cl gs b.CHLCHACHCHCH.CH, J-methylhexane oa cn, on Six secondary hydro removed to form this product noved to form this proxluet Because a bromine radical is much more selective than a chlorine radical, the bromine radical will remove a tertiary hydrogen in order to form a tertiary radical Hy Br CHy Br cH Sc cHy In e and f. because one product is under kinetic control and the other is under thermodynamic control, the ‘major product will depend on the conditions under whieh the reaction is eartied out Capysigh 2014 Pearon Education, te 3. ai. Chapter 13397 CH, cH, cunect CH CHCH 6) ox 19 fraction of the total that is L-chloro-2-methylpropane —L-chloro- = 064 = 0.68 = 064 (9 +x) 9 = 5.76 + 0.64 3.24 = 0.6 v5 We have found that itis five times easier for a chlorine radical to remove a hydrogen atom from a tertiary cearbon than from a primary carbon, Removing a hydrogen atom from ethane by an iodine radical is a highly endothermic reaction (AH® = 101 = 71 = 30 kcal/mol; see Table 5.1 on page 210 oF the tex), so the iodine radicals will re. form I, rather than remove a hyclrogen atom, uch, + ok Ye cme et _ 71 healt CO: : cb is easier to break a C—H bond than a C—D bond. Because a bromine radical is less reactive (and more selective) than a chlorine radical, a bromine radical has a greater preference for the more easily broken C—H bond, Bromination, therefore, would have a greater deuterium kinetic isotope effect than chlorination, Copyciht 2004 Pearson Fdustion. Le 398 Chapter 13 Moa b. Five monochlorination products are possible. CHCl cl a The two compounds below will be obtained in the greatest yield because each one can be Formed by removing one of four hydrogens to form a secondary radical. More of the compound on the left will he obtained because the methy! group in the compound on the right will provide some steric hindrance to the approach of the chlorine atom. a 4x 3N= 15.2 The number of possible stereoisomers for each compound is indicated below eweh structure CH cH.cl cH cn CH tr a a a ' t a a > These have 0 These have 2 aasymmetrie center aasymmettic centers, This does nor have but has cis-trans isomers A\ total of 12 stereoisomers can be obtained on on, br I Lt crgcricrsci fe. CHRCHCHCH, © ec a od crs CHCCHy, a. f I br Copyright © 2004 Pearson Eduction Is OO, OC, O., Oy fet con O step. This 0 the initiation step. (Bond dissociation energ | initiation 1 aucocr ——= ceo. + cH, | cH CO | cH propagation CHACHS seat BOR One difference between this reaction and the monochlorination of ethane is the source of the chlorin n has two sets of propayation steps because two different rad fon also hay several more termination steps because of the two different radicals generated in Chapter 13399 rent) ier OW sere Os Cr cr oy Br Nas. ston 7 _ somo) aos rnsen > veeewwoH” |S permite” Ld ~ Lo Ono oho OCH, radical hitiation Is are generated in the can be found in Table 5.1 on page 210 of the text) th | cH CHy Copyright © 201 Pearson Esco, Ie 400 Chapter 13 Che + CHCH) ——= HOD + CHCH: «a lo + cHCocl — «1 | one this species enters the first propagation eyele (CHCH: + Cle ——+ CH.CH, ana on cado. + ciycos + cindo- ocenn an Gk éw ci ci | cinco. + Cle + emcocl | ce ci, I cinco + —_ crgocHscl: CHs chy a+ a + Ch CH,CHy + CH)CH) ——» CH.CHY HCH e k 3 u bonds broken — bonds formed the bond dissociation energy of the O—CI bond ~42 keal/mol = [101 keal/mol + xrkeal/mol] ~ [85 keal/mot + 105 keal /mol ] =143 keal /mol = vkeal/mol — 190 keal / mol 47 keal/mol 38. The reaction forms a product with two new asymmetric centers, cH, CHy cucn.cn—Concn, bs Because the reaction involves both syn and anti addition, four stereoisomers are formed. CHC, CHcH, cHcH " chy whom ch f-n Br chy Br CH Be ao cHcHy CHACH, CHC Copyright © 2004 Pearson Eastin, Ie Chapter 13401 . . _ Ba HO pes” HO lg ON o mw aw wae a cn, ou 6 CA BE OLA at “Yo be a : BAN ANA Br A (CH,CHYN, \ NN oR NA 40. CHACHCH CH, CH 2-methylbutane 2-Methylbutane forms two primary alkyl halides, one secondary alkyl halide, and one tertiary alkyl halide, First we need to calculate how much alkyl halide is formed from each primary hydrogen available, from each secondary hydrogen available, and from each tertiary hydrogen available a primary alkyl halide CICHCHCHCHy ‘Substitution of any one of six hydrogens leads to this product I percentage of this product that is formed = 36% cHy percentage formed per hydrogen available = 36/6 = 6% CH CHCHCHCL Substitution of any one of three hydrogens leads to this product. le percentage of this product that is formed = 18% percentage formed per hydrogen available = 18/3 = 6% ‘secondary alkyl halide cl Substitution of percentage of this product that is formed = 28% any one of two hydrogens leads to this product i CoRcHeHCH, percentage formed per hydrogen available = 28/2 = 14% cHy a tertiary alkyl halide o ‘Substitution of the one tertiary hydrogen leadls to this product. percentage of this product that is formed = 18% ion eeaees percentage formed per hydrogen available = 18/1 = 18% CHy From the above calculations, we see that at 300 °C. the relative rates of removal of hydrogen atom from a tertiary, secondary, and primary carbocation are: 18: 14:6 = 3.0:23:1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Eaton te. 402 Chapter 13 In Section 13-4. we saw that at room temperature the relative rates are: 50:38: 1 ‘Thus, we can conelude that at ier temper ures, there is less discrimination by the radical between a tertiary, secondary, and primary hydrog 41. ‘The chlorine radical is more reactive ut the higher temperature (6010 °C), so its less selective 43. For an alkene to form the same product whether it reacts with HBr in the presence or absence of peroxide it must be symmetrical about the double bond. CHCH.CH=CHCH.CH, Hoa CH + CCL = cmc + Ho 10s 58 st 103 AMF = bonds broken — bonds formed AH’ = [105 keal/mol + 58 keal/mol] ~ [84 heal /mol + 103 keal mol AMP = 163 = 187 = ~ 24 keal/mol CConstight ©2014 Pearson Fads, Ins Chapter 13403 bo CHy-H + + CH; + H-CI AH? = 105 ~ 103 = 2keal/mol CHy + —- CH, —c + 4 AH? = 58 — 84 = —26keal/mol Overall AH = 2 + (=26) = -24 keal/mol eI you cancel the things that ure the same on opposite sides of the equations in part b and then add the ‘wo equations, you are left with the equation in part a. CHh—H + A -- OG + eC Oh + ce chr + Cl Ce a crcl nel 45. The overall AAP value is the same for both mechanisms. However, the mechanism that occurs is controlled: by the first propagation step. The first propagation step of the alternative mechanism is very endothermic, so it ‘would not be able to compete with the first propagation step of the mechanism shown in Problem 44b. (Cee Cl Cree eH AH? = 105 ~ 84 21 keal/mol Ho+ Clecl —~» Hoa + oa AHP = 58 — 103 = ~45 keal/mol Overall AP = 21 + (—45) = —24 keal/mol nO 46. ROR pee RO: + HEC ——* ROH + -cCly 4 a ( NP ° Sco, — N= Y A - Lo + HEC, + L aa [een ° ~ Lech r cen ~~ & fecha 1 + CCl ‘ = 47. The methyl radica that is ereated in the first propagation step reaets with Br, Forming bromomethane. ‘Bro + CH, + CH, 4B OCH ee) ee CHB | or Copysigh © 2014 Pearson lacin.t 404 Chapter 13 If HBr is added to the reaction mixture, the methyl radical that is created in the first propagation step can react with Bry or with the added HBr. Because only reaction with Bry forms bromomethane (reaction with HBr retorms methane), the overall rate of formation of bromomethane is decreased. ‘Bros CH, + CH, + HBr CH; 4 By + CHsBr + Br CH, + HBr + CH, + Br 48. Chapter 13405, Chapter 13 Practice Test How many monochlorinated products would be obttined from the monochlorination of the following alkanes? (Ignore stereoisomers.) oo. tOD oe ey AU What is the first propagation step in the monochlorination of ethane? When (5)-2-bromopentane is brominated, 2,3-dibromopentanes are formed, Which of the following com- pounds are not formed” omy ch cH, cH Hp Be H ep bie Ce CHCH: cH. CHCH, cHcn, Determine the AAP of the two propagation steps in the monochlorination of ethane, using Table 5.1 on page 210 of the text. Label the radicals in order from most stable to least stable, (Label the most stable #1.) euscusc H= CH crycnencn—=cn, chycrycHcH=cH cu eucns CH=CH, Draw the product(s) of each of the following reactions, ignoring stereoisomers, a oe a Nps —3 } revi be cHCH;CH=cH, + NBS — = voile Copyright © 2014 Pearson Fsation, ne. 406 Ww. Chapter 13 a. Draw the products that will be obtained from the monochlorination oF the following alkane at fom temperature. (Ignore stereoisomers.) a on cecncr.cncn, + Ch = cin Bb. Wht produt wll be obi in grates yield? ¢. What product would be obtained in greatest yield if the alkane were brominated instead of chlorinated? 1¢ of all the monochlorinated produets al room temperature Calculate the yield of 2-chloro-2-methylbutane (as a perce obtained) when 2-methylbutane is chlorinated in the presence of Ti What is the major product of each of the following reactions? Ignore stereoisomers. cH, Hy & CHCH=CCHCHy + HBr - € CHCH=COICH, + HCI - cH CHy pero I fn be CHYCH=CCH.CH, + HBr POSS d. CHCH=CCH CH: + HCL ESS Which of the above reactions forms more than one stereoivoner? © 2014 Pear Edueaton ne CHAPTER 14 Important Terms absorption band auxochrome base peak Beer-Lambert Law ben 2 vibration chromophore aecleavage electromagnetic ra electronic transition fingerprint regi fragment ion peak quency fun ional group region highest occupied molecular orbital (HOMO) Hooke’s law infrared radiation infrared spe “oscopy ‘ared spectrum, (IR spectrum) id Ultraviolet/Visible Spectroscopy aa peak in a spectrum that occurs as a result of absorption of energy. a substituent that when attached 10 a chromophore alters the Ayu and intensity of absorption of UV/Vis radiation the peak in a mass spectrum with the greatest intensity aan equation that states the relationship between the absorbance of UV/Vis light, the hot the concentration of the sample. the ken 1 path, and the molar absorptivity 8 Vibvation that does not occur along the fine ofthe bond the part of a molecule responsible for a UV or visible spectrum homolytic cleavage of an alpha substituent. radiant energy that displays wave properties. promotion of an electron trom its HOMO to its LUMO. the right-hand third of an IR spectrum (1400-600 em~!), where the absorption bands are characteristic of the compound as a whole. & positively charged fragment of a molecular ion. the velocity of a wave divided by its wavelength the left-hand two-thirds of an IR spectrum (4000-1400 em '), where most fune- tional groups show absorption bands, the highest energy molecular orbital that contains electrons. aan equation that describes the motion of a vibrating sprit the wavelength at which there is maximum UV/Vis absorbance electromagnetic radiation familiar to us as heat spectroscopy that uses infrared ene! ‘groups in a compound to provide a knowledge of the functional a plot of relative absorption versus wavenumber (or wavelength) of absorbed infrared radiation, 407 CCongright © 2014 Pear Eaton, tne 408 Chapter 14 lowest unoccupied molecular orbital (LUMO) mass spectrometry mass spectrum molecular ion (M) nominal molecular mass radical cation rule of 13, spectroscopy stretching vibration ultraviolet fight UV/Vis spectroscopy He Hight wavelength wavenumber the lowest energy molecular orbital that does not contain electrons. aan instrumental technique that provides a knowle« certain structural features of « compound, 4a plot of the relative abundance of the positively charged fragments produced in a tmass spectrometer versus their m/= values rearrangement of the molecular ion of a ketone that contains a y-hydrogen: the bond between the a and B-carbons breaks. and a y-hydrogen migrates to the oxygen, the absorbance obtained frony i 1.00 M solution in a eell with a 1.00 em light path. the radical cation formed by removing one electron trom a molecule mass to the nearest whole number: a species with a positive charge and an unpaired electron, aa rule that allows possible molecular formulas to be determined from the m/= value of the molecular ion study of the i (eraction of matter and electromagnetic radiation. a vibration occur ng along the Tine of the boned. electromagnetic radiation with wavelengths ranging from 180 to 400 nm the absorption of electromagnetic radiation that is useful in determining informa n about conjugated systems electrom: radiation with wavelengths ranging from 400 t0 780 nm, distance from any point on one wave to the corresponding point on the next wave. the number of waves in Lem, right © 2014 Pearson Fao fn Chapter 14409 Solutions to Problems 1. Only positively charged fragments are accelerated through the analyzer tube. cH.CH.c IeH,cHscHyl* CH,CH=cH, 2 The peak at m/z = 57 will be more intense for 2,2-dimethylpropane than for 2-methylbutane or pentane, The peak at m/z = 57 is due to loss of a methyl radical: loss of a methyl radical from -dimethylpropane forms tertiary carbocation, whereas loss of a methyl radieal from 2-methylbutane and pentane forms a less stable secondary and primary carbocation, respectively ae : CHy , | . cues} creer, » eH, on 2.2imethylpropane tertiary carbocation [cw . : | 1 = cHCHCHCH 4 chy cHcHeH l mils = 57 2methytbutane a secondary carbocation CHsCH:CHSCH;CHy ~ CHCHCHCH, + Hy pentane mls = 57 8 primary carbocation methylbutane can be distinguished from those of the other isomers by the peak at m/s = 43. The peak at m/z = 43 will be most intense for 2-methylbutane because such a peak is due to loss of an ethyl radical. which forms a secondary carbocation, Pentane gives a less in- tense peak al m/z = 43 because loss of an ethyl radical from pentane forms a primary carbocation. 2.2-Dimethylpropane will not show a peak at m/> = 43, because it does not have an ethy! group. Notice that the mays spectrum of ils = 43 ‘a secondary carbocation WyCH3|" ——» CHACH:CHs + CHyCHy 1 primary carbocation Contig 612014 Pearon Eaton. Ine 410 Chapter 14 Intense peaks should occur at m/z = 57 for loss of an ethyl radical (86 — 29), and at m/2 = 71 for loss of a methyl radical (86 ~ 15). CHCH.CH + CHLCI cH, I CHa I (CH,CH;CHCHCHy ils = 57 HCH;CHy A secondary carbocation is formed in both cases. Because an ethyl radical is more stable than a methyl radical. the base peak will most likely be at m/2 = 57 Solved in the text a. Dividing 72 by 13 gives 5 with 7 left over. Thus. the base value is CH). Because the compound con- tains only carbons und hydrogens, we know that the base value is also the molecular formula of the compound, b. Dividing 100 by 13 gives 7 with 9 left over. Thus, the base value is C-Hyq. Because the compound contains one oxygen. an O must be added to the base value and one C and four Hs must be subtracted. ‘Therefore, the molecular formula is CHO. ‘e. Dividing 102 by 13 gives 7 with 11 left over. Thus, the base value iy C;Hyy. Because the compound contains two oxygens. two Os must be added to the base value and two Cs and eight Hy must be sub- tracted, Therefore. the molecular formula is CsH yo d. Dividing 115 by 13 gives 8 with II left over. Thus. the base value is CH. Because the compound contains one oxygen. an O must be added to the base value and one C and four Hy must be subtracted Because it contains an N. an N must be added to the base value and one C and two Hs must be sub- tracted. Therefore. the molecular formula is CH, sNO. L 1S +3 X 14) + 16 = 73 2 16+ 3 x 14) + 16 = 74 1b. Amalkane has an even-mass molecular ion, If'a CH, group (14) of an alkane is replaced by an NH. group (15). or if'a CHy group (15) of an alkane is replaced by att NH group (16). the molecular ion ‘will have an odd mass. A second nitrogen in the molecular ion will cause it to have an ever mass. ‘Thus. for a molecular ion to have an odd mass, it must have an odd number of nitrogens, Ane) mays molecular ion either has no nitrogens or has an even number of nitrogens. a. Dividing 86 by 13 gives 6 with 8 left over. Thus. the base value is CH) If the compound contains only carbons and hydrogens. the base value is alyo the moleculur formula of the compound. Some possible structures would be: Awe KEK Copyright ©2014 Pearson Edin, fe Chapter 14411 1 the compound contains one oxygen, the molecular formu would be CsH),0. Some possible struc: tures would be: ° AKA, AR A J tures would be 6 6 6 Po ( Da : ee No Ay el oO oO we the compound hay an even-numbered mass, we know that it does not contain a nitrog I could. however. contain two nitrogen atoms (CH No) A hydrocarbon with molecular formula CyHsy has « molecular mass of 128. Since CyHay = CHa, 2. We know that the hydrocarbon has no rings and no z bonds. The hydrocarbon is 2.6-dimethytheptane, cH ony cHy CH,CHCH,CH.CH.CHCH, ~ CHCH + CHACHACH,CHCH, cH cHCH cHy CH CHCH, male = 57 cHy CH.CHCH. 2-Methyloctane would also be expected to give a base peak of m/z = 43 because it. tov, will form a see~ ondary isopropyl carbocation) te her with a primary radical. All other cleavages that form primary radi- cals form primary carbocations. However, we would expect fragments with m/= = 29 and 99 to be present to the same extent ats those with m/s = 57, 85. and 71. Because fragments with m/z = 29 and 99 are not mentioned. we cat conclude that the hydrocarbon shown below is less likely than the one shown above. cH; cH, CHCHCHCLLCHeHRCH, ——- enducrcrcnen, + enct, cH CHSCHCHSCHSCHCH, + CHACHy 0 JW/© 2014 Peuron Euan, In 412 Chapter 14 9. The ratio iy 1221 To get the M peak, both Br atom must be “Br, To get the M-F4 peak. they both must be “'Br. To get the M + 2 peuk. the first Bratom can be Br and the second *! Br. or the first can be Brand the second "Br So the relative intensity of the M+2 peak will be twice that of the others. M M2 Mit , Be Br \ es . sipepy 7 “Be Br 10. ‘The calculated exact mayses show that only CH, fas an exact mass of 86.10955 Gye 6112000000) = 72.0000 CJH,Oy———4012,00000) = 48,0000 14(1,007825) = 14.1004 6(1,007825) = 6.04695 6.10055 215.9949) = 31.9898 8600367. Cites 412.0000) = 48,0000 101.0785) = 10.07825 214.0081) = 28.0064 6.08465 1. a. A Tow-resolution spectrometer cannot distinguish between them because they both have the same mo- Fecular mass (29). B.A high-resolution spectrometer can distinguish between these ions, because they have different exact F mass OF 29.039125, and the other an exact molecular molecular masses: one has un exact molecu mays of 29,002725, 12, Because the compound contains chlorine. the M+2 peak is one-third the size of the M peak, Breaking the weak C—Cl hond heterolyticully and therefore losing a chlorine atom from either the M+2 peak (80 ~ 37) or the M peak (78 — 35) gives the base peak with in/s = 43 (CHSCHLCHS . It is more dif ficult to predict the other peaks. Relative abundance Mw 40 60 x0 ino 10 ils Mass spectrum of 1+ Chapter 4413, 13, The dominant fragmentation pathway in each ease is loss of an alkyl radical via a-cleavage to form a cat ion in which the positive charge is shared by carbon and oxygen, The base peak at m/s = 73(88 — 15), due to loss of a methyl radi mass spectrum of 2-methoxy-2-methylpropane, ‘The base peak at m/= = 59 (88 ~ 29), due to loss of an ethyl radical, indicates that Figure 14.7b is the mass spectrum of 2-methoxybutane. I, indicates that Figure 47a is the The base peak at m/s = 45 (88 ~ 43), due to loss of a propyl radical, indicates that Figure 14.7e is the mass spectrum of L-methoxybutane. Hy CHACCHy CHLCHENCH, — CHLCH-CILCHOCH: OCHS Ochs 2-methoxy-2-methylpropane — 2-methoxybutane |-methoxybutane - et b= OH 14, mils = 31 15, The molecular ions with m/> = 86 indicate that both ketones have the molecular formula CsH ,O. Figure 14.9a shows a base peak at n1/z = 43 for loss of a propyl (or isopropyl) radical (86 ~ 43), indicating that itis the mass spectrum of either 2-pentanone or 3-methyl-2-butanone, since each of these has a propyl oF isopropyl group. The fact that the spectrum has a peak at at/= = 58, indicating loss of ethene (86 ~ 28), indicates that the compound has & y-hydrogen that enables it to undergo a MeLatferty rearrangement Therefore. the ketone must be 2-pentanone. since 3-methy!-2-butanone does not have a y-hydrogen, The fact that Figure 14.9b shows a base peak at nt/s = 57 for loss of an ethyl radical (86 ~ 29) indicates that itis the mass spectrum of 3-pentanone. All three ketones will have a molecular ion with m/s ~ 86, S-pentanone: 2-pemtanone 3-methyl-2-butanone 86-20257 tanone will have a base peak at m/z 4B 2-Pentanone will have a peak at m/z 3-Methyl- rangement, so it will not have a peak atm 57. whereas the other two ketones will have base peaks at 58 due to a McLafferty rearrangement. ‘butanone does not have any y-hydrogens, Therefore, it cannot undergo a MeLafferty rear~ 58, 414 Chapter M4 na (CH,CHCH:CH.CH;OH in cu.cn.cn.c. a on SE cHcHcH.cH: + CH; a HCH;CH> ON = CHACHCHCH.CH, + 1.0 NS mis=70 b, (CHSCHsCHCHCH,CH.CHs | CH + CHSCHSCHLCH;CH=OH + CHCHS mis esteavae “= CHCHSCI OH + CHCHLCHCH ik: Hy + HO HCHsCHCHsCHCH3CHy (CHOCH.CHCH,CH,CH ox 1CHCH.CHICHCH (CHSCH:CHCHSCHCHSCH + H,0 val f Is 7 Gon fu 9s, Copy eight 82014 Pear Eatin, I © Chapter 4415 cHycy caer 6 tecncuci, = HEH —g: + "| chk M4 CH, hy aN Tl tee I : HCH “YE CoHCHLCH, = ce —O=CcHLCHCH + EH cue —0* * CHCH.— HCH, + CHACH ewer 9 remenien, enee—G=ecnen + cnennen, ch = 101 cue, CHCHy NZNO I cee g—e—cHcucn, D—CCHCHCHy + Hy oy cu anls= 129 Gopyeight 2004 Peer sation Ine 416 Chapter 14 a cHCHCHCHCSO + CH ans = 88 6 + CHCHCHCHy 43 On cucu, cuics e ccHcnél: ~~ onenendd <== CHCHCH + ane) al cus cHy CH nfs =92 and 94 mls =57 eek de, nls = 63.0 cm f = * CHC + Bre | on 18, We know from Section 6.5 that when (Z)-2-pentene reacts with water and an acid catalyst, 3spentanol and 2-pentanol are formed, Both alcohols have a molecular weight of 88. (Notice that the first step in solving this problem is to use chemical knowledge to identify the products.) The absence of a molecular ion peak is consistent with the fact that the compounds ase alcohols. H« CULCHy H80, \eac/ + HO * CIRCHEHCHCH, + CHLCHCHLCH oon I W H OH oH (Z)-2epemtene 3-pemtanol 2-pentanol Copyeitn 204 Pear Education I 19, 20. 23, Chapter 14417 Figure 14.10a shows a buse peak at m/z — 59 due to loss of an ethyl radical (88 ~ 29), indicating that it is the spectrum of 3-pentanol. Figure 14.10b shows a base peak at is the spectrum of 2-pentanol. 45 due to loss of a propyl radical (88 ~ 43), ind ing that it ‘The wavelength is the distance from the top of one wave to the top of the next wave, We see that A hat longer wavelength than B. Infrared radiation has longer wavelengths than ultraviolet light hecause infrared radiation is lower in en- ergy. Therefore, A depicts infrared radiation and B depicts ultraviolet light. a. 2000¢m | (The larger the wavenumber, the higher the energy.) b, 81m (The shorter the wavelength, the higher the energy.) ¢. 2am, because 2 pum = 5000 cm”? (5000 em! isa larger wavenumber than 2000 em!) al F (em ' 4m) b. Fem ~ = 2 ' Aum) A= 50am ak stretch tiple bond is stronger than a double bond, so it takes more energy to stretch triple bond, 2. C—Hotreich It requires more energy to stretch a given bond than to bend it. 3. C=Natretch A double bond is stronger than a single bond, so it takes more energy to streteh a double boned. ‘A double bond is stronger than a single bond. so it takes more energy to stretch double bond b 1 C—O Vibrations of lighter atoms occur at larger wavenumbers. c-c Vibrations of lighter atoms occur at larger wavenumbers, a. The carbon-oxygen stretch of phenol, because it has partial double-bond character as a result of elee- tron delocalization b. The carbon-oxygen double-bond stretch of a ketone, because it hay more double-bond character, The double-bond character of the carbonyl group of an amide is reduced by electron delocalization, Copyeight 204 Peason Futon Ie As, 26. Chapter 14 The CN streteh of aniline, because it has partial double-bond character. =a a Acarbony! group bonded to an sp* carbon will exhibit an absorption band at a karger wavenumber because a carbonyl group bonded to an sp” carbon of an alkene will have greater single-bond character as result of iron delocalization. LU The C—O bond of the alcohol is a pure single bond. In contrast, the C—O bond of the carboxylic acid hhas double-bond character. so it iy a stronger bond sind theretore tikes more energy to streteh i. RCHy—OH a, The C—O absorption band of an ester occurs at the largest wavenumber because the carbonyl group of aan ester has the most double-bond character, since the predominant effect of the ester oxygen atom is inductive electron withdrawal. ‘The C=0 absorption band of an amide occurs at the smallest wavenumber because the carbonyl group of an amide has the least double-bond character, since the predominant effect of the amide nitrogen «atom is electron donation by resonance, ° ° ° b. The C=0 absorption of the four-membered ring lactone oveurs at the highest wavenumber because it is the least able to accommodate double-bond character in the ring, which is required if the carbonyt group is to have any single-bond character. ° OR Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Is 27. Chapter 14419 ‘The C=0 absorption of the six-membered ring lactone occurs at the lowest wavenumber because itis the most able to accommodate double-bond character in the ring, : o LO Jk T-O-o Ethanol dissolved in carbon disulfide will show the oxygen-hydrogen stretch at a larger wavenumber ‘There is extensive hydrogen bonding in the undiluted alcohol, and an oxygen-hydrogen bond is easier to siretch if tis hydrogen bonded, so the O—H stretch will be at a smaller wavenumber. ‘The absorption band at L100.¢m_ | would be less intense if it were due to a C—N bond, beca cchange in dipole moment is associated with the stretch of a C—N bond compared to the eb associated with the stretch of a C—O bond. ea smaller in dipole a. The absorption band at 1700 em_ ! indicates that the compound has a carbonyl group. ‘The absence of an absorption band at 3300 cm! indicates that the compound is not a carboxylic acid. de he absence of an absorption band at 2700 em. indicates that the compound is not an ade! ‘The absence of an absorption band at 1100 cn ide. The compound. therefore, must be a ketone, indicates that the compound is not an ester or an am- 1b, The absence of an absorption band at 3400 em”! indicates that the compound does not have an NH bond. ‘The absence of a carbonyl absorption band between 1700.cm~! and 1600 ent! indicates that the com pound is not an amide. ‘The compound, therefore, must be a te iary amine. a, Analdehyde would show absorption bands at 2820 and 2720.em~', A ketone would not have these absorption bands. b. An open-chain ketone would have a methyl substituent and therefore an absorption band at 1385-1365 em”! that a eyelie ketone would not have. c. Cyelohexene would show an sp) show san absorption band in this H stretch slightly to the right of 3000 em”. Benzene would not on. d, The cis isomer would show a carbon-hydrogen bending vibration at 730-675 em” ', whereas the trans isomer would show a carbon-hydrogen bending vibration at 960-980 cm™! fe. Cyelohexene would show a carbon-carbon double-bond stretching vibration at 1680-1600 em”! and an sp? carbon-hyalrogen stretching vibration at 3100-3020 em”! Cyelohexane would not show these sibsorption band fA primary amine would show a nitrogen-hydrogen stretch at 3500-3300 em | would not have this absorption bund. and a tertiary amine a, An absorption band at 1150-1050 cm”! due to a C—O stretching vibration would be present for the ether and absent for the alkane. b. An absorption band at 3304-2500 em”! due to an O—H stretching vibration would be present for the carboxylie acid and absent for the ester Copyright 012014 Poor Flsation, Ine 420 2 BB. Chapter Lt €. An absorption band at 1385~1363 em”! due to C—H bending vibrations of a methyl group would be present for methyleyelohexane and absent for eyclohexane, Only the vibration, minal alkyne would show an absorption band at 3300 ¢ due to an sp CH stretching fe. At absorption band at 1780-1650 em! due 10 a C=O stretching vibration would be present for the carboxylie acid and ubsent for the alcohol An absorption band at 2960-2850 em”! due to at yp CH stretching vibration would be present for the compound with the methyl group and absent for benzene. 2-butyne, Hs, Cle, and ethene be cause they are symmetrical molecules, The absorption bands in the vicinity of 3000 em? indicate that the compound has hydrogens attached to both sp? and sy carbons, The absence of absorptions at 1600-1800 em”! and the absence of broad absorp tions benween 2500 and 3650 em" rules out compounds containin; NH, and O—H groups. “The lack of absorption at L600 em! and 1500 cm_ | indicates that the compound does not have a benzene ng. The sp” hydrogens, therefore, must be those of an alkene. mnificant absorption at 1600). em | indivates that the compound must be an alkene with a rela- tively small (if any) dipole moment change when the vibration aceurs. The absorption band at 965 em! indicates that the compound is a erany-alkene, The molecular ion with m /: = 84 suggests that the compound has a molecular formula of C,H). The base peak with indicates that the molecular ion most easily loses an ethyl radical (84 — 29 = 55), Because it most easily loses an ethy! radical, the ethyl group must be attached to an allylic carbon, The compound, therefore, is trans-2-hevene, “Hs =CHCHy Hc ‘The absorption band at ~ 1700 em indicates that the compound has & carbony] group, and the absoxp- tion band at ~ 1600 em! indicates that the compound has a carbon-carbon double bond, The absorption bands in the vicinity of 3000.cm_ indicate that the compound has hydrogens attached to both sp" and yp* carbons, The absorption band at ~ 1380 em! indicates that the compound hay a methy! group, Because the {compound has only four earhons and one oxygen. it must be methyl vinyl Ketone, Notive that the carbonyl stretch is at a lower frequency (1700.em_ |) than expected for a ketone (1720 em), because the carbonyl group has partial single-bond character due to electron delociization, Copyright 92014 Pearson talon, I 36. 40. A 42. Chapter 4421 te 0.52 So 4 x 1S 12,600 M 0.40 = 10,000 Mem * 40x 1978 > 1OO00 Mem ‘The compound has the same chromophore ay methyl vinyl ketone. So it must have approximately the same value for its Apuys Which is 219 nm, Creo) OL) > Crave ) a, Blue results from absorption of light that has « longer wavelength than the light that produces purple when absorbed. The compound on the right has two N(CH,)2 auxochromes that will cause it to absorb at a longer wavelength than the compound on the left that has only one N(CH,)» auxochrome. There- fore, the compound on the right is the blue compound. 1b. They will be the same color at pH — 3 because the N(CHy)» groups will be protonated and, therefore, will not possess the lone pair that causes the compound to absorb light of a longer wavelength, The two absorption bands that produce an observed green color correspond to the absorption bands that produce yellow and blue. So mixing yellow and blue produce green, NADH is formed as a product; it absorbs light at 340 nm. Therefore, the rate of the oxidation reaction can be determined by monitoring the increase in absorbance at 340 nm as a funetion of time. el dehydrogenase 0 CH.CHLOH 4 NAD* Seinen chy H ‘The Henderson-Hasselbaleh equation (Section 2.10) shows that when the pH equals the pX,, the concen tration of the species in the acidic form is the same as the concentration of the species in the basic form, From the data given, we see that the absorbance of the acid is 0. We also see that the absorbance ceases to change with inereasing pH after the absorbance reaches 1.60, ‘That means that all of the compound is in the basic form when the absorbance is 1.60. Therefore, when the absorbance is half of 1.60 (or 0.80), Copyrigi 2014 Peas Elation Ine 422 43. rr Chapter 14 half of the compound is in the basic form and half is in the acidic form: in other words. the concentration in the acid form is the same as the concentration in the basic form, We see that the absorbance is 0.80 at pH = 5.0, Therefore, the px, of the compound is 5.0 ‘The molecular ion peak for these compounds is m/z = 86: the peak at n/> = 57 is duc to loss of an ethyt radical (86 ~ 29), and the peak at m/s = 71 is due to loss of a methyl radical (86 ~ 15), a, 3-Methylpentane will be more apt to lose an ethyl radical (forming a secondary earbocation and a primary radical) than a methyl radical (forming a secondary carbocation and a methyl radial). In ad= dition, 3-methylpentane has two pathways to lose an ethyl radieal, Therefore. the peak at m/z = ST would be more intense than the peak at m1/= = 7H cH.cH CHCHSCHs I CHy 3-methylpentane b. 2-Methylpentane has two pathways to lose a methyl radical (forming & secondary carbocation and a ‘methyl radical in each pathway), and it cannot form a secondary carbocation by losing an ethy] radical (Loss of an ethy/ radical would form a primary carbocation and a prinrary radical.) Therefore. it will be more apt to lose a methyl radical than an ethyl radical, so the peak at m/= = 71 would be more intense than the peak at m/= = 57 CH.CHCH.CH.CH, cH 2-methylpentane 1. the change in the dipole moment when the bond stretches or bends 2. the number of bonds that cause the absorption band 3. the concentration of the sample a. An absorption bund at ~1250.¢m” ! due to a C—O stretching vibration would be present for the ester and absent for the ketone. b, An absorption band at 720 cm”! due to in-phase rocking of the five adjacent methylene groups would be present for heptane and absent for methylcyclohexane. €. An absorption band at 3650-3200 em” due to an O—H stretching vibration would be present for the alcohol and absent for the ether d, An absoxption band at 3500. amide and absent for the ester. e. The secondary aleohot would have an absorption band at 1385-1365 em”! for the methyl group. The primary alcohol does not have a methyl group, so it would not have this absorption band. {The trans isomer would have a C—H bending absorption band at 980-960 em |, whereas the cis isomer would have the absorption band at 730-675 em ', In addition, a weak C=C absorption band at 1680-1600 em”! would be present for the cis isomer and absent for the trans isomer. since only the ‘rans isomer is symmetrical g. The C=O absorption band will be at a larger wavenumber for the ester (1740 em ketone (1720em_!), 100 em! due to an N—H stretching vibration would be present For the ) than for the Copyright 812014 Pearson Education, Ie a7. 49. Chapter 14423 1h, ‘The C=O absorption band will be ata larger wavenumber for the B.y-un than for the @.,B-unsaturated ketone (1680 em), since the double bonds in the latter are conjugated, The alkene would have absorption bands at. 1680-1600 em”! due to a C=C stretching vibration and at 3100-3020 em! due to ant sy” CH stretching vibration that the alkyne would not have. The all> kyne would have an absorption band at 2260-211) em "that the alkene would not have. An absorption band at ~2820 and ~2720 em! due to the aldehyde C—H stretching vibration would be present for the aldehyde and absent for the ketone. k. Absorption bands at 1600 em! and 1500 em ' (aromatic ring stretching vibrations) and at 3100-3020 cm’! Gp" CH stretching vibration) would be present for the compound with the benzene ring and }bsent for the compound with the cyclohexane ring. An absorption band at 2960-2850 em! due 10 an sp’ CH stretching vibration would be present for the compound with the cyclohexane ring and absent for the compound with the benzene ting. 1. Absonption bunds at 990 cm! and 910m”! due to an sp? C—H bending vibration would be present For the terminal alkene and absent for the internal alkene. turated ketone (1720 em~") Dividing 128 by 13 saturated hydrocarbor possible structures are: ves 9 with I left over. Thus, the base value is CyHay, Because the compound is a ‘we know that the base value is also the molecular formult of the compound, Some ee A WSN A AY a. If the reaction had occurred, the intensity of the absorption bands at ~ 1700 em ' (due to the carbonyl group) and at ~2700 em. ! (due to the aldehyde C—H bond) of the reactant would have decreased. If all the aldehyde had reacted, these absorption bands would have disappeared. b. fall the NHsNH, had been removed. there would be ne NH absorption at ~ 3400 em”! IF the force constants are approximately the same, the lighter atoms will absorb at higher frequent ci = Co 5 | Ox) 3000 em 3000 x00) 00) 1000) OH 3300-3000) sp" CH 2980 ° =0 1700] C—O 1250-1050 NH 3600-3200) RCH 2700) 1600] CN 1230-1030 yp CH 3300 wp CH 3050 (Copp 2014 Pear Eton, Ine 424 52. Chapter Lt ich of the alcohols is 158, The peak at m/z = 140 is due to loss of water 87.115. and 143 are due 10 The molecular weight of [158 — 18); each of the aleohols could show such a peak. The peaks at ur loss of a group with five carbons (C;Hy)).a group with three carbons (CHp), and a methyl group. respec tively. Only 2.2.-trimethyl-4-heptanol could lose all three groups via a-cleavage. Se Non 2 -L_™ OH A» on AAN CH,CH=CHCH L.S-hesadiene 2abhex CHCH, One way to distinguish the two compounds is by the presence or absence of an absorption band at ~1370em "due to the methyl group that 2.4-henadiene has but that 1.5-hexadiene does not have, {n addition, 2.4-hexadione has conjugated double bonds: therefore its double bonds have some single-bond character due to electron delocalization, Consequently. they are easier to stretch than the isolated double bonds oF 1.$-hexadiene, Thus. the carbon-carbon double-bond stretch of 2.4-henauliene will be ata sme ‘wavenumber than the carbon-carbon double-bond stretch of 1.5-hexadiene. ‘The fact that the abundance of the M2 peak is 30% of the abundance of the M peak indicates that the com: pound has one chlorine ator, The peak at m/z = 77 is due to loss of the chlorine atom (112 ~ 35 = 77), ‘The fact that the peak at m/: — 77 does not fragment indicates itis a phenyl cation, Therefore. the com- pound is chlorobenzene Dividing 112 by 13 gives 8 with 8 lef over. Thus, the base value iy CH). and because the compound is a hydrocarbon, this is also its molecular formula, The molecular formula indicates that it has one degree of unsaturation, whieh is accounted for by the fact that we now it has a six-membered ring, Possible structures are shown here, Possible stereoisomers are not shown: the second und third structures have three stereoisomers said the fourth structure has two stereoisomers AW because there are three conjugated double bond Copa ciht © 24 Pn Eton ti Chapter 14425, on oct, b. CY and CY ‘The Ana of the phenolate ion is at a longer ‘The Anus is pH independent, so it will be the ‘wavelength than the Aya of phenol. same at pH 7 and 11 Because the pX, of phenol is ~ 10, the Ajay will be ata longer wavelength at pH = U1 than at pH = 7. or- ot ‘The Ajyuy Will be at u longer wavelength because the earbonyl group is conjugated with the benzene Hydrogens are more electron-withdrawing than alkyl groups. Therefore. the carbonyl group bonded to two relatively electron-withdrawing hydrogens has the largest wavenumber for its C=O absorption band, ‘whereas the carbonyl group bonded to two alkyl groups has the lowest wavenumber, ° I> qo > i HOH cH oH cH ct =o 56. > absorption band of the three compounds decreases inthe following order. RA A bye hes dy The first compound has the C—O absorption band at the largest wavenumber, because a lone pair on the ring oxygen can be delocalized onto two different atoms; thus itis less apt than the lone pair in the other compounds to be delocalized onto the carbonyl oxygen atom. ° oO O: or Copgeight ®2014 Pern tation I 426 Chapter 14 ‘The third compound has the C—O absorption band at the smallest wavenumber because its carbonyl group has more single-bond character due to contributions from (wo other resonance contributors, 6 6 9 a A _ Ope eee tor LS Ls _/ 44-MethyL-2-pentanone would show peaks at m/z = 85 (oss of a ety gromp) and at m/z = 48 dows of in isobuty] group) and a peak at m/z = 58 due to a MeLatferty rearrangement, 9 rom cnc" ~enenen ony -methyl-2-pentanone 2-Methyl-3-pentanone would show peaks at mi/s = 71 (loss of an isopropyl group), Because it does not have ment, so itdoes not have a peak at m/s = 58, n ethyl group) and at m/> = 57 (loss at ‘y-hydrogen, it cannot undergo a MeLalferty rearra o eon, CHCHT CHLCHS chy 2-methyl3-pentanone 58. a, The absorption band at ~2100 em | indicates a carbon-carbon triple bond. and the absorption band at ~ 3300 em! indicates a hydrogen bonded to an sy carbon, HCH,CH CH C=CH b. The absence of an absorption band at " indicates that the compound is not an aldehyde and the absence of a broad absorption ba ty of 300m | indicates that the compound is not a carboxylic acid, The ester and the ketone can be distinguished by the absorption band at ~1200.em. ! that indicates the carbon-oxygen single bond of an ester oO ce. The absorption band at ~1360.em indicates the presence of a methyl group. J C Cc Copyright 8.201 Peary Eston. I Chapter 14 427 59a, The broad absorption band at ~3300 cm is characteristic of the oxygen-hydrogen stretch of an al cohol, und the absence of absorption bands at ~ 1600 em~ and ~3100 em” indicates that itis not the alcohol with a carbon-carbon double bond. aor b. The absorption band at ~ 1685 em” indicates a carbon-oxygen double bond. The absence of a strong ‘and broud absorption band at ~ 3000 em” rules out the carboxylic acid, and the absence of an absorp- fon band at ~2700 em! rules out the aldehyde. Thus, it must be one of the ketones. The ketone with the conjugated carbonyl group would be expected to show a C=O stretch at ~ 1685 em” !, whereas the ketone with the isolated carbonyl group would show a C=O stretch at ~1720em_!. Thus, the ‘compound is the ketone with the conjugated carbonyl group. ° a. A ‘The absorption band at ~1700 em | indicates a carbon-oxygen double bond. The absence of an ab sorption band at ~ 1600 cm “rules out the ketones with the benzene or eyetohexene rings. The absence of absorption bands at ~2100. em”! and ~3300 em” ! rules out the ketone with the carbon-carbon triple bond. Thus. it must be 4-ethyleyclohexanone LT 60, The absorption bands at ~2700 em”! for the aldehyde hydrogen and at ~1380 em” for the methyl group woul distinguish te compounds. A would have the band at ~2700 em! but not the one at ~ 1380 em B would have the band at ~ 1380 em! but not the one at ~2700 em C would have both the band at ~ 2700 em”! and the one at ~ 1380.em | 61. 1-Hexyne will show absorption bands at ~3300 em”! for a hydrogen bonded to an sp carbon and at 2100 cm™' for the triple bond, (CHSCHSCHLCH I-hexyne 100 em”! but not the one at ~ 3300 e1 2-Hexyne will show the absorption band at CH,CH;CHLC 2-hexyne Hy 3-Hexyne will show neither the absorption band at ~3300em™! nor the one at ~2100 em! (there is no in dipole moment when the C=C stretches) CH,CH;CSCCH;CH, Rhexyne Copycat 9204 Pearson Eaton. Ine 428 Chapter 14 62. Dividing 116 by 13 gives 8 with 12 left over. Thus. the base value is CyHy). Because the compound con tains wo oxygens, two Os must be suldded to the base value and two Cs and eight Hs must be subtracted. Therefore, the molecular formula is CH),O>, Some possible structures 6 ° ° a A 63. Since only benzene absorbs light of 260 nin, the concentration of benzene can be determined by measur ing the absorbance (A) at 260 nm, using the Beer-Lambert kaw, since the length of the light path of the cell .0.em) is known and the molar absorptivity oF benzene at 260 nm (1 is also known, Beer-Lambert law: A = cf A le ‘Therefore. the concentration of benzene es sp CH 3300 em! (narrow) 64. ae oO & C—O -1050 em! 3403-2200 cm! ond) CC Det Lea Sete " 6 I 1700 em! 4 cae tee" be. ° dO f. ° nwa 1 rom 1 raene CHN ~180 9 ( Paget Meee JLB em theo) ~ NH 3500-3300 cnr - C=O 12840" 108m" 6s. the term in Hooke’ law tht depends onthe masses ofthe aon joined by a bond for a CH bond and for a C—C bond shows why stretching vibrations for smaller atoms occur at larger wavenumbers, fora carbon-hydrogen bond fora carbon-hydrogen bond my 4 my m+ my 12+ 12 my Xm im Xm 12D RB ow = 108 Copyright 201 Peron Education a: Chapter 4429 66. Betore the addition of acid, the compound is colorless because the benzene rings are not conjugated with each other, since they are separated by two single bonds. In the presence of acid, a carbocation is formed in which the three benzene rings are conjugated with each other asa result of electron delocalization, The conjugated carbocation is highly colored, NCH): o~ _ te Io) Cum 67. a, The absorption bands at 1720 cm”! and ~2700 em”! indicate that the compound is an aldehyde (carbon- hydrogen stretch of an aldehyde hydrogen). The absence of an absorption bund at ~ 1600 em | rules out the aldehycle with the benzene ring. Thus, it must be the other aldehyde. 9 b. ‘The absorption bands at ~3350 em! and ~ 3200 em indicate that the compound is an amide (nitroge hydrogen stretch), The absence of an absorption band at ~3050 em indicates that the compound does, not have hydrogens bonded fo sp" carbons. Therefore, itis not the amide that has a benzene ring. Thus, it must be the other amide. (CH)sN NICHy)> ° 4 Ny ‘€. The absence of absorption bands at ~ 1600 em~! and ~ 1500.¢m_' indicates that the compound does not have a benzene ring, Thus, it must be the ketone. This is confirmed by the absence of an absorption band at ~1380 cm” |, indicating that the compound does not have a methyl group, ° 68. The absorption band at ~1740.em_ | indicates that the compound has a carbonyl group, and the absence of aan absorption band at ~1380.em "indicates that it has no methyl groups. The absence of an absorption band at ~ 1600. em_ ! indicates the compound does not have a carbon-carbon double bond, and the absence of an absorption band at ~ 3050 em indicates the compound does not have hydrogens bonded to sp” carbons, Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, I 430 Chapter 14 From the molecular formula you can deduce that the compound is eyelopentanone. ° 69. ‘The broad absorption band at ~3300 em” indicates that the compound has un OH group. The absorption bands at ~2900 cm” indicate that the compound has hydrogens attached to an sp’ carbon. The compound therefore, is benzyl aleahol m= a i ry? 2% 316 XS ay 1 : = ee VIO X 10 18.85 x 10" ! 4 y 5 x 3:16 x 10! 18.85 < 10) ¥ = 1676em"! 71. Inacidi solutions, the three benzene rings are iyolated from one another, so phenolphthalein is colores, In basic solutions, loss ofthe proton Irom one of the OH groups causes the five-membered ring to open. As st resull, the number of conjugated double bonds inereases. which eauses the solution to become colored 72. The broad absorption band at ~ 3300 em™! indicates that the compound has an OH group, The absence of absorbance at ~1700.em~! shows that the compound does not have a carbonyl group. The absence of absorption at ~2950 em”! indicates the compound does not have any hydrogens bonded (0 yp" carbons, ‘Therefore. the compound is phenol Copsrit 2014 Poon bation, I 7. Chapter 4431 ‘The IR spectrum indicates that the compound iy an aliphatic ketone with at least one methyl group. ‘The M peak at m, tes that the ketone is a hexanone. The peak at 43(100 — 57} for loss ‘of a butyl radical and the peak at 85 for loys of & methyl radial (100 — 15) suggest that the compound is 2-hexanone, . i co CH CH:CHCHACHy This is confirmed by the peak at 58 for loss of propene (100 ~ 42) ay a result of a MeLafferty \' Wy Zon ee Melty CHC CH CH CHCH - ‘The equall heights of the M and M+2 peaks at 162 snd 164 indicate that the compound contains bro- imine, The peak at mr/> = 83.(162 ~ 79) is for the carbocation that is formed when the bromine atom is eliminated. The IR spectrum does not indicat e of any functional groups, and it shows, that there are no methyl groups present. The n/: peak = 83 indicates a carbocation with a formula of CgHy). The fact that the compound does not contain a methyl group indicates that the compound is, bromocyclohexane. (on bromocyelohexane ‘The absorption bands at ~1700 em“! and ~2700 cm! indicate that the compound is an aldehyde. The molecular ion peak at m/: = 72 indicates that the aldehyde contains four carbons (CHO). The peak alm/: = 44 for loss of a group with molecular weight 28 indicates that ethene has been lost as of a MeLatferty rearrangement _ 4 Py ‘ fe t MeLatlerty A MeLaflerty rearrangement can ovcur only if the aldehyde has a y-hydrogen, The only four-earbon aldehyde that has «-y-hydrogen is butanall ° ll on cHCH CH HL Copysighn ©2014 Peason Fdstion, te aR 2 Chapter 14 Chapter 14 Practice Test Give one IR absorption band that could be used to distinguish each of the following pairs of compounds Indicate the compound for which the band would be present aA ° ° SAN om NS Noctt ° ol ¢. CH,CH:CH;CH.OH and CH,CH:CH:0CI i ™ \ a. © Da ouens ant €en.cr.on on ° 6 eo Ga, ae AH f CHCH.CI CHCH, and CHyCH3C=CCH, & CHCHC= Hand CHSCHSC=CCH, Indicate whether each of the following is true or false a, The OH stretch of a cone rated solution of an aleobol occurs at at higher frequency than the OH stretch of a dilute solution. T F b. Light of 2 4m is of higher energy than fight of 3 jam, r F Intakes more energy for a bending vibration than for a stretching vibration, t F 4d. Propyne will not have an absorption band at 3100.em™!, because there iy no change in the dipole moment. 1 F fe. Light of 8 jum has the sume energy as light of 1250 em”! 1 f [The M+2 peak of an alkyl chloride is half the height of the M peak 1 i The major peaks shown in the mass spectrum of a tertiary alcohol are at ans tify the alcohol 73.87. 98. and LOL, Kden- A 38 X 10 4M solution of eyctohexanone shows an absorbance of 0.75 at 280 nm in a 1.00 em cell What is the molir absorptivity of cyclohexanone at 280 nm? Copyright ©2014 Pearson Eaton, ts Chapter 14433 How could you distinguish between the IR ypectra of the following compounds? a. on Aon a. ° and & ] aN ZN on, \ and ] | ] and ] Which compound has the greater Ay? (300 nm isa greater Aya than 250 nm.) : O - O Cy" = cr A solution of a compound with a molar absorptivity of 1200 M- ‘em ! at 297 nm gives an absorbance of 0.76 at that wavelength in a 1.0 em quartz cell. What is the concentration of the solution? Draw possible structures for an alcoho! that has a molecular ion with an m/z value of 60. A bond between a carbon and an atom of similar electronegativity breaks - Whereas a bond between a carbon and a more electronegative atom breaks Copynght © 2014 Pearsin cation. I: CHAPTER AS NMR Spectroscopy Important Terms applied magnetic field chemically equivalent protons ‘chemical shift BONMR COSY spectrum coupled protons coupling constant DEPT 8C NMR spectrum diamagnetic anisotropy amagnetie shielding diastereotopie hydrogens 2D NMR doublet doublet of doublets downfield effective magnetic field Fourier transform NMR (FT-NMR) the externally applied magnetic eld. protons with the same connect y relationship to the rest of the molecule, Iocation of a signal occurring in an NMR spectrum, [tis measured dowalield from a reference compound (most often TMS). nuclear magnetic resonance from earbon (°C) nuclei. 2D NMR spectrum showing 'H-'H correlations. protons that split each other, Coupled protons have the same coupling constant the distance (in hertz) between two adjacent peaks oF a split NMIR signal 4a group of four "C NMR spectra that distinguish CH, CH, and CH groups, the term used to describe the greater freedom of to a magnetic field asa consequence of their greater polarizability compared with erelecttons, sclrons 10 mioye in response shielding by the local magnetic field that opposes the applied magnetic field two hydrogens bonded to the same carbon that will result in a pair of diasteren- mers when each of them is replaced in turn with deuterium. two-dimensional nuclear magnetic resonance. an NMR sis al that is split into two peaks an NMR signal that is split into Four peaks of blet of doublets is caused by splitting a signal into a doublet by one hyttr into another doublet by another (nonequivatent) hyo proximately equal height. A dou- hand Tarther to the left-hand side of the spectrum. the magnetic field that a nucleus “senses” through the surrounding cloud of electrons two hydrogens bonded 10 a carbon that is bonded to wo other groups that are nonidentical ‘technique in which all the nuclei are excited simultaneously by an rf pulse. their relaxation monitored, and the data mathematically converted to a frequeney spectrum. ory Copprght © 2014 Peanon Eastin, le geminal coupling gyromagnetic ratio ETCOR spectrum ‘HNMR long-range coupling, magnetic resonance maging (MRI) methine hydrogen MRI scanner multiplet multiplicity N+ Irule NMR spectroscopy ‘operating frequency prochiral carbon pro-R-hydrogen pro-S-hydrogen 8C NMR spectrum proton exchange Chapter 18435 the mutual splitting of (wo nonidentical protons bonded to the same carbon the ratio of the magnetic moment of « rotating charged particle to its angular momentum 1 2-D NMR spectrum showing 'C-'H correlations, NMR spectroscopy that uses a spectrometer with a high operating frequency nuclear magnetic resonance from hydrogen nuclei splitting by a proton more than three «r bonds away. NMR used in medicine. The difference in the way water is bound in different tissues produces the signal variation between of and diseased states, ans as well as between healthy atertiary hydrogen, an NMR spectrometer used in medicine for whole-body NMR, an NMR signal split by wo (or more) nonequivalent sets of protons, the number of peaks in an NMR signal aa rule that states that an 'H NMR signal for a hydrogen with NV equivatent hydro- gens bonded to an adjacent carbon is split into N+ 1 peaks; a proton-coupled ‘C NMR signal for a carbon bonded to N hydrogens is split into N+ 1 peaks, the absorption of rf radiation by nuclei in an applied magnetic field to determine the structural features of an organic compound. In the case of 'H NMR spectros: copy. it reveals the earbon-hydrogen framework the frequency at which an NMR spectrometer operates a carbon (bonded to wo hydrogens) that will become an asymmetrie center if one of the hyde ns is replaced by deuterium, replacing this hydrogen with deuterium creates an asymmetric center with the R configuration. replacing this hydrogen with deuterium creates an asymmetric center with the § a SC NMR spectrum in whieh each si bonded to that carbon al for a carbon is split by the hydrogens the transfer of a proton from one molecule to another 436 Chapter 15 quartet reference compound let spin-spin coupling ‘ae-spin state B-spin state 1g diagram (splitting tree) triplet upfield X-ray erystallogeaphy X-ray diffra an NMR signal that is split into four equally spaced peaks with an int 13:1 «a compound added to the sample whose NMR spectrum is 10 be taken. The position Of the signals in the NMR spectrum are measured from the position of the signal ativen by the reference compound. radiation in the radiofrequency region of the electromagnetic spectrin, the electrons around a proton shield the proton from the full effect of the applied magnetie field. The more a proton is shielded, the farther ta the appears in an NMR spectrum. aan unsplit NMR signal the splitting of a signal in an NMR spectrum described by the N+ rule rnuclei in this spin state have thei as the applied magnetic field. magnetic moments oriented in the sume direction nuelei in this spin state have their magnetic moments oriented opposite to the direction of the applied magnetic field aa diagram that describes the splitting of « set of protons. aan NMR sign al ratio of [21 that is split into three equally spaced peaks with an integ further 10 the right-hand side of the spectrum, technique used to determine the arrangement of atoms within a crystal a technique used to obtain images that are used to determine the electron density within a crystal right) 2014 Paro Flaton fn Solutions to Problems 1 26.75 XW rad T ! see"! X 1.0 2(3.1416) rad = 43 x 10" see! 3x 10° Hy = 43 MHz Row b. 360 X 10" X 2(3.1416) Bo = 56.75% 107 By 26.75 By = 840 From these Chapter 15 437 by = 22 Y yp — 500 X10! x 203.1416) " 26.15 X10" 142 8 3675 By = WLIST lations, you can see that the greater the operating frequency of the instrument (360 MHz versus 500 MHz), the more powerful the magnet (8.46 T versus 11,75 T) required to operate it oe ~~ OX AY 3 5 3 2 4 a2 el is m3 bol Ba na a4 ed B38 ke 2 03 a3 he3 Lo3 5. A would give two signals, B would give one signal, and C would give three signals 6 oa oH er eon Hic n/c non i HW HOG ae dea Allthe Hyare The Hy altached to the front ‘The Hs attached to the equivalent. of the molecule are equivalent, front of the molecule are and the methylene Hs are equivalent, equivalent, and the methylene Hs are not equivalent Copyeight © 2014 Pearson Edson, te 438 Chapter 15 downfield from TMS in Hertz 7. chemical shift in ppm = nical SHUR PPM crating frequency in Megaherts a bh 2pm = Ae *ppm 500 MHZ 1000 Hz 8. b. The angwer would still be 2.0 ppm because the chemical shift is independent of the operating Hreyuency of the spectrometer tHe yg © Soon, 7° Pm v= 1000 1000 HY downfield from TMS 9, a The chemical shift is independent of the operating Frequency. Therefore, ifthe two signals difler by 1.5 ppm in a 300-MHtz spectrometer they will still differ by 1.5 ppm in a 100-MELz spectrometer ie Miz Ph 90 Hy = 0.3 ppm soomnz °* PP" vHe 03 sooMHz PPM x = 150 Hz They differ by 150 Hz. 10, Magnesium i less electronegative than silicon, (See Table 12.1 on page 586 oF the text.) Theretore, the peak for (CH,)-Mz would be upfield from the TMS peak 1 acandb. ° Le CHsCHSCH.CI 2, CHACH:COCH: CHACHCHBr ye : lee | fo be tr most least mot Teast st tease stele shielded shieldod shielded steed shielded (Congright ©2014 Pearson Edson, Ie PR 4 16. Chapter 15439 Recill that the highest requeney signal is the one that is farthest tothe left on the spectrum, The protons) that is underlined in the answer gives the higher frequency signal B CHCHCH BS CHCHCHCI fe. CHCHSCH br Br a ° b. CHYCHOCH, a ncn on, f I cHy cHy ° a, CHACH.CHCI B CCHEHCH, e CHyCHY a 6 ° IL i a bos ab aba ab dicie a cic Hi d. CHCHSCHCHCHy & CHACHCHS CH, och, ° ace abe cd abd Brera fe. CHACHSCHS OCH, he CHCHCHOCH, oi bi d a a bad aoe b a eld b 6 CICHSCHCHCI f ciich.ch.ociich CH CHCHCH, | cy cHy b a From the direction of the electron flow around the benzene ring pictured in Figure 15.6 on page 662 of the ext, you can see that the magnetic field induced in the region of the hydrogens that protrude out from the compound shown in this problem is in the same direction as the applied magnetic field, whereas the mag- netic field induced in the region of the hydrogens that protrude into the center of the compound is in the opposite direction of the applied magnetic field. Thus, the signal at 9.25 ppm is for the hydrogens that protrude out because they need a higher frequency to come into resonance duc to the fact that they sense a larger effective magnetic field since the induced and applied magnetic fields are in the same direction. The signal at ~2.88 py ns that protrude inward, because a smaller frequency is necessary since the induced magnetic field und the applied clic field are in opposite directions. magi Each of the compounds would show two signals, but the ratio of the integrals for the two signals would be different for each of the compounds. The ratio of the integrals for the signals given by the first compound would be 2:9 (or 1:4.5). the ratio of the integrals for the signals given by the second compound would be 1:3, and the ratio of the integrals for the signals given by the third compound would be 1:2, CConptght 2014 Rosson cation. Ine 440 Chapter 15 17, Solved in the text 18, The heights of the integrals for the signals in the spectrum shown in Figure 15.10 are about 3.5 and 5.2 The ratio of the integrals, therefore, is 5.2/3.5 = 1.5. This matches the ratio of the integrals calculated fr B, (Later we will see that a sig wal at ~7 ppm is characteristic of a benzene ring.) BCH CHB 19. The signal farthest downtield in both spectra is the signal for the hydrogens bonded to the carbon that is also bonded to the halogen, Because chlorine is more electronegative than iodine. the farthest downfield signal should be farther downfield in the 'H_ NMR spectrum for [-chloropropane than in the 'H NMR. spectrum for I-iodopropane. Therefore. the first spectrum in Figure 15.2 is the 'H NMR spectrum for I-iodopropane. and the second speetrum in Figure 15.12 is the 'H NMR spectrum for L-ehloropropane 20. Cis easiest to distinguish bee use it will have two signals. whereas A and B will each have three signals. Aaand B can be distinguished by looking at the splitting of theie signals, ‘The signals in the 'H NMR spectrum of A will be (left to right across the spectrum): triplet, triplet, multiplet. ‘The signals in the 'H NMR spectrum of B will be (left to right aeross the spectrum: doublet, multiplet, doublet 21. ‘The signal at 12.2 ppm indicates that the compound is a carboxy ie acid, From the molecular formula and the splitting patterns of the signals. the spectra can be identified as the 'H NMR spectrum of © ° I Be a, CCH OH b, CICHCHS” OH cl 22, a Atriplet is caused by coupling to two equivalent protons on an adjacent earbon, The two protons can be aligned in three different ways: both with the field. one with the field and one against the field. or both against the field. That is why the signal is triplet. There is only one way’to align two protons that with the field or two protons that are against the two ways fo align (wo protons if one is with and one is against the field: with and against or against and with, Consequently, the peaks in a triplet have relative intensities of 1:2: Copyright ©2044 Pear Eden, Chapter 15441 b. A quintet is caused by coupling to four equivalent protons on adjacent carbons. The four protons ean be aligned in five different ways, The following possible arrangements for the alignment of four pro- tons explain why the relative intensities of a quintet are L4:6:4:1. Te Se Me Ut IM mr mn Ut mW Wt tlt tM 23. a. three signals ‘b. three signals two signals: d. three signals CHLCHLCHACH.CHLCH, ICHCHCHsBr——CICHSCH.CHCI 1cHrcH.cHBis | + ; tt tyt Tt I I teipst | ple triplet | riper triplet triplet | pet tokpt sulipet aquinet suit 24, Each compound will have two doublets. In addition, A will have two doublet of doublets. B will have one doublet of doublets and a singlet, and C will have no other signals, or CY NO» PN 2 S27 Br YY Bae A Br B c four signals ¢ewo doublets and two doublets of four signals two signals (two doublets. one—__(two doublets) singlet, and one doublet of doublets) doublets) Br ala boa ob = ~=—Ees br one signal asinglet too signals, a quintet (a) and triplet (b) Br i CHSCH.CHBr abe three signals two triplets (a and ¢) and a multiplet (b) Br I CH,CHCHSBr ae b three signals two doublets (a and b) and a multiplet (c) Congest 212014 Peary Ecation. Ine 42 26. b, The triplet that integrates to 3 protons and the quurtet Chapter 15 ‘The signal at ~7.2 ppm indicates the presence of a benzene ring. The integrations shows that the ring has a single substituents thus the ring has a formula of C,H, Subtracting C,Hs from the molecular formula of the compound (C,H) — CgHs) gives a substituent with a formula of 3H. The triplet at ~0.9 ppm that integrates to 3 protons indicates a methyl group adjacent to a methylene group. The identical integration of the signals at 1.6 ppm and 2.6 ppm indicates two methylene groups. Thus. the compound is propyllbenzene. _ & decincinces Vf integrates to 2 protons indicate a CHsCH: group bonded to an atom that is not bonded to any hydrogens. The molecular formula of CsHyO indi cates that the compound is diethyl ketone. CHC ~CHACHs The signals between ~7 and 8 ppm that integrate to 5 protons indicate the presence of a monosubsti- tuted benzene ring. Subtracting Cys from the molecular formula of the compound (C,H) O2 ~ CcHs) shows that the substituent has a formula of CsH,O;, ‘The triplet that integrates to 3 protons and the quartet that integrates to 2 protons suggest a CH:CHs ‘group bonded to an atom that is not bonded to any hydrogens. Therefore. we can conclude that the compound is one of the following: ° 0. , B The substituent attached to the benzene ring in compound A withdraws electrons trom the ring. whereas the substituent attached to the benzene ring in compound B donates electrons into the benzene ring. That one of the peaks of the benzene ring signal is at @ higher frequency (farther downfield) than usual (>8 ppm) suggests that an electron-withdrawing substituent is present on the benzene ring. This is confirmed by the signal for the CH, group at 4.3 ppm, indicating that the methylene group is 2d cent to an oxygen. Thus, the spectrum is that of compound A. Copyright 912014 Porson action. In 2. Chapter 15443 ‘ i ic : a el | =a a CHxCH)CHCH; b. BrCH,CH)Br * 4 \ W a (Remember that equivalent hydrogens do not spit each other's signa) The H on C2 will not be split by the Hon C3, a a a because they ate equivalent, The Hs on C-6 a : will not he split by the Hyon C-5, because the HS on C25 and C-6 are equivalent .—W i Lom guin mt ame yt toy f chicte he CHLCHCHCHCH: cee ¢ a CH, Hy Q ; | i i i chet ¢ \ ~t J a / \ oa 7 os —-C Sen ° ° I i s-cnooncnoct, —wtmewaciiwe maint; gC ° ° I 0._-CHy {I CHACCHSCH CCH - ° 0 +h spectrum is described going from left to right a. BrCH;CH;CH.CH,Br cH triplet triplet (This triplet will not be split by the adjacent equivalent protons.) 1b, two triplets (close to each ether) singlet multiplet (The table “'H NMR Chemical Shifis” in the Study Section of Mastering indicates that a methylene group adjacent to an RO and a methylene group adjacent to a Br appear at about the same place.) singlet (Equivalent Hs do not split each other's signals.) Copyeigt © 2014 Pearson Eton Ine, 44 Chapter 15) quartet singlet tiptet k. doublet doublet of septets doublet €. three singlets 1. triplet singlet quintet f. three doublets of doublets n quartet triplet n Singlet quartet tiptet o doublet multiplet doublet p. quintet, multiplet. multiplet ie tiplet quimter There is no coupling beween H, and H., because they are separated by four ¢ bonds. (We will see in See~ tion 15.17 that unless the sample is pure and dry, a proton bonded to an oxygen isnot split and does not split other protons.) There is no coupling between Hand H,, because they are separated by five «r bonds, The pwo singlets in the 'H NMR spectrum that euch integrate fo 3 protons suggest two methyl groups, one ‘of which is adjacent to an oxygen, That the benzene ring protons (6.7—7.1 ppm consist of two doublets {cach integrating to two hydrogens) indicates a 1.4-disubstituted benzene ring, The IR spectrum also indi- ‘cates a benzene ring (1600 and 1500. em”') with hydrogens bonded to yp" carbons and no carbonyl group. The absorption bands in the 1250-1000em "region suggest there are two C-O single bonds, one with no double-bond character and one with some double-bond character. CHO a 1 Che a (bee A a oN Ee] li c th te} aa b. Band D Solved in the text Solved in the text The OH proton of a carboxylic acid is more deshielded than the OH proton of an alcohol ay a result of electron delocalization that decreases the electron density around the OH proton. In addition, the extent of hydrogen bonding affects the chemical shift of a proton bonded to an oxygen, Carboxylic acids exist as n-bonded dimers (see page 728 in the text): this strongly deshields the OH proton. I On, venus ROH Copyeign © 204 Pear Education, I 37. 38. 9 40. 4. Chapter 15 445 The greater the extent of hydrogen bonding, the greater the chemical shift. Therefore, the 'H NMR spectrum, of pure ethanol would have the signal for the OH proton at a greater chemical shift because it would be hydrogen bonded to a greater extent “7 Rj Figure 15.31 is the 'H NMR spectrum of propanamide. Notice that the signals for the N-H protons are un- Usually broad. Because of the partial double-bond character of the C-N bond. there is no free rotation about the C-N bond, so the two N-H protons are not chemically equivalent. The quartet and triplet are character- istic of an ethyl group, aL 3 44 a3 23 5.3 83 ae 6&4 9 2 b. An arrow is drawn to the carbon that gives the signal at the lowest frequency ° Y I aN 1, CHCH.CHSBr 4 HCH, OCH, 2 HCH” 8 CHy a Y WANE a Gneuctn . | % br 4 K 4 " Each spectrum is described going from left to right: 1. triplet triplet quartet doublet quartet S. doublet doublet quartet opyeight ©2004 Posen Eaton, le, 446 Chapter 15 2. NO: No» Nos { Ce — ro No: a. "HNMR two signals three signals one signal be SCNMR three signals four signals tovo signals 43. a, The signal at 210 ppm is for the carbonyl carbon of a ketone. There are 10 other carbons in the compound but only 5 other signals. That suggests the compound is « symmetrical ketone with identical five-carbon alkyl groups 9 i CH,CHSCH:CH\CH2”CHSCH2CHsCH:CHs b. Because there are only four signals for the six carbons of the benzene ring (the and 117 ppm). the compound must be a 1.4-disubstituted benzene with two different substituents FX = CH:CHs / cc. The signal at 212 ppm is for the carbonyl carbon of a ketone. There are five other carbons in the com- pound but only three other signals. This suggests the compound is a symmetrical eyelie ketone. & ‘eo \S/ 4d. The molecular formula indicates the compound hay one double bond or one ring. The presence of a signal at 130 ppm shows the presence of sp? carbons: thus, the compound must have a double bond, Each of the two 4p? carbons must be bonded to the same groups. because the six carbons exhibit only three signals. Whether the compound is 7s--hevene of rans-3-hexene canaot be determined Irom the spectrum, An 'H NMR spectrum could distinguish the compounds because the coupling constant for trans protons is greater than the coupling constant for eis protons. CHsCH:CH= CHCHSCHy ae oO bedi ca CHRCHCCHCI cn > A It the triangles shown above are drawn on the spectrum in Figure 15.41 of the text, you will be able t0 easily. identify the coupled protons, Point A shows that the a protons are split by the e protons. Point B shows that the b protons are split by the d protons. Copsrighe © 2014 Pearson Education, I 47. 49. Chapter 19447 Croys peak X tells you that the hydrogens that produce the signal at ~ 1,0 ppm in the "H NMR spectrum are bonded to the carbon that produces the signal at ~19 ppm in the "C NMR spectrum, aries) 42 bo 7 42 25 s.3 27 2 ae) 63 ad a4 ‘The Hy, proton will be split into a quartet by the H, protons and into a doublet by the H, protons. ( five peaks ca quintet cieht peaks (a doublet of quartets) is oe a! 1 reg dad bon ee bel deca bain a. cIKcHINO: cHcH” “CHCA, cache | Ie cH CHy CHy Os tomiios ome . tom quintet badd iyo | Va atte the da ea ay we b. CHACHSCH.OCH, d. CH,CH,CH,~ ~CH,CI f. CICH\CH:CH.CH.CH. a, The spectrum must be that of 2-bromopropane, because the NMR spectrum has ovo signals and the lowest frequeney (farthest upfield) signal is a doublet and the other signal is given by a single hydrogen. b. ‘The spectrum must be that of L-nitropropane, because the NMR spectrum has three signals and both the lowest frequency (farthest upfield) and highest frequency (farthest downfield) signals are triplets. ¢. The spectrum must be that of ethyl methyl ketone, because the NMR spectrum has three signals and the signals are a triplet, a singlet, and a quartet Copyeiane 214 Pests Esto, te 448° Chapter 15 ans are found 10 50, By dividi be 3:2:1°9, the value of the integration steps by the smallest one. the ratios of the hydr $54, %_5, BL, Uy, 3 (see 12) a Because the ratios are given in the highest frequency to lowest frequency direction, @ possible compound oul be the following ester oO CHCOCH, CH, CHC sha NON and fon signals be Beat, two signs three signals CH) CH ots ee CINCH CHHCH, aml CHLACCHLCH, two sigmals oy three signals cH ects ‘I d CHC —COCH, and canecth, oc to signals with integration [eT © and the singlet would he ah frequency than the quartet frequency than the singlet three signals & and CRED cH wo signals one signal 2014 Pearson Education, I 53. 58. oN H——cH, and mF pu uw a Chapter 15449 ot cH, j-H a cl the lowest frequency signal would he a doublet iN = Ht i ve es o oh (fou and by the signals for the benzene ring protons plus two signals with integration 3:1 the lowest frequency signal would be a singlet two signals CHy | CH the signals for the benzene ring protons plus two signals with integration 4.5:1 Chemical shift in ppm is independent of the operating frequency. ‘Chemical shitt in hertz is propor onal to the operating frequency. ‘The coupling constant in hertz is independent of the operating frequency. ‘The frequency is lower than that required for UV/Vis spectroscopy. | 7 23 4 4.3 5.4 6 4 fens ks aa es es ences b baci, I, Cy a required for NMR spectroscopy is lower than that required for IR spectroscopy. which c. CERCHCHBr | cn ° {i ic & CHCHS ~OCH:CH, ‘The singlet at 210 ppm indicates the carbonyl group of a ketone. The splitting of the other two signals indicates an isopropyl group. The molecular formula indicates that the compound must have two iso- propyl groups. ° i en cen ie cH CH Gopysiht © 2014 Pear Education tn

You might also like